Contents

Volvo V40 Cross Country 2014 Owners Manual PDF

1 of 492
1 of 492

Summary of Content for Volvo V40 Cross Country 2014 Owners Manual PDF

WEB ED IT ION

OWNER'S MANUAL

DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and maintenance infor- mation contained in this owner's manual.

Table of contents

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

01 01 Introduction Reading the owner's manual.................... 15 Recording data......................................... 17 Accessories and extra equipment............ 18 Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call*..................................................... 18 Information on the Internet....................... 19 Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy..... 20 The owner's manual and the environ- ment.......................................................... 22 Laminated glass........................................ 22 02

02 Safety General information on seatbelts.............. 24 Seatbelt - putting on................................. 25 Seat belt - loosening................................. 26 Seatbelt - pregnancy................................ 26 Seatbelt reminder...................................... 27 Seatbelt tensioner..................................... 27 Safety - warning symbol........................... 28 Airbag system........................................... 29 Airbags on driver's side............................ 30 Passenger airbag...................................... 30 Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat- ing*............................................................ 31 Side airbag (SIPS)..................................... 33 Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster cushion..................................................... 34 Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 34 General information on WHIPS (whiplash protection)................................................. 35 WHIPS - child seats.................................. 36 WHIPS - seating position.......................... 36 When the systems deploy......................... 37 General information on safety mode......... 38 Safety mode - attempting to start the car............................................................. 39 Safety mode - moving the car.................. 40

02 Pedestrian airbag*..................................... 40 Pedestrian airbag - moving the car........... 41 Pedestrian airbag - folding up.................. 42 General information on child safety.......... 42 Child seats................................................ 44 Child seats - location................................ 48 Child seat - ISOFIX................................... 48 ISOFIX - size classes................................ 49 ISOFIX - types of child seat...................... 50 Child seats - upper mounting points........ 52

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

03 03 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car - overview........................................... 54 Instruments and controls, right-hand drive car - overview................................... 57 Combined instrument panel...................... 60 Analogue combined instrument panel - overview.................................................... 60 Digital combined instrument panel - overview.................................................... 61 Eco guide & Power guide*........................ 64 Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols...................................... 65 Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols................................... 66 Outside temperature gauge...................... 68 Trip meter.................................................. 68 Clock......................................................... 69 Volvo Sensus............................................ 70 Key positions............................................ 71 Key positions - functions at different lev- els.............................................................. 71 Seats, front................................................ 73 Seats, front - electrically operated............ 74 Key memory in remote control key........... 75 Seats, rear................................................. 76

03 Steering wheel.......................................... 77 Light switches........................................... 78 Position/parking lamps............................. 80 Daytime running lights.............................. 81 Tunnel detection*...................................... 82 Main/dipped beam.................................... 82 Active high beam*..................................... 83 Active Xenon headlamps*......................... 84 Rear fog lamp........................................... 85 Brake lights............................................... 86 Hazard warning flashers........................... 86 Direction indicators................................... 87 Interior lighting.......................................... 87 Home safe light duration........................... 89 Approach light duration............................ 89 Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pat- tern............................................................ 90 Wipers and washing.................................. 93 Power windows......................................... 95 Door mirrors.............................................. 97 Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating.................................................... 98 Rearview mirror - interior.......................... 99 Glass roof*.............................................. 100

03 Compass................................................. 100 Menu navigation - combined instrument panel....................................................... 101 Menu overview - analogue combined instrument panel..................................... 102 Menu overview - digital combined instru- ment panel.............................................. 102 Messages................................................ 103 Messages - handling............................... 104 MY CAR.................................................. 104 MY CAR - operation................................ 104 MY CAR - search paths.......................... 105 MY CAR - menu options......................... 106 MY CAR - Car settings........................... 108 MY CAR - driving support system.......... 109 MY CAR - System options...................... 111 MY CAR - Voice settings........................ 112 MY CAR - Climate settings..................... 113 MY CAR Information............................... 114 Trip computer......................................... 114 Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel..................................... 115 Trip computer - digital combined instru- ment panel.............................................. 119 Trip computer - functions....................... 123

Table of contents

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Trip computer - trip statistics*................ 124

04 04 Climate control General information on climate control... 126 Actual temperature................................. 126 Sensors - climate control........................ 127 Air cleaning............................................. 127 Air cleaning - passenger compartment fil- ter............................................................ 127 Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Pack- age (CZIP)*.............................................. 128 Air cleaning - IAQS*................................ 128 Air cleaning - material............................. 129 Menu settings - climate control.............. 129 Air distribution in the passenger com- partment.................................................. 129 Electronic climate control - ECC*........... 131 Electronic temperature control - ETC..... 132 Heated front seats*................................. 133 Heated rear seat*.................................... 133 Fan.......................................................... 134 Auto-regulation....................................... 134 Temperature control in the passenger compartment.......................................... 135 Air conditioning....................................... 135 Demisting and defrosting the wind- screen..................................................... 136 Air distribution - recirculation.................. 137

04 Air distribution - table............................. 138 Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater*..................................... 140 Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - direct start/immediate stop......................................................... 141 Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - timer.......................... 141 Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - messages................. 142 Additional heater*.................................... 143 Fuel-driven additional heater*................. 143 Electric additional heater*....................... 144

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

05 05 Loading and storage Storage spaces....................................... 146 Storage compartment drivers side........ 148 Jacket holder.......................................... 148 Tunnel console........................................ 148 Tunnel console - armrest........................ 149 Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ashtray*................................................... 149 Glovebox................................................. 149 Glovebox - cooling.................................. 150 Inlay mats*.............................................. 150 Vanity mirror............................................ 150 Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets............... 151 Loading................................................... 152 Loading - long load................................. 153 Roof load................................................. 153 Load retaining eyelets............................. 153 Loading - bag holder ............................. 154 Loading - folding bag holder*................. 154 12 V socket - cargo area......................... 155 Cargo net................................................ 155 Hat shelf.................................................. 157

06 06 Locks and alarm Remote control key with key blade......... 159 Remote control key/PCC - losing .......... 159 Remote control key/PCC - key memory* 160 Indication locking/unlocking - adjusting. 160 Lock indicator......................................... 161 Remote control key/PCC - Electronic immobiliser.............................................. 161 Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system....................................... 162 Remote control key - function................ 162 Remote control key - range.................... 163 PCC* - unique functions......................... 164 PCC* - range........................................... 165 Detachable key blade............................. 165 Detachable key blade - detaching/ attaching................................................. 166 Detachable key blade - unlocking doors 166 Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery..................................................... 167 Keyless*.................................................. 168 Keyless* - remote control key range....... 169 Keyless* - Secure handling of the remote control key.............................................. 169 Keyless* - interference to remote control key function............................................. 170

06 Keyless* - locking................................... 170 Keyless* - unlocking............................... 171 Keyless* - unlocking with the key blade 171 Keyless* - key memory........................... 172 Keyless* - lock settings........................... 172 Keyless* - antenna location.................... 173 Locking/unlocking - from the outside .... 173 Manual locking of the door..................... 174 Locking/unlocking - from the inside....... 175 Total airing function................................ 176 Locking/unlocking - glovebox................. 176 Locking/unlocking - tailgate.................... 176 Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap........... 178 Deadlocks*.............................................. 178 Child safety locks - manual activation.... 179 Child safety locks - electrical activation* 180 Alarm....................................................... 181 Alarm indicator........................................ 182 Alarm - automatic re-arming................... 182 Alarm - automatic arming....................... 182 Alarm - remote control key not working. 183 Alarm signals........................................... 183 Reduced alarm level............................... 183

Table of contents

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 07 Driver support Stability and traction control system (DSTC)..................................................... 185 Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - operation.................................. 186 Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - symbols and messages........... 187 Road Sign Information (RSI)................... 188 Road sign information (RSI)* - operation 188 Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations 190 Speed limiter*.......................................... 191 Speed limiter* - getting started............... 191 Speed limiter* - changing speed............. 192 Speed limiter - temporary deactivation and standby mode*................................. 193 Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee- ded.......................................................... 194 Speed limiter* - deactivation................... 194 Cruise control*........................................ 194 Cruise control* - managing speed.......... 195 Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode.................................. 197 Cruise control* - resume set speed........ 198 Cruise control* - deactivate.................... 199 Adaptive cruise control (ACC)*............... 199 Adaptive cruise control* - function......... 200

07 Adaptive cruise control* - overview........ 202 Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed...................................................... 203 Adaptive cruise control* - set time inter- val............................................................ 204 Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode............ 204 Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle........................................ 205 Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate...... 206 Adaptive Cruise Control* - Queue Assist 206 Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality................................ 208 Radar sensor........................................... 209 Radar sensor - limitations....................... 209 Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action............................................... 211 Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages................................................ 212 Distance Warning*.................................. 214 Distance Alert* - limitations..................... 215 Distance Alert* - symbols and messages 216 City Safety........................................... 217 City Safety - function........................... 217 City Safety - operation........................ 218

07 City Safety - limitations....................... 219 City Safety - laser sensor.................... 220 City Safety - symbols and messages.. 222 Collision warning system*....................... 223 Collision warning system* - function...... 224 Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion.......................................................... 225 Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians............................................. 227 Collision warning system* - operation.... 228 Collision warning system* - general limi- tations..................................................... 229 Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations.......................................... 231 Collision warning system* - symbols and message.................................................. 233 Driver Alert System*................................ 235 Driver Alert Control (DAC)*...................... 235 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation... 236 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages................................................ 237 Lane Keeping Aid*.................................. 239 Lane keeping assistant - function........... 239 Lane keeping assistant - operation......... 241 Lane keeping assistant - limitations....... 241

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 7

07 Lane keeping assistant - symbols and messages................................................ 243 Park assist syst*...................................... 245 Park assist syst* - function..................... 245 Park assist syst* - backward.................. 247 Park assist syst* - forward...................... 247 Park assist syst* - fault indication........... 248 Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors. 248 Park assist camera.................................. 249 Park assist camera - settings................. 252 Park assist camera - limitations.............. 252 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*........................... 253 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function.......... 253 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation........ 254 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations....... 256 Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and messages................................................ 257 BLIS (Blind Spot Information System).... 257 BLIS - operation...................................... 258 CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)*........................ 260 BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages 262 Speed related power steering................. 262

08 08 Starting and driving Alcolock*................................................. 264 Alcolock* - functions and operation........ 264 Alcolock* - storage.................................. 265 Alcolock* - before starting the engine.... 265 Alcolock* - to bear in mind..................... 266 Alcolock* - symbols and messages........ 268 Starting the engine.................................. 268 Switching off the engine......................... 270 Steering lock........................................... 270 Jump starting.......................................... 270 Gearboxes............................................... 271 Manual gearbox...................................... 272 Gear shift indicator*................................ 272 Automatic gearbox - Geartronic*............ 273 Automatic gearbox - Powershift*............ 276 Gear selector inhibitor............................. 278 Hill start assist (HSA)*............................. 279 Start/Stop*.............................................. 279 Start/Stop* - function and operation....... 280 Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop... 281 Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts........ 282 Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start......................................................... 283

08 Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stop- page manual gearbox............................. 284 Start/Stop* - settings.............................. 284 Start/Stop* - symbols and messages..... 286 All Wheel Drive (AWD)*............................ 288 Hill Descent Control (HDC)..................... 288 Foot brake............................................... 289 Foot brake - anti-lock braking system.... 291 Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers......... 291 Foot brake - emergency brake assis- tance....................................................... 291 Parking brake.......................................... 292 Driving in water....................................... 293 Overheating............................................. 293 Driving with open tailgate....................... 294 Overload - starter battery........................ 294 Before a long journey.............................. 295 Winter driving.......................................... 295 Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing............. 296 Fuel filler flap - manual opening.............. 296 Filling up with fuel................................... 296 Fuel - handling........................................ 297 Fuel - petrol............................................. 298

Table of contents

8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Fuel - diesel............................................. 298 Filling with fuel - with a fuel can.............. 299 Diesel particle filter (DPF)........................ 299 Economical driving.................................. 300 Driving with a trailer................................ 301 Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox... 302 Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox 302 Towing bracket....................................... 303 Detachable towbar - storage.................. 303 Detachable towbar - specifications........ 304 Detachable towbar - attachment/ removal................................................... 304 Trailer Stability Assist - TSA.................... 307 Towing.................................................... 308 Towing eye.............................................. 309 Recovery................................................. 310

09 09 Wheels and tyres Tyres - direction of rotation.................... 312 Tyres - maintenance............................... 312 Tyres - tread wear indicators.................. 314 Wheel bolts............................................. 314 Jack........................................................ 315 Winter tyres............................................. 315 Wheel and wheel rim dimensions........... 316 Tyres - dimensions.................................. 316 Tyres - load index................................... 316 Tyres - speed ratings.............................. 317 Spare wheel*........................................... 317 Changing wheels - taking out the spare wheel*..................................................... 318 Changing wheels - removing wheels...... 319 Changing wheels - fitting the spare wheel*..................................................... 320 Tyres - air pressure................................. 322 Warning triangle...................................... 323 First aid kit*............................................. 324 Emergency puncture repair*................... 324 Emergency puncture repair kit* - loca- tion.......................................................... 325 Emergency puncture repair kit* - over- view......................................................... 326 Emergency puncture repair* - operation. 326

09 Emergency puncture repair* - recheck- ing........................................................... 328 Inflating tyres with the emergency punc- ture repair kit*.......................................... 329 Emergency puncture repair* - stowing components............................................ 330 Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant 330

Table of contents

9

10 10 Maintenance and service Volvo service programme....................... 332 Raising the car........................................ 333 Bonnet - opening and closing................. 335 Engine compartment - overview............. 335 Engine compartment - checking............. 336 Engine oil - general................................. 336 Engine oil - checking and filling.............. 337 Coolant - level......................................... 340 Brake and clutch fluid - level.................. 341 Climate control system - fault tracing and repair....................................................... 341 Lamp replacement.................................. 342 Lamp replacement - location of front lamps...................................................... 343 Lamp replacement - headlamps............. 343 Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs................................. 344 Lamp replacement - dipped beam......... 344 Lamp replacement - main beam............. 344 Lamp replacement - extra main beam.... 345 Lamp replacement - direction indicators front......................................................... 345 Lamp replacement - position/parking lamps front.............................................. 345

10 Lamp replacement - daytime running lights....................................................... 346 Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps...................................................... 346 Lamp replacement - direction indicators rear, brake lights and reversing lamp..... 346 Lamp replacement - rear fog lamp......... 347 Lamp replacement - vanity mirror light- ing........................................................... 348 Lamps - specifications ........................... 348 Wiper blades........................................... 349 Washer fluid - filling................................ 351 Starter battery......................................... 351 Battery - symbols.................................... 352 Starter battery - replacement.................. 353 Battery - Start/Stop................................. 353 Fuses - general....................................... 355 Fuses - in engine compartment.............. 356 Fuses - under glovebox.......................... 359 Fuses - under right front seat................. 362 Car washing............................................ 364 Polishing and waxing.............................. 365 Water and dirt-repellent coating............. 366 Rustproofing........................................... 366 Cleaning the interior................................ 367

10 Paint damage.......................................... 368

Table of contents

10 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

11 11 Audio and media Audio and media..................................... 371 Audio and media - overview................... 372 Audio and media - operating the system 372 Audio and media - menu navigation....... 374 Favourites............................................... 376 Audio and media - audio settings........... 376 Audio and media - general audio set- tings........................................................ 377 Audio and media - advanced audio set- tings........................................................ 377 Setting the equaliser............................... 378 Setting the audio profile.......................... 378 Setting the audio volume and automatic volume control........................................ 378 Radio....................................................... 379 Radio tuning............................................ 379 Automatic radio tuning............................ 380 Radio station list..................................... 380 Manual radio tuning................................ 381 Radio stations as presets....................... 381 RDS functions......................................... 382 Alarms in the event of accidents and dis- asters...................................................... 383 Traffic information (TP)............................ 383 Enhanced Other Networks (EON)........... 384

11 News broadcasts.................................... 384 Radio programme types (PTY)................ 384 Searching radio programme types (PTY) 385 Show radio programme types (PTY)....... 385 Volume control for interrupting radio pro- gramme types (PTY)............................... 386 Radio text................................................ 386 Automatic radio frequency update (AF).. 386 Regional radio programmes (REG)......... 387 Scan radio frequencies........................... 387 Resetting RDS functions......................... 387 Digital radio* (DAB)................................. 388 Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn) 388 Navigation in channel group list (Ensem- ble).......................................................... 389 DAB to DAB link...................................... 389 Digital radio* (DAB) - frequencies........... 389 Digital radio* (DAB) - subchannel............ 390 Digital radio* (DAB) - resetting................ 390 Media player........................................... 390 CD/DVD*................................................. 391 Fast forward/reverse............................... 391 Random selection of disc track or audio file........................................................... 392

11 Playback and navigation of DVD video discs........................................................ 392 Camera angle for playback of DVD video discs........................................................ 393

DivX Video On Demand........................ 393 Picture settings....................................... 394 Media player - compatible file formats... 394 External audio source via AUX/USB* input........................................................ 395 Connecting an external audio source via AUX/USB* input...................................... 396 Playback and navigation of external audio source........................................... 396 Setting the audio volume for external audio source........................................... 398

Media Bluetooth* ................................. 398 Connecting and disconnecting a Bluetooth* device.................................. 399

Registering a Bluetooth* device............ 400

Automatic connection of Bluetooth* device...................................................... 401

Changing to another Bluetooth* device 402

Disconnecting the Bluetooth* device.... 402

Removing a Bluetooth* device.............. 403

Bluetooth handsfree phone................... 403

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11

11 Bluetooth* handsfree phone - overview 404 Making and receiving calls...................... 404

Bluetooth handsfree phone - audio set- tings........................................................ 405

Bluetooth version information............... 406 Phone book............................................. 406 Phone book - quick search for contacts 407 Phone book - character table keypad in centre console........................................ 408 Phone book - searching for contacts..... 409 Phone book - new contact..................... 410 Phone book - speed dial numbers.......... 411 Phone book - receiving a vCard............. 412 Phone book - memory status................. 412 Phone book - clearing............................. 412 Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone...................................................... 413 Language options for voice recognition* control of a mobile phone....................... 414 Help functions for voice recognition* control of a mobile phone....................... 415 Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - user setting and voice volume... 416 Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - voice commands....................... 416

11 Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - quick commands....................... 417 Voice guidance* control of a mobile phone - dialling a number....................... 417 Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - dialling from the call register..... 418 Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - dialling a contact....................... 418 Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - calling the voice mailbox........... 418 Save as favourite.................................... 419 Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* disc......................................................... 419 Playback and navigation of burned discs with audio/video files.............................. 420 Scan disc track or audio file................... 421 TV*........................................................... 421 Searching TV* channels/Preset list......... 423 TV* - channel management..................... 423 Information about the current TV* pro- gramme................................................... 424 Teletext*.................................................. 424 Reception of TV* channel is lost............. 425 Remote control*...................................... 425 Remote control* - functions.................... 426 Remote control* - battery replacement.. 427

11 Audio and media - menu overview......... 428 Menu overview - AM............................... 428 Menu overview - FM............................... 429 Menu overview - Digital radio (DAB)*...... 429 Main overview - CD/DVD Data............... 430 Menu overview - CD Audio..................... 431 Menu overview - DVD Video................... 431 Menu overview - iPod............................. 432 Menu overview - USB............................. 433 Menu overview - Media Bluetooth.......... 433 Menu overview - AUX............................. 434 Menu overview - Bluetooth handsfree.... 434 Menu overview - TV................................ 435

Table of contents

12

12 12 Specifications Type designations................................... 438 Dimensions............................................. 440 Weights................................................... 441 Towing capacity and towball load.......... 442 Engine specifications.............................. 445 Engine oil - adverse driving conditions... 446 Engine oil - grade and volume................ 447 Coolant - grade and volume................... 449 Transmission fluid - grade and volume... 450 Brake fluid - grade and volume............... 451 Washer fluid - quality and volume.......... 451 Fuel tank - volume.................................. 452 Air conditioning, fluid - volume and grade....................................................... 453 Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions... 454 Tyres - approved tyre pressures............. 457 Electrical system..................................... 458 Starter battery - specification................. 459 Type approval - remote control key sys- tem.......................................................... 460 Type approval - radar system................. 460

Type approval - Bluetooth.................... 462 Licenses.................................................. 470 Symbols in the display............................ 472

13 13 Alphabetical Index Alphabetical Index.................................. 476

Table of contents

13

INTRODUCTION

01 Introduction

01

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 15

Reading the owner's manual A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey. This will give you the oppor- tunity to familiarise yourself with new func- tions, to see how best to handle the car in dif- ferent situations, and to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the man- ual.

The specifications, design features and illus- trations in this owner's manual are not bind- ing. We reserve the right to make modifica- tions without prior notice. Volvo Car Corporation

Options/accessories All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk*.

In addition to standard equipment, the owner's manual also describes options (fac- tory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).

The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adapta- tions for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.

In the event of uncertainty over what is stand- ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury.

IMPORTANT

"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facili- tate the use of features and functions for example.

Footnote There is footnote information in the owner's manual that is located at the bottom of the page. This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number. If the foot- note refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral.

Message texts Text messages can be shown in the com- bined instrument panel and the screen. These text messages are highlighted in the owner's manual by means of the text being slightly larger and printed in grey. Examples of this are in menu texts and message texts in the screen (e.g. Audio settings).

Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descend- ing degree of importance for the warning/ information.

Warning for personal injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

|| 01 Introduction

01

16

G 0 3 1 5 9 2

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.

Information

G 0 3 1 5 9 3

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car.

Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual.

When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corres- ponding illustration.

There are numbered lists with letters adjacent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnum- bered and are used to illustrate a move- ment.

Arrows with letters are used to clarify a movement when the reciprocal order is of no relevance.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different com- ponents are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in con- nection with the illustration that describes the item.

Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual.

Example:

Coolant

Engine oil

01 Introduction

01

17

Images The manual's images are sometimes sche- matic and may deviate from the car's appear- ance depending on equipment level and mar- ket.

Related information Related information refers to other sections containing related information.

To be continued }}This symbol is located furthest down to the right when a section continues on the fol- lowing page.

Related information The owner's manual and the environment

(p. 22)

Information on the Internet (p. 19)

Recording data Certain information about the vehicle's opera- tion and functionality, and any incidents, are recorded in the car.

Your vehicle contains a number of computers whose function is to continuously check and monitor the vehicle's operation and function- ality. Some of the computers can record information during normal driving if they detect an error. In addition, information is recorded in the event of a collision or inci- dent. Parts of the recorded information are required so that technicians can diagnose and rectify faults in the vehicle during servic- ing and maintenance and so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and other regulations. In addition to this, the information is used for research purposes by Volvo in order to con- tinually develop quality and safety, as the information can contribute to a better under- standing of the factors that cause accidents and injuries. The information includes details of the status and functionality of various sys- tems and modules in the vehicle with regard to engine, throttle, steering and brake sys- tems, amongst other things. This information may include details regarding the way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehicle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use, steering wheel movement and whether or not the driver and passengers have used their seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa- tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers

for a certain length of time, but also as a result of a collision or incident. This informa- tion may be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to further develop and further enhance safety and quality and as long as there are legal requirements and other regulations that Volvo needs to consider.

Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri- bed information being disclosed to third par- ties without the vehicle owner's consent. However, due to national legislation and reg- ulations Volvo may be required to disclose such information to authorities such as police authorities, or others who may assert a legal right to have access to it.

To be able to read and interpret the informa- tion recorded by the computers in the vehicle requires special technical equipment that Volvo, and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is stored and handled in a secure manner and that the handling com- plies with applicable legal requirements. For further information - contact a Volvo dealer.

01 Introduction

01

18 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Accessories and extra equipment The incorrect connection and installation of accessories and extra equipment can nega- tively affect the car's electronic system.

Certain accessories only function when asso- ciated software is installed in the car's com- puter system. Volvo therefore recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories or extra equipment which are connected to or affect the electrical system.

Heat-reflecting windscreen*

Areas where IR film is not applied.

Dimensions

A 65 mm

B 150 mm

C 125 mm

The windscreen is equipped with a heat- reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat radiation into the passenger compartment.

The positioning of electronic equipment, such as a transponder, behind a glass surface with heat-reflecting film may affect its function and performance.

For the optimal function of electronic equip- ment, it should be positioned on the part of the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the highlighted area in the above illustra- tion).

Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call* If the car is equipped with Volvo On Call (VOC) it is important to change the owner of the service.

VOC is a supplemental service that consists of safety, security and comfort services. In the event of change of ownership it is impor- tant to change the owner of the service.

Closing the VOC service Contact a Volvo dealer in the event of change of ownership in order to close the VOC serv- ice.

Starting the VOC service It is very important that the VOC service changes owner so that the previous owner's ability to use services in the car is stopped. Contact a Volvo dealer in the event of a change of ownership.

Related information Information on the Internet (p. 19)

01 Introduction

01

19

Information on the Internet At www.volvocars.com there is further infor- mation concerning your car.

With a personal Volvo ID it is possible to log in to My Volvo web which is a personal web page for you and your car.

A QR code reader is required to read the QR code, which is available as a supplemental program for several mobile phones. The QR code reader can be downloaded from e.g. App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.

QR code

01 Introduction

01

20

Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and is also manufac-

tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-efficient plants in the world.

G 0 0 0 0 0 0

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Cor- poration's core values which influence all operations. We also believe that our custom- ers share our consideration for the environ- ment.

Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and is also manu- factured in one of the cleanest and most resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corporation has global ISO certification, which includes the environmental standard ISO 14001 covering all factories and several of our other units. We also set requirements

for our partners so that they work systemati- cally with environmental issues.

Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consump- tion in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon diox- ide.

It is possible for the driver to influence fuel consumption. For more information read under the heading, Reducing environmental impact.

Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encompasses a clean interior environ- ment as well as highly efficient emission con- trol. In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger com- partment via the air intake.

01 Introduction

01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21

A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traf- fic outside.

The system consists of an electronic sensor and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni- tored continuously and if there is an increase in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.

The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon filter.

Interior The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- sant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. Extreme attention has been given to choosing environmentally-compatible materials.

Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consump- tion for your car. In this way you contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's work- shops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of our system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which our workshops are designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. Our work- shop staff have the knowledge and the tools

required to guarantee good environmental care.

Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental impact - here are a few tips:

Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regula- tions.

Drive economically - think ahead.

Perform service and maintenance in accordance with the owner's manual's instructions - follow the intervals recom- mended in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

If the car is equipped with an engine block heater*, use it before starting from cold - it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather and the engine reaches normal operating tem- perature more quickly, which lowers con- sumption and reduces emissions.

High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resis- tance - a doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.

Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

Following this advice can save money, the planet's resources are saved, and the car's durability is extended. For more information and further advice, see Economical driving (p. 300) and Fuel consumption and CO2 emis- sions (p. 454).

Recycling As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is important that the car is recycled in an envi- ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility.

Related information The owner's manual and the environment

(p. 22)

01 Introduction

01

22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The owner's manual and the environment The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC certified forests or other controlled sources.

The Forest Stewardship Council symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC certified forests or other controlled sources.

Related information Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy (p.

20)

Laminated glass

Laminated glass The glass is reinforced which pro- vides better protection against break-ins and improved sound insu- lation in the passenger compart-

ment. The windscreen and other windows* have laminated glass.

SAFETY

02 Safety

02

24

General information on seatbelts Heavy braking can have serious consequen- ces if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all passengers are using their seatbelts during the journey.

It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protec- tion. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a nor- mal seating position.

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas- ten their (p. 25) seatbelt by means of an audio and visual reminder (p. 27).

Remember Do not use clips or anything else that can

prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.

The seatbelt must not be twisted or caught on anything.

The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).

Tension the hip strap over the lap by pull- ing the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts your- self. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.

Related information Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 26)

Seat belt - loosening (p. 26)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 27)

02 Safety

02

25

Seatbelt - putting on Put on the seatbelt (p. 24) before driving starts.

Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.

Correctly fitted seatbelt.

Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on the shoulder.

Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and move the belt vertically. Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat.

The locking tab at the centre rear seat only fits into the intended seatbelt buckle.

Remember The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:

if it is pulled out too quickly

during braking and acceleration

if the car leans heavily.

Related information Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 26)

Seat belt - loosening (p. 26)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 27)

Seatbelt reminder (p. 27)

02 Safety

02

26

Seat belt - loosening Loosen the seatbelt (p. 24) when the car is stationary.

Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose.

Related information Seatbelt - putting on (p. 25)

Seatbelt reminder (p. 27)

Seatbelt - pregnancy Seatbelt (p. 24) must always be worn during pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way.

G 0 2 0 9 9 8

The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as pos- sible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt.

As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant dri- vers must adjust the seat (p. 73) and steer- ing wheel (p. 77) such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel).

The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdo- men and steering wheel.

Related information Seatbelt - putting on (p. 25)

Seat belt - loosening (p. 26)

02 Safety

02

27

Seatbelt reminder Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas- ten (p. 25) their seatbelt by means of an audio and visual reminder.

The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in some cases time dependent. The visual reminder is located in the roof console and in the combined instrument panel (p. 60).

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system.

Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:

Provides information on which seatbelts (p. 24) are being used in the rear seat. A message appears in the combined instru- ment panel when the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear doors has been opened. The message is acknowledged

automatically after approximately 30 seconds driving or after pressing the indicator stalk (p. 101) OK button. If any- one is unbelted then the message can only be acknowledged manually by pressing the indicator stalk OK button.

Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during travel. This warning takes the form of a message in the combined instrument panel along with the audio/visual signal. The warning stops when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be acknowledged manually by pressing the OK button.

The combined instrument panel's information display shows which seatbelts are in use. This information is always available.

Seatbelt tensioner Seatbelts (p. 24) on the driver's side, the pas- senger side and at the outer rear seats are fit- ted with seatbelt tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for the occupants.

WARNING

Never insert the tongue of the passenger's seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side. Always insert the tongue of the seat- belt into the buckle on the correct side. Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.

Related information General information on seatbelts (p. 24)

02 Safety

02

28

Safety - warning symbol The warning symbol is shown if a fault is detected during fault tracing or if a system has been activated. Where required, the warning symbol is shown together with a message in the combined instrument panel (p. 60) information display.

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air- bag system (p. 29) in the analogue combined instrument panel.

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air- bag system in the digital combined instrument panel.

The warning symbol in the combined instru- ment panel is switched on with the remote control key in key position II (p. 71), fault tracing is performed each time the ignition is switched on. The symbol clears after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag sys- tem is fault-free.

The warning symbol is shown if a fault is detected during fault tracing or if a system has been activated. Where required, the warning symbol is shown together with a message in the display. If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and SRS airbag Service required or SRS airbag Service urgent appears in the dis- play. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

WARNING

If the warning symbol for the airbag sys- tem remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means that the airbag sys- tem does not have full functionality. The symbol indicates a fault in the airbag sys- tem, the belt tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or some other fault in the sys- tem. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immedi- ately.

Related information General information on safety mode (p.

38)

02 Safety

02

29

Airbag system In the event of a frontal collision the airbag system helps to protect the head, face and chest of the driver and passenger.

G 0 1 8 6 6 5

Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand- drive car.

G 0 1 8 6 6 6

Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand- drive car.

The system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

NOTE

The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or not the seatbelt is fastened. Applies to all seatbelt positions apart from centre seat rear.

It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- sion. The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accordingly so that one or more airbags are deployed.

Related information Airbags on driver's side (p. 30)

Passenger airbag (p. 30)

Safety - warning symbol (p. 28)

02 Safety

02

30

Airbags on driver's side To supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt (p. 24) on the driver side, the car is equipped with two airbags (p. 29).

One of the airbags is folded up into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.

Knee airbag on the driver's side in a left-hand- drive car.

The second airbag (at knee level) is fitted in the lower part of the instrument panel on the driver's side; this panel is labelled AIRBAG.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbags in the event of a collision.

Related information Passenger airbag (p. 30)

Passenger airbag To supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt (p. 24) on the passenger side, the car is equipped with an airbag (p. 29).

The airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.

Location of the front passenger airbag in a left- hand drive car.

02 Safety

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 31

Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- hand drive car.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the air- bag is activated.

Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

Switch - PACOS* The front passenger airbag can be deacti- vated (p. 31) if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).

WARNING

If the car is equipped with a front passen- ger airbag, but does not have a PACOS switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag will always be activated.

Related information Airbags on driver's side (p. 30)

Child seats (p. 44)

Passenger airbag - activating/ deactivating* Front passenger airbag (p. 30) can be deacti- vated if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).

Switch - PACOS The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is located on the passenger end of the instru- ment panel and is accessible when the pas- senger door is open.

Check that the switch is in the required posi- tion. The remote control key's key blade (p. 166) should be used to change position.

Position of airbag label plus switch.

The airbag is activated. With the switch in this position, persons taller than 140 cm can sit in the front passenger seat, but

|| 02 Safety

02

32

never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion.

The airbag is deactivated. With the switch in this position, children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat, but never persons taller than 140 cm.

WARNING

Activated airbag (passenger seat):

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.

Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):

No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the air- bag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

NOTE

When the remote control key is in key position II (p. 71) the warning symbol (p. 28) for the airbag is shown in the com- bined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds.

Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag.

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated.

A text message and a warning symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preced- ing illustration).

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the air- bag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.

A text message and a symbol in the roof con- sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas- senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the message in the roof con- sole indicates that the airbag is deacti- vated, and if the warning symbol (p. 28) for the airbag system is also displayed on the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Visit a workshop as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

02 Safety

02

33

WARNING

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the lives of passengers in the car.

Related information Child seats (p. 44)

Side airbag (SIPS) In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- er's and front passenger seats protect the chest area and the hip and are an important part of the SIPS.

The SIPS bag system consists of two main components, side airbag and sensors. The side airbags are located in the front seat backrests.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.

Driver's seat, left-hand drive.

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

|| 02 Safety

02

34

WARNING

Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS- bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.

Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Related information Airbags on driver's side (p. 30)

Passenger airbag (p. 30)

Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster cushion (p. 34)

Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 34)

Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster cushion The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag (p. 33).

Child seat/booster cushion (p. 44) can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated airbag (p. 31) on the front passenger side.

Related information Passenger airbag (p. 30)

General information on child safety (p. 42)

Inflatable Curtain (IC) The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a colli- sion.

The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a part of the SIPS system (p. 33). It is fitted in the headlining along both sides of the roof and protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.

02 Safety

02

35

WARNING

Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).

Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side pan- els. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.

WARNING

Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the windows in the doors. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is con- cealed in the headlining, may be compro- mised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.

Always use a seatbelt.

Related information General information on seatbelts (p. 24)

Airbag system (p. 29)

Side airbag (SIPS) (p. 33)

General information on WHIPS (whiplash protection) WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a pro- tection against whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy absorbing backrests and specially designed head restraints in the front seats.

The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the collision, and the nature of the colliding vehi- cle all have an influence.

|| 02 Safety

02

36

WARNING

The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Related information WHIPS - child seats (p. 36)

WHIPS - seating position (p. 36)

General information on seatbelts (p. 24)

WHIPS - child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system (p. 35).

Child seat/booster cushion (p. 44) can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated airbag (p. 31) on the front passenger side.

Related information General information on child safety (p.

42)

WHIPS - seating position In order to obtain optimum protection from the WHIPS system (p. 35) the driver and pas- senger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system's function is not obstructed.

Seating position Set the correct seating position in the front seat (p. 73) before driving starts.

Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.

Function

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.

02 Safety

02

37

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.

Do not place objects on the rear seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.

WARNING

If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged.

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear- end collision.

When the systems deploy In the event of a collision Volvo's different personal safety systems work together in order to minimise injury.

System Triggered

Seatbelt ten- sioner (p. 27) front seat

In the event of a frontal collision, and/or side-impact collision, and/or rear-end collision and/or overturning

Seatbelt ten- sioner (p. 27) rear seatA

In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or overturning

Airbags

(Steering wheel, knee (p. 30), pas- senger airbag (p. 30))

In a frontal collisionB

Side airbags (SIPS) (p. 33)

In a side-impact accidentB

02 Safety

02

38

System Triggered

Inflatable Curtain IC (p. 34)

In the event of a side impact and/or over- turning and/or some frontal collisionsB

Whiplash protec- tion WHIPS (p. 35)

In a rear-end colli- sion

A There is no seatbelt tensioner at the centre rear seat. B The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a

collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags (p. 29) have deployed, the fol- lowing is recommended:

Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an author- ised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.

Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.

Always contact a doctor.

NOTE

The airbags and belt tensioner system are deployed only once during a collision.

WARNING

The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the air- bags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it con- veyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irrita- tion/injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

General information on safety mode Safety mode is a protective state that is enforced when the collision may have dam- aged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, or the brake system.

Warning triangle in the analogue combined instrument panel.

02 Safety

02

39

Warning triangle in the digital combined instru- ment panel.

If the car is involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See manual may appear in the combined instrument panel (p. 60) informa- tion display. This means that the car has reduced functionality.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in per- sonal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has been displayed.

Related information Safety mode - attempting to start the car

(p. 39)

Safety mode - moving the car (p. 40)

Safety mode - attempting to start the car If the car is set in safety mode (p. 38) then an attempt to start the car can be made if every- thing seems normal and the absence of fuel leakage has been checked.

First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car.

Remove the remote control key and open the driver's door. If a message is now shown to the effect that the ignition is on, press the start button. Then close the door and reinsert the remote control key. The car's electronics will now try to reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to start the car.

If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display, then the car must not be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery service (p. 310) used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once mov- ing.

|| 02 Safety

02

40 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See manual message is displayed. Leave the car at once.

WARNING

If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Related information Safety mode - moving the car (p. 40)

Safety mode - moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode See manual has been reset after attempting to start the car (p. 39) , the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position.

Do not move the car further than necessary.

Related information General information on safety mode (p.

38)

Pedestrian airbag* In certain frontal collisions, the pedestrian air- bag (Pedestrian Airbag) contributes to miti- gating the collision of the pedestrian with the car.

The pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag) is fitted under the bonnet near the windscreen. In the event of certain frontal collisions with a pedestrian, the sensors in the front bumper react and the airbag inflates if required based on the force of the impact. The sensors are active at a speed of approx. 20-50 km/h and an ambient temperature between -20 and +70C.

The sensors are designed to detect a collision with an object that has similar properties to those of the human leg.

02 Safety

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 41

NOTE

There may be objects in the traffic environ- ment that prompt a signal to the sensors that is similar to a collision with a pedes- trian. It is possible that the system will be activated in the event of a collision with such an object.

If the airbag is activated (Pedestrian Airbag)

the rear part of the bonnet is raised and locked in this position

the hazard warning flashers are activated

the brake system is prepared for the upcoming emergency braking.

WARNING

Do not fit any accessories or change any- thing in the front if the car is equipped with airbag (Pedestrian Airbag). Incorrect inter- vention at the front may cause incorrect function in the system and lead to serious injury and damage to the car.

Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms are used and that you only use genu- ine parts for them.

WARNING

Volvo recommends contacting an author- ised Volvo workshop in the event of dam- age to the bumper in order to ensure that the system is intact.

Related information Pedestrian airbag - moving the car (p.

41)

Pedestrian airbag - folding up (p. 42)

Pedestrian airbag - moving the car The car may be moved if it has not been set in safety mode (p. 38).

If any of the other airbags in the passenger compartment were activated then the car remains in safety mode.

If only the pedestrian airbag (p. 40) Pedestrian Airbag has been activated:

1. Move the car to a safe location as close as possible.

2. Fold up the airbag in accordance with the instructions (p. 42).

3. Seek the nearest workshop.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that, after activation of the airbag, you contact an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible.

Related information Pedestrian airbag* (p. 40)

02 Safety

02

42

Pedestrian airbag - folding up The car may be moved if it has not been set in safety mode (p. 38).

The pedestrian airbag (p. 40) (Pedestrain Airbag) must be folded up before the car is moved.

Airbag (Pedestrian Airbag)

Airbag housing

Velcro strap, passenger side

Velcro strap, driver's side

The airbag may feel warm and give off smoke. This is normal. Fold the airbag as fol- lows:

1. Find the Velcro strap on the driver's side (4).

2. Gather the airbag fabric along its length on the driver's side. Then fold the gath- ered fabric towards the centre. Wind the Velcro strap (double sided) around as much fabric as possible and fasten it.

3. Press the rolled up portion of the airbag into the airbag housing (2).

4. Repeat steps 1-3 for the passenger side. It may be necessary to fold the gathered fabric twice on this side in order to wind the Velcro strap around it.

5. The airbag housing cover will be open slightly. This is completely normal.

Related information Pedestrian airbag - moving the car (p. 41)

General information on child safety Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-facing child seats until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then front-facing booster cushions/child seats until up to 10 years of age.

The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight and size; see Child seats (p. 44).

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.

Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, booster cushions & attachment devices) which is designed for your particular car. Using Volvo's child safety equipment pro- vides you with optimum conditions for your child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety equipment fits and is easy to use.

02 Safety

02

43

NOTE

In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

Child safety locks The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles can be blocked (p. 179) from open- ing from the inside.

Related information Child seats (p. 44)

Child seats - location (p. 48)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)

Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 52)

02 Safety

02

44

Child seats Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make sure that the child seat is being used correctly.

G 0 2 0 7 3 9

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

NOTE

When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included.

WARNING

Do not secure the straps of the child seat to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar, springs or the rails and beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.

Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.

02 Safety

02

}} 45

Recommended child seats1

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(L)

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Child seats which are universally approved.A

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

1 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

|| 02 Safety

02

46

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 1

9-18 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Group 1

9-18 kg

Child seats which are universally approved.A

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(U)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(U)

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

02 Safety

02

47

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 04216

(UF)

Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 04216

(UF)

L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.

UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.

B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.

A Only for rear-facing child seat. Set the seat's backrest in upright position.

Related information Child seats - location (p. 48)

Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 52)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)

General information on child safety (p. 42)

02 Safety

02

48

Child seats - location Always fit child seats/booster cushions (p. 44) in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is acti- vated (p. 31). If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer seri- ous injury if the airbag deploys.

The label for the airbag is visible when the pas- senger door is opened, see the illustration (p. 31).

You may place:

a child seat/booster cushion on the front passenger seat provided there is no acti- vated airbag on the front passenger side.

one or more child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the air- bag (SRS) is activated.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening but- ton must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

Related information General information on child safety (p. 42)

Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 52)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)

Child seat - ISOFIX ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats (p. 44) that is based on an international stand- ard.

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are located at the lower section of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indi- cated by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see preceding illustration).

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points.

Related information ISOFIX - size classes (p. 49)

ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 50)

General information on child safety (p. 42)

Child seats (p. 44)

02 Safety

02

49

Child seats - location (p. 48)

Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 52)

ISOFIX - size classes There is a size classification for child seats using the ISOFIX (p. 48) fixture system in order to assist users in choosing the correct type of child seat (p. 50).

Size class

Description

A Full size, front-facing child seat

B Reduced size (alt. 1), front- facing child seat

B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-fac- ing child seat

C Full size, rear-facing child seat

D Reduced size, rear-facing child seat

E Rear-facing infant seat

F Transverse infant seat, left- hand

G Transverse infant seat, right- hand

WARNING

Never place the child in the passenger seat if the car is fitted with an activated air- bag.

NOTE

If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi- cation, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda- tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.

Related information ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 50)

02 Safety

02

50

ISOFIX - types of child seat Child seats are in different sizes cars are in different sizes. This means that not all child

seats are suitable for all seats in all car mod- els.

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIXA installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X

G X X

Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK

(IL)

Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK

(IL)

D X OK

(IL)

C X OK

(IL)

Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK

(IL)

C X OK

(IL)

02 Safety

02

51

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIXA installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKB

(IUF)

B1 X OKB

(IUF)

A X OKB

(IUF)

X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.

IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal catego- ries.

IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.

A ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats that is based on an international standard. B Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

Make sure you select the right size class (p. 49) of child seat with ISOFIX fixture system.

Related information Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)

02 Safety

02

52

Child seats - upper mounting points The car is equipped with upper mounting points for certain front-facing child seats (p. 44). These mounting points are located on the rear of the seat.

Upper mounting points

The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recommends that small children should sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age as possible.

NOTE

Fold the head restraints in order to facili- tate fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats.

NOTE

In cars with a cargo cover over the lug- gage compartment, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points.

For detailed information on how the child seat should be tensioned in the upper mounting points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc- tions.

WARNING

The child seat's straps must always be drawn through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the attachment point.

Related information General information on child safety (p. 42)

Child seats - location (p. 48)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 48)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

03 Instruments and controls

03

54

Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car - overview The overview shows where the car's displays and controls are located.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} 55

Overview, left-hand drive cars

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Function See

Menus and mes- sages, direction indicators, main/ dipped beam, trip computer

(p. 101), (p. 104), (p. 87), (p. 82) and (p. 123).

Cruise control (p. 194) and (p. 199).

Horn, airbags (p. 77) and (p. 29).

Combined instru- ment panel

(p. 60).

Menu navigation, audio control, phone control*

(p. 106), (p. 372), (p. 374) and (p. 404).

START/STOP ENGINE button

(p. 268).

Ignition switch (p. 71).

Screen for infotain- ment and display of menus

(p. 106), (p. 371), (p. 372) and (p. 372).

Door handle

Control panel (p. 175), (p. 180), (p. 95) and (p. 97).

Function See

Hazard warning flashers

(p. 86).

Control panel for infotainment system and menu naviga- tion

(p. 106), (p. 372) and (p. 374).

Control panel for climate control

(p. 131) or (p. 132).

Gear selector (p. 272), (p. 273) or (p. 276).

Parking brake (p. 292).

Wipers and wash- ing

(p. 93).

Steering wheel adjustment

(p. 77).

Bonnet opener (p. 335).

Light switch, opener for tailgate

(p. 78) and (p. 176).

Seat adjustment* (p. 74).

Related information Outside temperature gauge (p. 68)

Trip meter (p. 68)

Clock (p. 69)

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} 57

Instruments and controls, right-hand drive car - overview The overview shows where the car's displays and controls are located.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

58

Overview, right-hand drive cars

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59

Function See

Wipers and wash- ing

(p. 93).

Menu navigation, audio control, phone control*

(p. 106), (p. 372), (p. 374) and (p. 404).

Horn, airbags (p. 77) and (p. 29).

Combined instru- ment panel

(p. 60).

Cruise control (p. 194) and (p. 199).

START/STOP ENGINE button

(p. 268).

Ignition switch (p. 71).

Screen for infotain- ment and display of menus

(p. 106), (p. 371), (p. 372) and (p. 372).

Door handle

Control panel (p. 175), (p. 180), (p. 95) and (p. 97).

Hazard warning flashers

(p. 86).

Function See

Control panel for infotainment system and menu naviga- tion

(p. 106), (p. 372) and (p. 374).

Control panel for climate control

(p. 131) or (p. 132).

Gear selector (p. 272), (p. 273) or (p. 276).

Parking brake (p. 292).

Menus and mes- sages, direction indicators, main/ dipped beam, trip computer

(p. 101), (p. 104), (p. 87), (p. 82) and (p. 123).

Steering wheel adjustment

(p. 77).

Bonnet opener (p. 335).

Light switch, opener for tailgate

(p. 78) and (p. 176).

Seat adjustment* (p. 74).

Related information Outside temperature gauge (p. 68)

Trip meter (p. 68)

Clock (p. 69)

03 Instruments and controls

03

60 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Combined instrument panel The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as well as messages.

Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 61)

Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 60)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 65)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 66)

Analogue combined instrument panel - overview The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as well as messages. The informa- tion is shown with symbols and text.

Information display

Information display, analogue instrument panel.

There are further descriptions under the func- tions that use the display.

Gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking1, the yellow indi- cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer - functions (p. 123) and Filling up with fuel (p. 296).

Eco meter The meter provides an indica- tion of how economically the car is being driven. The higher the reading on the scale, the more economical it is.

Speedometer

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Gearchange indicator2 / Gear position indicator3. See also Gear shift indicator*

1 When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red. 2 Manual gearbox 3 Automatic gearbox

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61

(p. 272), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 273) or Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 276).

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instru- ment panel.

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

warning symbols4

Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols, apart from symbols in the centre of the information dis- play, illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the function- ality check is carried out in key position II then all symbols go out within a few seconds except the symbol for faults in the car's emis- sions system and the symbol for low oil pres- sure.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 65)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 66)

Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 61)

Digital combined instrument panel - overview The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as well as messages. The informa- tion is shown with symbols and text.

Information display

Information display, digital instrument panel*.

There are further descriptions under the func- tions that use the display.

Gauges and indicators Various themes can be selected for the digital combined instrument panel Possible themes are "Elegance", "Eco" and "Performance". The setting for the theme can be stored in the remote control key's memory when locking the car; see pages Remote control key with

4 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 337).

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

key blade (p. 159) and MY CAR - Car set- tings (p. 108).

A theme can only be selected when the engine is running.

To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk switch's OK button and select the Themes menu option by turning the thumbwheel on the lever. Press the OK button. Turn the thumbwheel to select the theme and confirm the selection by pressing the OK button. For more information on menu navigation, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indi- cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank

is illuminated. See also Trip computer - functions (p. 123) and Filling up with fuel (p. 296).

Temperature gauge for engine coolant

Speedometer

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Gearchange indicator6 / Gear position indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 272), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 273) or Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 276).

Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking8, the yellow indi- cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer - functions (p. 123) and Filling up with fuel (p. 296).

Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 64).

Speedometer

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Gearchange indicator6 / Gear position indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 272), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic*

5 When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red. 6 Manual gearbox 7 Automatic gearbox 8 When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63

(p. 273) or Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 276).

Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking9, the yellow indi- cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer - functions (p. 123) and Filling up with fuel (p. 296).

Temperature gauge for engine coolant

Speedometer

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Power guide. See also Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 64).

Gearchange indicator6 / Gear position indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 272), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 273) or Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 276).

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument panel.

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

warning symbols10

Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols, apart from symbols in the centre of the information dis- play, illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the function- ality check is carried out in key position II then all symbols go out within a few seconds except the symbol for faults in the car's emis- sions system and the symbol for low oil pres- sure.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 65)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 66)

Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 60)

9 When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red. 6 Manual gearbox 7 Automatic gearbox 10 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 337).

03 Instruments and controls

03

64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Eco guide & Power guide* Eco guide and Power guide are two com- bined instrument panel (p. 60) instruments which help the driver to drive the car with optimum driving economy.

The car also stores statistics of journeys made, which can be viewed in the form of a block diagram; see Trip computer - trip statis- tics* (p. 124).

Eco guide This instrument provides an indication of how economically the car is being driven.

To view this function, select the theme "Eco"; see Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 61).

Instantaneous value

Average value

Instantaneous value

The instantaneous value is displayed here - the higher the result on the scale, the better.

The instantaneous value is calculated on the basis of speed, engine speed, engine power utilised plus use of the foot brake.

Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low revs are encouraged. The pointers fall under acceleration and braking.

Very low instantaneous values illuminate the red zone on the meter (with a short delay), which means poor driving economy and hence should be avoided.

Average value

The average value slowly follows the instanta- neous value and describes how the car has been driven of late. The higher the pointers on the scale, the better the economy ach- ieved by the driver.

Power guide This instrument shows the relationship between how much power (Power) is being taken from the engine and how much power is available.

To view this function, select the theme "Performance"; see Digital combined instru- ment panel - overview (p. 61).

Available engine power

Engine power utilised

Available engine power

The smaller, upper pointer shows the availa- ble engine power11. The higher the result on the scale, the more power is available in the current gear.

Engine power utilised

The larger, lower pointer shows the engine power utilised11. The higher the result on the scale, the more power is being taken from the engine.

A large gap between the two pointers indi- cates a large power reserve.

11 Power is dependent on engine speed.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols The indicator symbols alert the driver that a function is activated, that the system is oper- ating, or that an error or failure has occurred.

Indicator symbols

Symbol Specification

ABL fault

Emissions system

ABS fault

Rear fog lamp on

Stability system

Stability system, sport mode

Engine preheater (diesel)

Low level in fuel tank

Information, read display text

Main beam On

Left-hand direction indicator

Symbol Specification

Right-hand direction indicator

Start/Stop, the engine auto- stopped; see Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 280)

ABL fault The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).

Emissions system If the symbol illuminates after the engine has been started then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to a work- shop for checking. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS func- tion.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to a workshop to have the ABS system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Rear fog lamp on This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system.

Stability system, sport mode Sport mode allows for a more active driving experience. The system then detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move- ments and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding of the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.

Engine preheater (diesel) This symbol illuminates during engine pre- heating. Preheating mostly takes place due to low temperature.

Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.

Information, read display text When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the informa- tion display. The message text is cleared with

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

66

the OK button, see Menu navigation - com- bined instrument panel (p. 101), or it disap- pears automatically after a time (time depending on which function is indicated). The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

NOTE

When a service message is shown, the symbol and message are cleared using the OK button, or disappear automatically after a time.

Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash.

Left/right-hand direction indicators Both direction indicator symbols flash when the hazard warning flashers are used.

Start/Stop The symbol shines when the engine is auto- stopped.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 66)

Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 60)

Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 61)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols The warning symbols alert the driver that an important function is activated, or that a seri- ous error or a serious failure has occurred.

Warning symbols

Symbol Specification

Low oil pressureA

Parking brake applied, digital instrument

Parking brake applied, ana- logue instrument

Airbags SRS

Seatbelt reminder

Alternator not charging

Fault in brake system

Warning

A For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 337).

Low oil pressure If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the

engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi- nates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied. The sym- bol is illuminated during application. For more information, see Parking brake (p. 292).

Airbags SRS If this symbol remains illuminated or illumi- nates while driving, it means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop to have the system checked. Volvo recom- mends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Seatbelt reminder This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67

Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reser- voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 341).

If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.

If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reser- voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 341). If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to a workshop to have the brake system checked. Volvo rec- ommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- ther before topping up the brake fluid.

The loss of brake fluid must be investiga- ted by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.

Warning The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the information display at the same time. The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the OK button; see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 101). The warning sym- bol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car further.

2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accord- ance with the message in the display. Clear the message using the OK button.

Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door that is open.

If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 7 km/h then the informa-

tion symbol illuminates.

If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 7 km/h then the warning

symbol illuminates.

If the bonnet12 is not closed properly then the warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possi- ble and close the bonnet.

If the tailgate is not closed properly then the information symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information dis- play. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate.

12 Only cars with alarm*.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

68

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 65)

Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 60)

Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 61)

Outside temperature gauge The display for the outside temperature gauge appears in the combined instrument panel.

Display for outside temperature gauge, digital instrument panel

Display for outside temperature gauge, analogue instrument panel

When the temperature lies between +2 C to -5 C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the display. This warns of icy roads. If the car has been stationary then the gauge may show a reading that is too high.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

Trip meter The trip meter display appears in the com- bined instrument panel.

Trip meter, digital instrument.

Display for trip meter13

The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for measuring short distances. The distance is shown in the display.

Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show the required meter.

A long press (until the change occurs) on the left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets the trip meter shown. For more information, see Trip computer - functions (p. 123).

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

13 Display appearance may differ depending on instrument variant.

03 Instruments and controls

03

69

Clock The clock display appears in the combined instrument panel.

Clock, digital instrument panel.

Display for showing the time14

Set the clock The clock can be adjusted in the menu group MY CAR; for more information see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

1. Locate Settings System options Time.

2. The cursor is located in the first box for Hour: Press OK/MENU - the box is acti- vated.

3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and press OK/MENU - the box is deactivated.

4. Turn TUNE to select the box for Minute (A) and press OK/MENU - the box is acti- vated (B).

5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and press OK/MENU - the box is deactivated.

6. Turn TUNE to select the box for OK and press OK/MENU - the setting is com- plete.

The menu option Settings System options Time format selects the 24h or 12h system (AM/PM).

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

14 The time is shown in the middle of the instrument panel when an analogue instrument panel is fitted.

03 Instruments and controls

03

70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Volvo Sensus Volvo Sensus is the car's operating system, the heart of your personal Volvo experience. It is Sensus that provides information, entertain- ment and functions to simplify your owner- ship.

Volvo Sensus combines and presents many functions in several of the car's systems on the display screen. With Volvo Sensus the car can be personalised by means of an intuitive user interface. Settings can be made in Car settings, Audio and media, Climate control, etc.

With the centre console buttons and controls or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad* functions can be activated or deactivated and many different settings can be made.

With a press on MY CAR all settings related to the driving and control of the car are pre- sented, such as City Safety, Locks and alarm, setting the clock, etc.

With a press on the respective function: RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, NAV* and CAM* other sources, systems and functions can be acti- vated, e.g. AM, FM1, CD, DVD*, TV*, Blue- tooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*.

For more information on all functions/ systems, see the respective section in the owner's manual.

Overview

Centre console control panel.

Navigation* - NAV, see separate supple- ment.

Audio and media (p. 371) (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*).

Car settings (p. 108) - MY CAR.

Climate control system (p. 126).

Park assist camera (p. 249) - CAM*.

Related information Licenses (p. 470)

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71

Key positions The remote control key can be used to set the vehicle's electrical system in different modes/ levels so that different functions are available; see Key positions - functions at different lev- els (p. 71).

Ignition switch with remote control key extrac- ted/inserted.

NOTE

For cars with the Keyless* function the key does not need to be inserted into the igni- tion switch but can be stored in e.g. a pocket. For more information on Keyless functions, see Keyless* (p. 168).

Insert the key 1. Hold the end of the remote control key

with the detachable key blade and insert the key in the ignition switch.

2. Then press the key in the lock up to its end position.

IMPORTANT

Foreign objects in the ignition switch can impair the function or destroy the lock.

Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the detachable key blade; see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 166).

Withdraw the key Push the remote control key, allow it to eject, then pull it out from the ignition switch.

Key positions - functions at different levels In order to enable the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the car's electrical system can be set in 3 differ- ent levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with the remote control key. Throughout this owner's manual these levels are described using the denomination "key positions".

The following table shows the functions avail- able in each key position/level.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Level Functions

0 Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated.

Electrically operated seats can be adjusted.

The audio system can be used for a limited time, see Audio and media (p. 371).

I Sun visor for glass roof, power windows, 12 V socket in the pas- senger compartment, RTI, phone, ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used.

II The headlamps come on.

Warning/indicator lamps illumi- nate for 5 seconds.

Several other systems are acti- vated. However, heating in seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after the engine has been started.

This key position consumes a lot of current from the starter battery and should therefore be avoided!

Choosing key position/level Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This

means that the car's electrical system is at level 0.

Key position I - With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch15

- Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.

NOTE

To reach level I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake/clutch pedal when these key positions are due to be selected.

Key position II - With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch15

- Give a long16 press on START/STOP ENGINE.

Back to key position 0 - To return to key position 0 from position II and I - Briefly press on START/STOP ENGINE.

Audio system For information on the audio system's func- tions with remote control key removed, see Audio and media (p. 371).

Starting and stopping the engine For information about starting/switching off the engine, see Starting the engine (p. 268).

Towing For important information about the remote control key during towing, see Towing (p. 308).

Related information Key positions (p. 71)

15 Not necessary for cars with the Keyless* function. 16 Approx. 2 seconds.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73

Seats, front The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort.

To adjust lumbar support*, turn the wheel17.

Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after changing position.

To raise/lower the front edge of seat cushion*, pump up/down.

Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.

Raise/lower the seat*, pump up/down.

Control panel for power seat*.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked posi- tion in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

Adjusting front seat head restraints

The height of the front seat head restraints can be adjusted.

Adjust the head restraint based on the per- son's height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible.

To adjust the height, the button (see illustra- tion) must be pressed while the restraint is moved up or down.

The head restraint can be adjusted in three different positions.

Lowering the front seat backrest*

The passenger seat backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads.

Move the seat as far back/down as possi- ble.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches on the rear of the back- rest and fold it forward.

4. Push the seat forward so that the head restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

WARNING

Do not use the space behind the front seat, or the rear seat's centre seat, when the front seat backrest is lowered.

17 Also applies to power seat.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is properly locked after being folded up in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

Related information Seats, front - electrically operated (p.

74)

Seats, rear (p. 76)

Seats, front - electrically operated The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort. The power seat can be moved forward/backward and up/down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be raised/lowered. The backrest angle can be changed.

Electrically operated seat*

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat forward/backward and up/down

Backrest rake

The power front seats have overload protec- tion which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this happens, go to key position I or 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again.

Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time.

Preparations The seats can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote con- trol key without the key in the ignition switch. Seat adjustment is normally made in key position I and can always be made when the engine is running.

Seat with memory function*

The memory function stores settings for the seat and the door mirrors.

Store setting Memory button

Memory button

Memory button

Button for storing settings

1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75

2. Hold the button depressed to store set- tings while depressing one of the memory buttons.

Using a stored setting Hold one of the memory buttons depressed until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you release the button then the movement of the seat will stop.

Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the setting buttons for the seat or memory buttons in order to stop the seat.

WARNING

Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Ensure that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped.

Heated seats For heated seats, see Heated front seats* (p. 133) and Heated rear seat* (p. 133).

Related information Seats, front (p. 73)

Seats, rear (p. 76)

Key memory in remote control key All remote control keys can be used by differ- ent drivers to store the settings for the driver's seat and door mirrors18.

Proceed as follows in order to store the set- tings and use the key memory*:

Adjust the seat as you want it.

Lock the car by pressing the lock button on the remote control key that you nor- mally use. This stores the positions of the seat and door mirrors in the remote con- trol key's memory19.

Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock button on the same remote control key) and open the driver's door. The driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically adopt the positions that are stored in the remote control key's memory (if the seat

has been moved since you locked the car).

The key memory can be activated/deacti- vated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Car key memory. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the setting buttons for the seat or memory buttons in order to stop the seat.

Restarting to reach the seat position stored in the key memory is performed by pressing the unlock button on the remote control key. The driver's door must then be open.

WARNING

Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Ensure that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped.

Related information Remote control key - function (p. 162)

18 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors. 19 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.

03 Instruments and controls

03

76

Seats, rear The rear seat backrest and the outer seat head restraints can be folded. The centre seat head restraint can be adjusted to suit the height of the passenger.

Head restraint, centre seat, rear

Adjust the head restraint according to pas- senger height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as required.

To lower the head restraint again, the button (see illustration) must be pressed while the restraint is carefully moved down.

The head restraint can be adjusted in five dif- ferent positions.

NOTE

Do not sit in the centre seat with the head restraint in fully lowered position.

Manual lowering of the outer head restraints, rear seat

Pull the locking handle closest to the head restraint to fold the head restraint forward.

The head restraint is moved back manually.

WARNING

The head restraint must be in locked posi- tion after being folded up.

Lowering the rear seat backrest

IMPORTANT

When the backrest is to be folded, the rear seat cup holder must not be open and there must be no objects in the rear seat. Nor may the seat belts be connected. Oth- erwise there is a risk of damage to the rear seat upholstery.

NOTE

The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be folded forward fully.

Both sections can be folded separately.

If the entire backrest is to be folded then the different sections should be folded separately.

03 Instruments and controls

03

77

If the right-hand section is being lowered - release and adjust head restraint for the centre seat, see the earlier section "Head restraint, centre seat, rear".

The outer head restraints are lowered automatically when the backrests are lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking handle while folding the backrest for- ward at the same time. A red indicator on the lock catch shows that the back- rest is no longer locked in place.

NOTE

When the backrests have been lowered the head restraints must be moved for- ward slightly so as not to make contact with the seat cushion.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

NOTE

When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

WARNING

Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked prop- erly after being folded up.

Related information Seats, front (p. 73)

Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 74)

Steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted in differ- ent positions and has controls for horn and cruise control, as well as menu, audio and phone control.

Adjusting

Adjusting the steering wheel.

Lever - releasing the steering wheel

Possible steering wheel positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth:

1. Push the lever forwards to release the steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back.

WARNING

Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away.

With speed related power steering* the level of steering force can be adjusted, see Speed related power steering (p. 262).

Keypads*

Keypads in the steering wheel.

Cruise control* (p. 194)

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

Audio and media - operating the system (p. 372)

Bluetooth* handsfree phone - overview (p. 404)

Horn

Horn.

Press the centre of the steering wheel to sig- nal.

Light switches The headlamp control activates and adjusts the external lighting. It is also used to adjust display and instrument lighting and mood lighting.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79

Overview, light switches

Overview, light switches.

Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting and ambient lighting*

Button for rear fog lamp

Knob for daytime running lights and park- ing lamps

Thumbwheel20 for headlamp levelling

Knob positions

Posi- tion

Specification

Daytime running lightsA when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running.

Main beam flash can be used.

Daytime running lights and position/parking lamps/side marker lamps when the car's electrical system is in key posi- tion II or the engine is running.

Automatic switching to posi- tion/parking lamps/side marker lamps when the car is parked.

Main beam flash can be used.

Posi- tion

Specification

Daytime running lights and position/parking lamps/side marker lamps during the day when the car's electrical sys- tem is in key position II or the engine is running.

Automatic switching to dipped beam and position/parking lamps/side marker lamps in poor light conditions or when the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.

The tunnel detection (p. 82)* function is activated.

The active high beam (p. 83)* function can be used.

Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on.

Main beam flash can be used.

20 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Posi- tion

Specification

Dipped beam and position/ parking lamps/side marker lamps.

Main beam can be activated.

Main beam flash can be used.

A Fitted in or under the front bumper.

Volvo recommends that mode is used when the car is being driven, as long as traffic situations or weather conditions are unfavour- able for the active high beam function*.

Instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumbwheel.

Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align- ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden.

1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's electrical system in key position I.

2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/ lower beam alignment.

Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.

Only driver

Driver and passenger in the front passen- ger seat

Occupants in all seats

Occupants in all seats and maximum load in the cargo area

Driver and maximum load in the cargo area

Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have automatic headlamp levelling and are there- fore not equipped with the thumbwheel.

Position/parking lamps Position/parking lamps are switched on with the headlamp control knob.

Knob for headlamp control in the position for position/parking lamps.

Turn the knob to the position for (num- ber plate lighting is switched on at the same time).

If the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running then the daytime running lights also switch on.

When it is dark outside and the tailgate is opened the rear position/parking lamps illumi- nate to alert traffic behind. This takes place irrespective of what position the knob is in or what key position the car's electrical system is in.

03 Instruments and controls

03

81

Related information Light switches (p. 78)

Lamp replacement - location of front lamps (p. 343)

Daytime running lights

Daytime running lights during the day. DRL

Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.

With the knob for headlamp control in position the daytime running lights (Daytime Running Lights - DRL) are activated automati- cally when the car is driven during daytime. A light sensor on the top of the instrument panel changes from daytime running lights to dipped beam at twilight or when daylight becomes too weak. Changing to dipped beam also takes place if the windscreen wip- ers or rear fog lamps are activated.

WARNING

This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain.

The driver is always responsible for ensur- ing that the car is driven with its lights in a correct state and in accordance with appli- cable traffic regulations.

Related information Lamp replacement - location of front

lamps (p. 343)

03 Instruments and controls

03

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tunnel detection* Tunnel detection changes the lighting from daytime running lights to dipped beam when the car is driven into a tunnel. Approx. 20 sec- onds after the car has left the tunnel, the light- ing returns to daytime running lights.

The tunnel detection function is available in cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting from daytime running lights to dipped beam. Approx. 20 seconds after the car has left the tunnel, the lighting returns to daytime running lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel within this time period then dipped beam is kept switched on. This prevents frequent changes to the car lighting.

Note that the headlamp control's knob must remain in position for tunnel detection to work.

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 82)

Light switches (p. 78)

Main/dipped beam

Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.

Position for main beam flash

Position for main beam

Dipped beam With the knob in position, dipped beam is activated automatically at dusk or when daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is also activated automatically if the windscreen wipers or rear foglights are activated.

With the knob in position, dipped beam is always switched on when the engine is run- ning or when key position II is active.

Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering wheel to the position for main beam

flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.

Main beam Main beam can be activated when the knob is in position 21 or . Activate/deac- tivate main beam by moving the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end posi- tion and then releasing. Alternatively, the main beam can be deactivated by a light press of the stalk switch toward the steering wheel.

When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the combined

instrument panel.

Related information Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 84)

Active high beam* (p. 83)

Lamp replacement - location of front lamps (p. 343)

Light switches (p. 78)

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern (p. 90)

Tunnel detection* (p. 82)

21 When dipped beam is activated.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83

Active high beam* The Active High Beam function detects the headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and switches the lighting from main beam to dipped beam. The lighting returns to main beam when the incoming light has stopped.

Active high beam - AHB Active high beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam. The function can also take streetlights into account.

The lighting returns to main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

Activating/deactivating AHB can be activated when the headlamp control's knob is in position (provided that the function has not been deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106)).

Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.

The function can start while driving in the dark when the car's speed is 20 km/h or higher.

Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left- hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and then releasing. Deac- tivation when main beam is on means that the lights are reset directly to dipped beam.

Car with analogue combined instrument panel

When AHB is activated the symbol illu- minates in the instrument's information dis- play.

When main beam has been switched on the symbol also illuminates in the com-

bined instrument panel.

Car with digital combined instrument panel

When AHB is activated the symbol turns white in the instrument's information display.

When main beam is activated, the symbol shines blue.

Manual operation

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt.

Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working.

If the message Active main beam Temporary unavailable Switch manually is shown in the combined instrument panel's information display then you have to switch manually between main and dipped beam. However, the knob for headlamp control can still remain in position . The same applies if the message Windscreen sensors blocked See manual and the symbol are shown. The symbol goes out when these messages are shown.

AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

AHB becomes available again, or the wind- screen sensors are no longer blocked, the message goes out and the symbol illu- minates.

WARNING

AHB is an aid for using the optimum beam pattern when conditions are favourable.

The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require.

IMPORTANT

Examples of when manual switching between main and dipped beam may be required:

In heavy rain or dense fog

In freezing rain

In snow flurries or slush

In moonlight

When driving in poorly lit built-up areas

When the traffic ahead has weak light- ing

If there are pedestrians on or beside the road

If there are highly reflective objects such as signs in the vicinity of the road

When the lighting from oncoming traf- fic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier

When there is traffic on connecting roads

On the brow of a hill or in a hollow

In sharp bends.

For more information on the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 231).

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 82)

Light switches (p. 78)

Active Xenon headlamps* Active Xenon headlamps are designed to pro- vide maximum illumination in bends and junc- tions and so provide increased safety.

Active Xenon headlamps ABL

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.

If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- lamps (Active Bending Lights ABL) then the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maxi- mum lighting in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.

The function is activated automatically when the car is started (provided that it has not been deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106)). In the event of a fault in the function the

symbol illuminates in the combined

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85

instrument panel at the same time as the information display shows an explanatory text and a further illuminated symbol.

Symbol Display Specification

Headlamp system malfunc- tion Serv- ice required

The system is disengaged. Visit a workshop if the message remains. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

The function is only active in twilight or dark- ness and only when the car is moving.

The function22 can be deactivated/ activated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings

Car settings Light settings Active Bending Lights. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 82)

Active high beam* (p. 83)

Light switches (p. 78)

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern (p. 90)

Rear fog lamp When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog lamp can be used so that other road users shall notice vehicles in front at an early stage.

Button for rear fog lamp.

The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when key position II is active or the engine is running and the headlamp control's knob is in position or .

Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp indicator symbol in the combined instrument panel and the lamp in the button illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

The rear fog lamp is switched off automati- cally when the engine is switched off or when

the headlamp control's knob is turned to position or .

NOTE

Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country.

Related information Light switches (p. 78)

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps (p. 346)

22 Activated on delivery from the factory.

03 Instruments and controls

03

86

Brake lights The brake light automatically comes on during braking.

The brake light is switched on when the brake pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on when one of driving support systems Adaptive cruise control (p. 199), City Safety (p. 217) or Collision warning system (p. 223) brakes the car.

For information on emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 291).

Related information Lamp replacement - location of rear

lamps (p. 346)

Hazard warning flashers The hazard warning flashers warn other road users by means of all of the car's direction indicator lamps flashing simultaneously when this function is activated.

When the hazard warning flashers are acti- vated, both direction indicator symbols flash in the combined instrument panel.

Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warn- ing flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in the combined instrument panel flash when the hazard warning flashers are used.

The hazard warning flashers are activated automatically when the car has been braked so suddenly that the emergency brake lights have been activated at a speed below 10 km/h. The hazard warning flashers remain on when the car has stopped and are deacti- vated automatically when the car is driven off

again or the button is depressed. For more information on emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see Foot brake - emergency brake lights and auto- matic hazard warning flashers (p. 291).

Related information Direction indicators (p. 87)

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87

Direction indicators The car's direction indicators are operated with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator lamps flash three times or continu- ously, depending on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved.

Direction indicators.

Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicator lamps flash three times. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings Triple indicator. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the outer position.

The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement.

Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols, see Com- bined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 65).

Related information Hazard warning flashers (p. 86)

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps (p. 346)

Lamp replacement - location of front lamps (p. 343)

Interior lighting The passenger compartment lighting is acti- vated/deactivated with the buttons in the con- trols above the front seats and the rear seat.

Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Passenger compartment lighting (floor lamps* and ceiling lamps) - On/Off

Auto function for passenger compartment lighting

Reading lamp, right-hand side

All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes from when:

the engine has been switched off and the car's electrical system is in key position 0

the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Front reading lamps* The reading lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the relevant button in the roof console.

Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.

Rear reading lamps*

Rear reading lamps.

The lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the relevant button.

Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.

Floor lighting as ambient light* To make the interior brighter while driving the floor lighting can be activated at dimmed level.

Floor lamp intensity can be changed in the MY CAR menu system under Settings Car

settings Light settings Interior light Floor lights. Select from Off, Low and

High. For more information on the menu sys- tem, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

Lighting in the front door storage compartments* Lighting in the front door storage compart- ments comes on when the engine starts.

Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror lighting The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 150) is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.

To replace the lamp, see Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting (p. 348).

Lighting in the cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed.

Auto function for passenger compartment lighting The auto function is activated when the lamp in the AUTO button is lit.

The passenger compartment lighting is then switched on and off as indicated below.

The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:

the car is unlocked with the remote con- trol key or key blade, see Remote control key - function (p. 162) or Detachable key blade - unlocking doors (p. 166)

the engine has been switched off and the car's electrical system is in key position 0.

Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when:

the engine is started

the car is locked.

The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed.

It remains switched on for two minutes if one of the doors is open.

If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off automatically after two minutes.

Mood lights* When the normal passenger compartment lighting is switched off and the engine is run- ning, an LED illuminates in the front and rear roof console respectively in order to provide a low light and enhance the ambience while driving. The light also makes it easier to see objects in the storage compartments, etc.,

03 Instruments and controls

03

89

when it is dark outside. Light intensity can be changed in the MY CAR menu system under Settings Car settings Light settings

Interior light Ambient light. Select from Off, Low and High. This lighting extin- guishes when the engine is switched off.

The colour of the light can be also set in the MY CAR menu system under Settings Car settings Light settings Interior light

Ambient light colours. If you select Temperature, the colour shifts between warm white and cold white depending on the temperature in the car or you can choose between different colour themes. The availa- ble colour themes are Frosty White, Toscana White, Ember Gold, Red Sunset, Rainforest, Glacier Blue and Violet Purple. For more information on the menu system, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

Home safe light duration Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam, parking lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting, interior roof lighting and floor lighting.

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked.

1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch.

2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and release it. The function can be activated in the same way as with main beam flash; see Main/dipped beam (p. 82).

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

When the function is activated, dipped beam, parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof lighting and floor lighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the home safe lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings Home safe light duration. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

Related information Approach light duration (p. 89)

Approach light duration Approach lighting consists of parking lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate light- ing, interior roof lighting and floor lighting.

Approach lighting is switched on with the remote control key, see Remote control key - function (p. 162), and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.

When the function is activated with the remote control, the parking lamps, door mir- ror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof lighting and floor lighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the approach lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings Approach light duration. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

Related information Home safe light duration (p. 89)

03 Instruments and controls

03

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be set for right or left-hand traffic.

Adjusting headlamp pattern

G 0 2 1 1 5 1

Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.

G 0 2 1 1 5 2

Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.

Active Xenon headlamps* The light pattern does not need to be adjusted. The headlamp pattern is designed in such a way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.

Halogen headlamps The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens. The headlamp pattern may not be as good.

Masking the headlamps 1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand

drive cars or the C and D templates for right-hand drive cars, see the later sec- tion "Templates for halogen headlamps":

A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right lens)

B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)

C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right lens)

D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)

2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive waterproof material and cut it out.

3. Start from the design lines on the head- lamp lenses; see the lines in the following figure. Position the self-adhesive tem- plates at the design lines with the help of the illustration.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} 91

Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

92

Templates for halogen headlamps

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93

Wipers and washing Wipers and washers clean the windscreen and rear window. The headlamps are cleaned with high-pressure washing.

Windscreen wipers23

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.

Rain sensor, on/off

Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency

Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers.

Single sweep Raise the stalk switch and release to make one sweep.

Intermittent wiping Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent wiping is selected.

Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

Service position wiper blade For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and replacement of wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 349) and Car washing (p. 364).

Rain sensor* The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- screen wipers based on how much water it

detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel.

When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in the button illuminates and the rain sensor symbol is shown in the combined instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or the remote control key in posi- tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but- ton . The windscreen wipers make one sweep.

Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make an extra sweep.

Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sen- sitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An extra sweep is made when the thumb- wheel is turned upward.)

Deactivate Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the button or move the stalk switch down to another wiper program.

23 For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 349). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 351).

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the engine has been switched off.

IMPORTANT

The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Switch off the rain sensor while the car is in motion or when the remote control key is in position I or II. The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the light in the button go out.

Washing the headlamps and windows

Washing function.

Washing the windscreen Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.

The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the stalk switch has been released.

High-pressure headlamp washing* High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle.

Reduced washing If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message that you should fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined instrument panel, then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it.

Wiping and washing the rear window

Rear window wiper intermittent wiping

Rear window wiper continuous speed

Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow in the illustration above) to initiate rear win- dow washing and wiping.

NOTE

The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cooling period (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat in the motor and the outside temperature).

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95

Wiper reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates intermittent rear win- dow wiping24. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged.

If the rear window wiper is already on at con- tinuous speed, no change is made.

NOTE

On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is activated during reversing if the sensor is activated and it is raining.

Related information Washer fluid - filling (p. 351)

Washer fluid - quality and volume (p. 451)

Power windows All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the con- trol panels for the other doors operate their respective power window.

Driver's door control panel.

Switch for electric child safety locks* and disengaging rear power window buttons; see Child safety locks - electrical activa- tion* (p. 180).

Rear window controls

Front window controls

WARNING

Check that no rear seat passengers are trapped when the windows are closed from the driver's door.

WARNING

Check that children or other passengers are not trapped if the windows are closed, even when the remote control key is used.

WARNING

If there are children in the car - remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by selecting key posi- tion 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. For infor- mation on key positions - see Key posi- tions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

24 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

96

Operating

Operating the power windows.

Operating without auto

Operating with auto

All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the con- trol panels for the other doors can only each operate their respective power window. Only one control panel can be operated at a time.

In order for the power windows to be used, the key position must be at least I - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71). The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the engine has been switched off and after the remote control key has been removed - although not after a door has been opened.

Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its

movement. It is possible to override the pinch protection when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if there is ice forming. After two succes- sive closing interruptions the pinch protection will be forced and the automatic function deactivated for a short while, now it is possi- ble to close by continually holding the button pulled up.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

Operating without auto Move one of the controls up/down gently. The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position.

Operating with auto Move one of the controls up/down to the end position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position.

Operating with the remote control key and central locking To remotely operate the power windows from the outside with the remote control key or from inside with central locking, see Remote control key with key blade (p. 159) and Lock- ing/unlocking - from the inside (p. 175).

Resetting If the battery is disconnected then the func- tion for automatic opening must be reset so that it can work correctly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the but- ton to raise the window to its end position and hold it there for one second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second.

WARNING

A reset must take place for pinch protec- tion to work.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} 97

Door mirrors The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door controls.

Door mirrors

Door mirror controls.

Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door

mirror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illumi- nates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated.

WARNING

The mirror on the driver's side is the wide- angle type to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.

Storing the position25

The mirror positions are stored in the key memory when the car has been locked with the remote control key. When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions when the driver's door is opened.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Car key memory Personal settings in key memory. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

Angling the door mirror when parking25

The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when park- ing for example.

Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button.

When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position

after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the button labelled L or R respectively.

Automatic angling of the door mirror when parking25

When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is automatically angled down so that the driver can see the side of the road when parking for example. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after a short time.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt right mirror. For a descrip- tion of the menu system, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

Automatic retraction when locking25

When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are auto- matically retracted/extended.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings Fold mirrors. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

25 Only in combination with power seat with memory; see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 74).

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/ extending to work correctly:

1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- tons.

2. Fold them out again with the L and R but- tons.

3. Repeat the above procedure as neces- sary.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv- ing in narrow spaces:

1. Depress the L and R buttons simultane- ously (key position must be at least I).

2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended posi- tion.

Home safe and approach lighting The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates when approach lighting (p. 89) or home safe lighting (p. 89) is selected.

Related information Rearview mirror - interior (p. 99)

Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating (p. 98)

Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating The defroster is used to quickly remove mist- ing and ice from the windscreen, rear window and door mirrors.

Heated windscreen*, rear window and door mirrors

Heating, windscreen

Heating, rear window and door mirrors

The function is used to remove ice and mist- ing from the windscreen, rear window and door mirrors.

One press of the respective button starts the heating. The light in the button indicates that the function is active. Switch off the heating as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order not to load the battery unnecessarily. How- ever, the function is switched off automati- cally after a certain time.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99

See also Demisting and defrosting the wind- screen (p. 136).

The door mirrors and rear window are demis- ted/defrosted automatically if the car is started in an outside temperature lower than +7 C. Automatic defrosting can be selected in the menu system MY CAR under Settings

Climate settings Auto start rear defrost. Select between On or Off. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

The compass (p. 100) is deactivated when the heated windscreen is activated. When the heated windscreen is deactivated, the com- pass is reactivated.

Rearview mirror - interior The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims auto- matically.

Interior rearview mirror

Control for dimming

Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dimming with the dimming control when lights from behind are distracting:

1. Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment.

2. Return to normal position by moving the control towards the windscreen.

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control for manual dimming is not available on mir- rors with automatic dimming.

The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one forward facing and one rearward facing - that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward fac- ing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.

NOTE

If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sensors, then the dimming function of the rearview mirror is reduced.

The compass (p. 100) can only be specified for a rearview mirror with automatic dimming.

Related information Door mirrors (p. 97)

03 Instruments and controls

03

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Glass roof* The glass roof's blind can be operated with the control in the roof console.

The glass roof* is fixed, but the blind can be operated in key position I or II with the con- trol in the roof console. For information on key positions - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

Automatic opening to end position

Manual opening until the button is released

Manual closing until the button is released

Automatic closing to end position

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching the blind because it may then be damaged.

Only use the control in the roof con- sole to operate the blind.

Compass The rearview mirror contains an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing.

Operation

Rearview mirror with compass.

The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing. Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

The compass* is activated automatically when the car is started or when key position II is active, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71). To deactivate/activate the compass - press in the button on the rear

03 Instruments and controls

03

101

side of the mirror using a paper clip for exam- ple.

The compass is deactivated when the heated windscreen is activated. When the heated windscreen is deactivated, the compass is reactivated.

Calibration The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass is set for the geographic area to which the car was delivered. The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved across several magnetic zones. Proceed as follows:

1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines.

2. Start the car.

NOTE

For the best calibration, switch off all elec- trical equipment (climate control system, wipers, etc.) and makes sure that all doors are closed.

3. Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed approx. 3 seconds. The number of the current magnetic zone is shown.

G 0 3 0 2 9 5

Magnetic zones.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone (115) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the compass.

5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C, or hold the button on the bottom of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 6 seconds (use e.g. a paper clip) until the character C is shown.

6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h until a compass direc- tion is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.

7. Repeat the above procedure as neces- sary.

Menu navigation - combined instrument panel The menus shown on the information display in the combined instrument panel (p. 60) are controlled with the left-hand stalk switch. Which menus are shown depends on the key position (p. 71).

Information display (analogue combined instru- ment panel) and menu navigation controls.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Information displays (digital combined instrument panel) and controls for menu navigation.

OK - access the menu, acknowledge messages and confirm menu selections.

Thumbwheel browse between menu options.

RESET - reset data in the selected trip computer step and go back in the menu structure.

If there is a message (p. 103) then it must be acknowledged with OK in order that the menus shall be shown.

Related information Messages - handling (p. 104)

Menu overview - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 102)

Menu overview - digital combined instru- ment panel (p. 102)

Menu overview - analogue combined instrument panel Which menus are shown in the combined instrument panel's information display depends on the key position (p. 71).

Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car.

Digital speed

Parking heater*

Additional heater*

TC options

Service status

Oil level26

Messages (##)27

Related information Menu navigation - combined instrument

panel (p. 101)

Menu overview - digital combined instru- ment panel (p. 102)

Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

Menu overview - digital combined instrument panel Which menus are shown in the combined instrument panel's information display depends on the key position (p. 71).

Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car.

Settings*

Themes

Contrast mode/Colour mode

Service status

Messages28

Oil level29

Parking heater*

Trip computer reset

Related information Menu navigation - combined instrument

panel (p. 101)

Menu overview - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 102)

Combined instrument panel (p. 60)

26 Certain engines. 27 The number of messages is indicated in brackets.

03 Instruments and controls

03

103

Messages When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message appears on the information display.

Message Specification

Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work- shopB.

Stop engineA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work- shopB.

Service urgentA

Contact a workshopB to check the car immedi- ately.

Service requiredA

Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.

See manualA Read the owner's man- ual.

Book time for mainte- nance

Time to book regular service - contact a work- shopB.

Message Specification

Time for reg- ular mainte- nance

Time for regular service - contact a workshopB. The timing is determined by the number of kilometres driven, number of months since the last service, engine running time and oil grade.

Maintenance overdue

If the service intervals are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts - contact a workshopB.

Transmission Oil change needed

Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.

Transmission Reduced performance

The gearbox cannot han- dle full capacity. Drive with care until the mes- sage clearsC.

If shown repeatedly - contact a workshopB.

Message Specification

Transmission hot Reduce speed

Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner. Disengage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clearsC.

Transmission hot Stop safely Wait for cooling

Critical fault. Stop the car immediately in a safe manner and contact a workshopB.

Temporarily offA

A function has been tem- porarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after star- ting again.

Low battery charge Power save mode

The audio system is switched off to save energy. Charge the bat- tery.

A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.

B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. C For more messages concerning automatic gearbox.

Related information Messages - handling (p. 104)

Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 101)

28 The number of messages is indicated in brackets. 29 Certain engines.

03 Instruments and controls

03

104

Messages - handling Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge and browse among messages (p. 103) that are shown in the information display of the combined instrument panel.

When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message is shown in the display. An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault has been rectified.

Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge30 a message. Scroll through messages with the thumbwheel (p. 101).

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press OK) before the previ- ous activity can be resumed.

Related information Menu overview - analogue combined

instrument panel (p. 102)

Menu overview - digital combined instru- ment panel (p. 102)

MY CAR MY CAR is a menu source that handles many of the car's functions, e.g. setting the clock, door mirrors and locks.

Many of the car's features are handled in this menu source, e.g. setting the clock, door mirrors and locks.

Navigation in the menus is carried out using buttons in the centre console or with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

Certain functions are standard, others are optional - the range also varies depending on the market.

Related information MY CAR - operation (p. 104)

MY CAR - search paths (p. 105)

MY CAR - menu options (p. 106)

MY CAR - operation MY CAR is a menu source where many of the car's functions can be handled, e.g. setting the clock, door mirrors and locks.

Centre console controls

Centre console controls for menu navigation.

Press MY CAR to open the menus under MY CAR.

Press OK/MENU to select/tick in the highlighted menu option or to store the selected function in the memory.

Turn the TUNE knob to scroll up/down among the menu options.

EXIT

EXIT functions Depending on the function in which the cur- sor is located when EXIT is pressed, and at

30 A message can also be acknowledged via the thumbwheel or RESET button.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105

which menu level, one of the following may happen:

telephone call rejected

current function cancelled

input characters deleted

last selection undone

move up in the menu system.

Short and long press may produce varying results.

A long press takes you to the top menu level (p. 374) (Parent view), from which all car functions/menu sources can be accessed.

Steering wheel keypad*

The keypad may vary depending on audio level, see Audio and media - operating the system (p. 372).

Turn the thumbwheel to scroll up/down among the menu options.

Press the thumbwheel to select/tick in the highlighted menu option or to store the selected function in the memory.

EXIT (see previous heading "EXIT func- tions").

Related information MY CAR (p. 104)

MY CAR - search paths (p. 105)

MY CAR - search paths (p. 105)

MY CAR - menu options (p. 106)

MY CAR - search paths MY CAR is a menu source that handles many of the car's functions, e.g. setting the clock, door mirrors and locks.

The current menu level is shown at the top right of the centre console's display screen. The search paths to the menu system's func- tions are given, e.g. as follows:

Settings Car settings Lock settings Doors unlock Driver door, then all.

The following is an example of how a function can be accessed and adjusted using the steering wheel keypad:

1. Press the centre console button MY CAR.

2. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Settings, with the thumbwheel and then press the thumbwheel - a submenu opens.

3. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Car settings and press the thumbwheel - a submenu opens.

4. Scroll to Lock settings and press the thumbwheel - a new submenu opens.

5. Scroll to Doors unlock and press the thumbwheel - a submenu of selectable functions opens.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

106

6. Choose between the options All doors and Driver door, then all and press the thumbwheel - a cross is marked in the option's empty box.

7. Exit the programming by backing out of the menus incrementally with short presses on EXIT or with one long press.

The procedure is the same for the centre con- sole controls (p. 104): OK/MENU, EXIT and the TUNE knob.

Related information MY CAR (p. 104)

MY CAR - operation (p. 104)

MY CAR - search paths (p. 105)

MY CAR - menu options (p. 106)

MY CAR - menu options MY CAR is a menu source where many of the car's functions can be handled, e.g. setting the clock, door mirrors and locks.

The following options are available first/ uppermost in MY CAR:

My V40

Trip statistics

DRIVe

Support systems

Settings

My V40

MY CAR My V40

The display screen shows a grouping of all of the car's driving support systems - these can be activated or deactivated here.

Trip statistics MY CAR Trip statistics

The screen shows the history as a bar chart with average fuel consumption and average speed, see Trip computer - functions (p. 123).

DRIVe MY CAR DRIVe

An introduction of Volvo's Start-Stop system is presented here, as well as recommenda- tions for energy-saving driving techniques.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107

Start/Stop

Eco driving guide

For more information - see Start/Stop* (p. 279).

Driving support systems

MY CAR Support systems

The display screen shows a summary of the current status of the car's driving support systems.

Settings This is how the menus are structured:

Menu level 1

Menu level 2

Menu level 3

Menu level 4

Shown here are the 4 first menu levels under MY CAR Settings. Some menus have fur- ther submenus - these are then described in detail in their respective sections.

When selecting whether a function should be activated/On or deactivated/Off a square is displayed:

On: Selected square.

Off: Empty square.

Select On/Off with OK - then back out of the menu with EXIT.

Menus Car settings (p. 108)

Driving support systems (p. 109)

System settings (p. 111)

Voice settings (p. 112)

Audio settings, see Audio and media - general audio settings (p. 377)

Climate settings (p. 113)

Favourites (p. 376)

Volvo On Call, described in a separate manual.

Information (p. 114)

Related information MY CAR (p. 104)

MY CAR - operation (p. 104)

MY CAR - search paths (p. 105)

MY CAR - search paths (p. 105)

03 Instruments and controls

03

108

MY CAR - Car settings Car settings menu option in the MY CAR menu source handles many of the car's func- tions, e.g. Car key memory and Lock settings for doors.

Car settings See

Car key memory

On

Off

(p. 74) and (p. 97)

Lock settings (p. 162), (p. 168) and (p. 175)

Automatic door locking

On

Off

(p. 162), (p. 168) and (p. 175)

Doors unlock

All doors

Driver door, then all

(p. 162), (p. 168) and (p. 175)

Keyless entry

All doors

Any door

Doors on same side

Both front doors

(p. 162), (p. 168) and (p. 175)

Audible confirmation

On

Off

(p. 162), (p. 168) and (p. 175)

Reduced Guard

Activate once

Ask when exiting

(p. 178) and (p. 183)

Side mirror settings

Fold mirrors

Tilt left mirror

Tilt right mirror

(p. 97)

Light settings

Interior light

Floor lights

Ambient light

Ambient light colours

(p. 87)

Door lock con- firmation light

On

Off

(p. 160)

Unlock confirmation light

On

Off

(p. 160)

Approach light duration

Off

30 sec

60 sec

90 sec

(p. 162) and (p. 89)

Home safe light duration

30 sec

60 sec

90 sec

(p. 89)

Triple indicator

On

Off

(p. 87)

03 Instruments and controls

03

109

Temporary LH traffic

On

Off

or

Temporary RH traffic

On

Off

(p. 90)

Active bending lights

On

Off

(p. 84)

Steering wheel force

Low

Medium

High

(p. 77)

Speed in infotain- ment display

On

Off

(p. 119)

Reset car settings

All menus in Car settings are given original factory settings.

Related information MY CAR (p. 104)

MY CAR - driving support system (p. 109)

MY CAR - System options (p. 111)

MY CAR - Voice settings (p. 112)

Audio and media - general audio settings (p. 377)

MY CAR - Climate settings (p. 113)

MY CAR Information (p. 114)

MY CAR - driving support system Driving support systems menu option in the MY CAR menu source handles functions such as e.g. Collision warning system and Lane keeping aid.

Driver support systems See

Collision Warning

On

Off

(p. 228)

Warning distance

Long

Normal

Short

(p. 228)

Warning sound

On

Off

(p. 228)

Lane Keeping Aid

On

Off

(p. 241)

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

On at start-up

On

Off

(p. 241)

Increased sensitivity*

On

Off

(p. 241)

Assistance alternatives

Vibration only

Steering assist only

Full function

(p. 241)

Road Sign Information

On

Off

(p. 188)

Speed alert

On

Off

(p. 188)

DSTC

On

Off

(p. 186)

City Safety

On

Off

(p. 218)

BLIS

On

Off

(p. 258)

Cross Traffic Alert

On

Off

(p. 258)

Distance Alert

On

Off

(p. 214)

Driver Alert

On

Off

(p. 236)

Related information MY CAR (p. 104)

MY CAR - Car settings (p. 108)

MY CAR - System options (p. 111)

MY CAR - Voice settings (p. 112)

Audio and media - general audio settings (p. 377)

MY CAR - Climate settings (p. 113)

MY CAR Information (p. 114)

03 Instruments and controls

03

111

MY CAR - System options The system settings menu option in the MY CAR menu source handles functions such as e.g. time and languages.

System options See

Time

The combined instrument panel's clock is adjusted here.

(p. 69)

Time format

12 h

24 h

Screen saver

On

Off

The display screen's current con- tent fades out after a period of inactivity and is replaced by a blank screen if this option is selected.

The current screen content returns if any of the display screen's buttons or controls are actuated.

Language

Selects language for menu texts.

Show help text

On

Off

Explanatory text for the display screen's current content is shown with this option selected.

Distance and fuel units

MPG (UK)

MPG (US)

km/l

l/100km

(p. 123)

Temperature unit

Celsius

Fahrenheit

Selects the unit for the display of outside temperature and setting of the climate control system.

(p. 135)

Volume levels

Voice output volume

Front park assist volume

Rear park assist volume

Phone ringing volume

(p. 416), (p. 245) and (p. 398)

Reset system options

All menus in System options are given original factory settings.

Related information MY CAR (p. 104)

MY CAR - Car settings (p. 108)

MY CAR - driving support system (p. 109)

MY CAR - System options (p. 111)

MY CAR - Voice settings (p. 112)

Audio and media - general audio settings (p. 377)

MY CAR - Climate settings (p. 113)

MY CAR Information (p. 114)

03 Instruments and controls

03

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

MY CAR - Voice settings Voice settings menu option in the MY CAR menu source manages functions such as Voice tutorial and Command list for voice set- ting.

Voice settings

Only in cars with Volvo GPS navigator RTI* - see separate manual.

Voice tutorial

This menu option + OK provides spoken information about how the system works.

Voice command list

Phone commands

Phone

Phone call contact

Phone dial number

Navigation commands

Navigation

Navigation repeat instruction

Navigation go to address

General commands

Help

Cancel

Voice tutorial

The menu options under Phone com- mands show several examples of available voice commands - only with a Bluetooth- enabled mobile phone installed. For more and detailed information - see Bluetooth* handsfree phone - overview (p. 404).

The menu options under Navigation com- mands show several examples of available voice commands in the Navigation system.

Voice user setting

Default setting

User 1

User 2

Here there is the option to create a second user profile - an advantage if more than one person shall use the car/system regu- larly. Default setting restores factory set- tings.

Voice training

User 1

User 2

With Voice training the voice recognition system is taught to recognise the driver's voice and pronunciation. A number of phrases are presented on the screen for the driver to read aloud. When the system has learnt how the driver talks, the presen- tation of the phrases stops. Following which e.g. User 1 can be selected in Voice user setting in order that the sys- tem shall listen to the right user.

03 Instruments and controls

03

113

Voice output volume

A volume control appears on the screen - at which point, proceed as follows:

1. Adjust the volume with the thumb- wheel.

2. Test-listen using OK.

3. Use EXIT to store the setting and the menu is switched off.

Voice POI list

Edit list

The number of facilities is extensive and varies depending on market. Maximum 30 favourite facilities can be stored in this list.

For more information on Facilities and Voice recognition - see the Navigation sys- tem's owner's manual.

Related information MY CAR (p. 104)

MY CAR - Car settings (p. 108)

MY CAR - driving support system (p. 109)

MY CAR - System options (p. 111)

Audio and media - general audio settings (p. 377)

MY CAR - Climate settings (p. 113)

MY CAR Information (p. 114)

MY CAR - Climate settings Climate settings menu option in the MY CAR menu source handles functions such as e.g. fan adjustment and recirculation.

Climate settings See

Automatic blower adjustment

Normal

High

Low

(p. 134), (p. 137), (p. 98) and (p. 128)

Recirculation timer

On

Off

(p. 134), (p. 137), (p. 98) and (p. 128)

Automatic rear defroster

On

Off

(p. 134), (p. 137), (p. 98) and (p. 128)

Interior air quality system

On

Off

(p. 134), (p. 137), (p. 98) and (p. 128)

Reset climate settings

All menus in Climate settings are given orig- inal factory settings.

(p. 134), (p. 137), (p. 98) and (p. 128)

Related information MY CAR (p. 104)

MY CAR - Car settings (p. 108)

MY CAR - driving support system (p. 109)

MY CAR - System options (p. 111)

MY CAR - Voice settings (p. 112)

Audio and media - general audio settings (p. 377)

MY CAR Information (p. 114)

03 Instruments and controls

03

114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

MY CAR Information Information menu option in the MY CAR menu source handles functions such as Num- ber of keys and VIN number.

Information See

Number of keys (p. 159)

VIN number (p. 438)

DivX VOD code (p. 393)

Bluetooth software version in car

(p. 406)

Map and software version*

Only in cars with Volvo's naviga- tion system* - see separate sup- plement.

Related information MY CAR (p. 104)

MY CAR - Car settings (p. 108)

MY CAR - driving support system (p. 109)

MY CAR - System options (p. 111)

MY CAR - Voice settings (p. 112)

Audio and media - general audio settings (p. 377)

MY CAR - Climate settings (p. 113)

Trip computer The car's trip computer registers, calculates and displays information.

General Checking and settings can be made immedi- ately after the combined instrument panel is automatically illuminated in connection with unlocking. If none of the trip computer's con- trols are actuated within approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door has been opened then the instrument extinguishes, after which either key position II (p. 71) or engine starting is required in order to operate the trip com- puter.

NOTE

If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip computer can be reactivated.

Acknowledge the message by briefly pressing the indicator stalk OK button.

Group menus The trip computer has two different group menus:

Functions

Heading in combined instrument panel

The trip computer's functions or headings are each listed in an infinite loop.

Related information Trip computer - analogue combined

instrument panel (p. 115)

Trip computer - digital combined instru- ment panel (p. 119)

Trip computer - functions (p. 123)

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} 115

Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel The car's trip computer registers, calculates and displays information.

Information display and controls.

OK - Opens the loop with the trip com- puter's functions + Activates the selected option.

Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the trip computer's headings + Scrolls through the options.

RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of a function after making a selection.

Functions Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust functions:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 2 presses on RESET.

2. Press OK - the loop with all functions opens.

3. Browse through the functions with the thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.

4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after completed checking/ adjustment.

The different functions of the trip computer are listed in the following table:

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Functions Information

Digital speed

- km/h

mph

No display

Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel:

Open with OK, select with the thumbwheel, confirm with OK and go back out with ENTER.

Parking heater*

- Direct start

- Timer 1 - leads to the menu for selecting time.

- Timer 2 - leads to the menu for selecting time.

For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 141).

Additional heater*

Auto On

Off

For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 143).

TC options

- Distance to empty tank

Fuel consumption

Average speed

- Trip meter T1 and total dist.

- Trip meter T2 and total dist.

Here you can select/activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings in the trip computer. The symbols for the items already selected are WHITE with a "tick" - others are GREY and have no "tick":

1. Open the function with OK, scroll through the symbols for the options with the thumbwheel and highlight/stop on the desired symbol.

2. Confirm with OK - the symbol changes colour from GREY to WHITE and is marked with a "tick".

3. Continue to select the function symbols with the thumbwheel or finish with RESET.

Service status Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} 117

Functions Information

Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 337).

Messages (##) For more information, see Messages (p. 103).

A Certain engines.

Headings One of the headings in the following table can be selected for constant display in the com- bined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to determine which:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 2 presses on RESET.

2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable head- ings for the trip computer are shown in a loop.

3. Stop on desired heading.

Trip computer heading in combined instrument panel

Information

Trip meter T1 and total dist. Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.

Trip meter T2 and total dist. Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.

Distance to empty For more information, see Trip computer (p. 114), "Distance to empty tank".

Fuel consumption Current consumption.

Average speed Long press on RESET resets Average speed.

No trip computer information. This option shows a blank display - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop.

The combined instrument panel's trip com- puter can be changed to another option at any time during the journey. Proceed as fol- lows:

Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the desired heading.

Resetting the trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel Trip meter and Average speed

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

With current trip computer heading - Trip meter T1, Trip meter T2 or Average speed - shown in the combined instrument panel:

Give a long press on RESET RESET - selected heading is zeroed.

Each heading must be zeroed individually.

Change unit

To change unit (km/miles) for distance and speed - go to MY CAR Settings System options Distance and fuel units, see Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124).

Related information Trip computer - digital combined instru-

ment panel (p. 119)

Trip computer - functions (p. 123)

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} 119

Trip computer - digital combined instrument panel The car's trip computer registers, calculates and displays information.

Information displays and controls.

OK - Opens the loop with the trip com- puter's functions + Activates the selected option.

Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the trip computer's headings + Scrolls through the options.

RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of a function after making a selection.

Functions Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust functions:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 2 presses on RESET.

2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.

3. Browse through the functions with the thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.

4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after completed checking/adjustment.

The different functions of the trip computer are listed in the following table:

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Functions Information

Trip computer reset

Average

Average speed

Note that this function does not reset the two trip meters T1 and T2 - see the table under the "Headings" section below.

Messages For more information, see Messages (p. 103).

Themes The appearance of the combined instrument panel is selected here, see Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 61).

Settings* Select Auto On or Off.

For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 143).

Contrast mode/Colour mode Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.

Parking heater*

Direct start

- Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for selecting time.

- Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for selecting time.

For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater* - timer (p. 141).

Service status Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.

Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 337).

A Certain engines.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121

Headings Three trip computer headings can be dis- played simultaneously - one in each "win- dow" (see figure above).

One of the heading combinations in the fol- lowing table can be selected for constant dis-

play in the combined instrument panel. Pro- ceed as follows to determine which:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 2 presses on RESET.

2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable head- ing combinations are shown in a loop.

3. Stop on desired heading combination.

Heading combinations Information

Average Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Average speed Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.

Instantaneous Trip meter T2 + Meter reading Distance to empty tank

Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.

Instantaneous Meter reading kmh<>mph kmh<>mph - "Digital speed display", see Trip computer - functions (p. 123).

No trip computer information. This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop.

The combined instrument panel's heading combination for the trip computer can be changed to another option at any time during the journey. Proceed as follows:

Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the desired heading.

Resetting the trip computer - digital combined instrument panel Trip meter

Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading combination containing the trip meter to be reset:

Give a long press on RESET RESET - selected trip meter is zeroed.

Average speed & Average consumption

1. Select function Trip computer reset and activate with OK.

2. Select one of the following options with the thumbwheel and activate with OK:

- l/100 km

- km/h

- Reset both

3. Finish with RESET.

Change unit

To change unit (km/miles) for distance and speed - go to MY CAR Settings System options Distance and fuel units, see Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124).

NOTE

In addition to in the trip computer, these units are also changed in Volvo's naviga- tion system*.

|| 03 Instruments and controls

03

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Trip meter Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading combination containing the trip meter to be reset:

Give a long press on RESET RESET - selected trip meter is zeroed.

Related information Trip computer - analogue combined

instrument panel (p. 115)

Trip computer - functions (p. 123)

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123

Trip computer - functions The car's trip computer can record, calculate and show information. It describes informa- tion such as average consumption and aver- age speed.

Average Average fuel consumption is calculated from the last resetting.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven heater* has been used.

Average speed The average speed is calculated for the driv- ing distance driven since the last reset to zero.

Instantaneous. The information for current fuel consumption is updated continuously - approximately once per second. When the car is driven at low speed the consumption is shown per time unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to mileage.

Different units (km/miles) can be selected for the display - see the heading "Change unit" further down.

Range - distance to empty tank The trip computer shows the approximate distance that can be driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the tank.

No guaranteed range remains when the head- ing Distance to empty shows "----".

In which case, refuel as soon as possible.

The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if the driving style has been changed.

An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance. For more informa- tion on how fuel consumption can be influ- enced, see Volvo Cars' environmental philos- ophy (p. 20).

Digital speed display31

The speed is shown in the opposite unit (kmh/mph) of the main instrument panel. If it is calibrated in mph then the trip computer shows the corresponding speed in km/h and vice versa.

Change unit To change unit (metric/imperial) for distance and speed - go to MY CAR Settings System options Distance and fuel units, see MY CAR - System options (p. 111).

NOTE

In addition to in the trip computer, these units are also changed in Volvo's naviga- tion system*.

Related information Trip computer - analogue combined

instrument panel (p. 115)

Trip computer - digital combined instru- ment panel (p. 119)

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)

31 Only for combined instrument panel "Digital".

03 Instruments and controls

03

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Trip computer - trip statistics* Information is stored about completed trips containing average fuel consumption and average speed, which can be viewed in the centre console's screen as a bar chart.

Function

Trip statistics32.

Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven distance, depending on the scale selected - the bar at the far right shows the value for the current kilometre or 10 km.

With the TUNE wheel, the scale of each block can be switched between 1 km and 10 km - the cursor at the far right shifts position between up and down depending on the scale selected.

Operation A setting can be defined in the MY CAR menu system:

MY CAR My V40 Trip statistics:

Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete all previous statistics, back out of the menu by selecting EXIT.

Reset for every driving cycle - highlight the box by selecting ENTER and go back out of the menu by selecting EXIT.

With the "Reset for every driving cycle" option highlighted, all statistics are deleted automatically once driving is complete and the car has been stationary for 4 hours. The journey statistics start again from zero the next time the engine is started.

If a new drive cycle begins before 4 hours have passed, the current period has to be deleted manually first using the "Start new trip" option.

See also information on Eco guide (p. 64).

Related information Trip computer - analogue combined

instrument panel (p. 115)

Trip computer - digital combined instru- ment panel (p. 119)

Trip computer - functions (p. 123)

32 The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on updated software and market.

CLIMATE CONTROL

04 Climate control

04

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information on climate control The car is equipped with electronic climate control. The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.

There are two different climate control sys- tems:

Electronic temperature control (ETC) (p. 132)

Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 131)

NOTE

The air conditioning system (AC) can be switched off, but to ensure the best possi- ble climate comfort in the passenger com- partment and to prevent the windows from misting, it should always be on.

To bear in mind:

To ensure that the air conditioning works optimally, the side windows must be closed.

Total airing function (p. 176) opens or closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather.

Remove ice and snow from the climate control system air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen).

Remove misting on the insides of the win- dows primarily by using the defroster function (p. 136). To reduce the risk of misting, keep the windows clean and use window cleaner.

In warm weather, condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car. This is normal.

When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the air conditioning can be tempo- rarily switched off. There may then be a temporary increase in temperature in the passenger compartment.

With an auto-stopped engine (p. 279) (cars with Start/Stop*), certain equipment has its function temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control system's air condition- ing and fan speed.

Related information Actual temperature (p. 126)

Sensors - climate control (p. 127)

Menu settings - climate control (p. 129)

Air conditioning (p. 135)

Air distribution in the passenger compart- ment (p. 129)

Air cleaning (p. 127)

Heated front seats* (p. 133)

Heated rear seat* (p. 133)

Actual temperature The temperature you select in the passenger compartment corresponds to the physical experience with reference to factors such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation etc. in and around the car.

The system includes a sun sensor (p. 127) which detects on which side the sun is shin- ing into the passenger compartment. This means1 that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

Temperature control in the passenger compartment (p. 135)

1 Only applies to ECC.

04 Climate control

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127

Sensors - climate control The climate control system has a number of sensors to help control the temperature (p. 126) in the car.

The sun sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard.

The temperature sensor for the passen- ger compartment is located below the cli- mate control panel.

The outside temperature sensor is located in the door mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

Air cleaning The interior in a passenger compartment is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.

Passenger compartment filter (p. 127)

Material in the passenger compart- ment (p. 129)

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) (p. 128)*

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) (p. 128)*

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

Air cleaning - passenger compartment filter All air entering the car's passenger compart- ment is cleaned with a filter.

The filter must be replaced at regular inter- vals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the cor- rect filter is fitted.

Related information Air cleaning (p. 127)

04 Climate control

04

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* CZIP comprises a series of modifications that keep the passenger compartment even clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing sub- stances.

The following is included:

An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened.

The air quality system IAQS (p. 128) is a fully automatic system that cleans the air in the passenger compartment from con- taminants such as particles, hydrocar- bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.

NOTE

To maintain the CZIP standard in cars with CZIP the IAQS filter should be changed after 15 000 km or once per year depend- ing on whichever occurs first. However, up to 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without CZIP and where the customer does not want to retain the CZIP standard, the IAQS filter must be replaced during a regular service.

For more information on CZIP, see the bro- chure included with the purchase of the car.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

Air cleaning (p. 127)

Air cleaning - IAQS* The air quality system IAQS separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and pollution in the passenger compartment.

If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed in order to shut out hydrocar- bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. The air is recirculated in the passenger com- partment.

Activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Climate settings Interior air quality system.

NOTE

The air quality sensor must always be ena- bled to ensure the best air in the passen- ger compartment.

In a cold climate, automatic recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

Air cleaning (p. 127)

Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Pack- age (CZIP)* (p. 128)

04 Climate control

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129

Air cleaning - material Tested materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and to contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean.

The carpets in both the passenger compart- ment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo to clean the interior (p. 367).

Related information Air cleaning (p. 127)

Menu settings - climate control It is possible to activate/deactivate or change the default settings for four of the climate control system's functions via the centre con- sole.

Fan level during automatic climate control (p. 134)*.

Recirculation timer (p. 137).

Automatic start of rear window defroster (p. 98).

Interior air quality system (p. 128)*.

More information is available in the descrip- tion of the menu system (p. 104).

The climate control system's functions can be reset to the default settings via the menu sys- tem in MY CAR and this is carried out under: Settings Climate settings Reset climate settings.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

Air distribution in the passenger compartment The incoming air is divided between a number of different vents in the passenger compart- ment.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode*.

If necessary it can be controlled manually; see the air distribution table (p. 138).

|| 04 Climate control

04

130

Air vents in the dashboard

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the vents at the side windows to remove misting.

NOTE

Remember that small children may be sen- sitive to air flows and draughts.

Air distribution

Air distribution - defroster windscreen

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Air distribution - ventilation floor

The figure consists of three buttons. When pressing the buttons the corresponding figure is illuminated in the display screen (see figure below) and an arrow in front of each part of the figure shows the air distribution that is selected. For more information, see the air distribution table (p. 138).

The selected air distribution is shown in the cen- tre console display screen.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

Auto-regulation (p. 134)

Air distribution - recirculation (p. 137)

04 Climate control

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131

Electronic climate control - ECC* ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the temperature selected in the passenger

compartment and can be set separately for the driver's side and passenger side.

The auto function is used to automatically control temperature, air conditioning, fan speed, recirculation and air distribution.

Fan (p. 134)

AUTO - Automatic climate control (p. 134)

Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), left side

Heated windscreen and max. defroster (p. 136)*

Air distribution (p. 129) - ventilation floor

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Air distribution - defroster windscreen

Rear window and door mirror defrost- ers (p. 98)

Setting, left/right-hand side for tempera- ture control (p. 135)

Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), right side

Temperature control (p. 135)

Recirculation (p. 137)

AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 135)

04 Climate control

04

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Electronic temperature control - ETC The passenger compartment's climate com- fort is controlled manually using the ETC (Electronic Temperature Control).

Fan (p. 134)

Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), left side

AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 135)

Heated windscreen and max. defroster*

Air distribution (p. 129) - ventilation floor

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Air distribution - defroster windscreen

Rear window and door mirror defrost- ers (p. 98)

Recirculation (p. 137)

Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), right side

Temperature control (p. 135)

04 Climate control

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133

Heated front seats* The front seat heating has three positions for increasing the comfort for driver and passen- ger when it is cold.

Current heat level is shown in the centre console display screen.

Press the button repeatedly in order to acti- vate the function:

Highest heat level - three orange fields illuminate in the centre console's screen (see figure above).

Lower heat level - two orange fields illu- minate in the screen.

Lowest heat level - one orange field illu- minates in the screen.

Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.

WARNING

Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Other- wise they may suffer burn injuries.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

Heated rear seat* (p. 133)

Heated rear seat* The heating for the rear seat's outer positions has three positions for increasing the comfort for passengers when it is cold.

Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's lamps:

Press the button repeatedly in order to acti- vate the function:

Highest heat level - three lamps illumi- nate.

Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.

Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.

Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.

|| 04 Climate control

04

134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Other- wise they may suffer burn injuries.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

Heated front seats* (p. 133)

Fan The fan should always be activated in order to avoid misting on the windows.

NOTE

If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged - which can cause a risk of misting on the windows.

ECC* Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed, AUTO is disengaged. If AUTO is selected, then the fan speed is regulated automatically (p. 134) - the fan speed previ- ously set is disengaged.

ETC Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

Electronic climate control - ECC* (p. 131)

Electronic temperature control - ETC (p. 132)

Auto-regulation Auto-regulation is only possible in electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 131).

The auto function automati- cally regulates temperature (p. 135), air conditioning (p. 135), fan speed (p. 134), recirculation (p. 137) and air distribution (p. 129).

If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled automatically. All manual settings are disen- gaged when AUTO is pressed. The display screen shows AUTO CLIMATE.

Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the menu system MY CAR under: Settings

Climate settings Automatic blower adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal or High:

Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow is prioritised.

Normal - Automatic fan control.

High - Automatic fan control. A more intense airflow is prioritised.

More information is available in the descrip- tion of the menu system (p. 104).

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

04 Climate control

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135

Temperature control in the passenger compartment When the car is started, the most recent tem- perature setting is resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.

ECC*

Current temperature for each side is shown in the centre console's display screen.

The temperatures on the driver and passenger sides can be set independently. Repeatedly press L/R in the button to select the setting for left, right or both sides. Set the temperature using

the knob - the selected temperature for either side is displayed in the centre console dis- play.

ETC The temperature in the pas- senger compartment can be adjusted with the knob.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

Actual temperature (p. 126)

Electronic temperature control - ETC (p. 132)

Electronic climate control - ECC* (p. 131)

Air conditioning The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies incoming air as required.

When the lamp in the AC button illuminates, the air conditioning is controlled by the system's automatic func- tion.

When the lamp in the AC button is switched off the air conditioning is disconnected. Other functions are still con- trolled automatically. When the max. defroster function (p. 136) is activated, the air conditioning is switched on automatically so that the air is dehumidified at the maximum setting.

04 Climate control

04

136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Demisting and defrosting the windscreen Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows.

The selected setting is shown in the centre con- sole display screen.

Electric heating*

Max. defroster

The light in the defroster but- ton illuminates when the function is active.

Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the func- tion.

For cars without heated windscreens:

Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illu- minates in the screen.

Switch off the function - no symbol illumi- nates.

For cars with heated windscreens:

Start the heating for the windscreen2 - symbol (1) illuminates in the screen.

Start the heating for the windscreen2 and air flow to the windows - symbols (1) and (2) illuminate in the screen.

Switch off the function - no symbol illumi- nates.

NOTE

Heated windscreen and IR window (p. 18) may have an impact on the performance of transponders and other communication equipment.

NOTE

A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated, where de-icing may take longer.

NOTE

Electrically heated windscreen is not avail- able when the engine is auto-stopped (p. 279).

The following also takes place when the func- tion is active in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compart- ment:

the air conditioning is automatically engaged

recirculation and the air quality system are automatically disengaged.

NOTE

The noise level increases as the fan is operating at max.

When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

2 The compass goes off when the heated windscreen is active.

04 Climate control

04

137

Air distribution - recirculation Select recirculation to shut out bad air, exhaust gases etc. from the passenger com- partment, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when this function is activated.

When recirculation is engaged the orange lamp in the button illuminates.

IMPORTANT

If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

Timer With the timer function activated the system will exit manually activated recirculation mode according to a time that depends on the out- side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the function in the menu system (p. 104) MY CAR under Settings Climate settings Recirculation timer.

NOTE

When max. defroster is selected, recircula- tion is always deactivated.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

Air distribution in the passenger compart- ment (p. 129)

Air distribution - table (p. 138)

04 Climate control

04

138

Air distribution - table Three buttons are used to select the distribu- tion (p. 129) of the air.

Air distribution Use

A large amount of hot air flows to the windows. to remove ice and misting quickly.

Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air flows from the air vents.

to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate, (not at too low fan speed to enable this).

Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents. to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.

Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents. to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.

04 Climate control

04

139

Air distribution Use

Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dash- board air vents.

to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or humid weather.

Air to floor and from dashboard air vents. in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.

Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and win- dows.

to direct heat or cold to the floor.

Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor. to provide cooler air along the floor or warmer air higher up in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

Related information General information on climate control (p.

126)

Air distribution - recirculation (p. 137)

04 Climate control

04

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* Preconditioning prepares the car's heater, engine and passenger compartment before departure so that both wear and energy needs during the journey are reduced. Warm- ing up your car will also extend the driving distance.

The heater can be started directly (p. 141) or with a timer (p. 141).

The heater cannot start if the outside tem- perature exceeds 15 C. At 5 C or lower the maximum running time of the heater is 50 minutes.

WARNING

Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors. Exhaust gases are secreted.

NOTE

When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from under- neath the car, which is perfectly normal.

Refuelling

Warning label on fuel filler flap.

WARNING

Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater before starting to refuel.

Check in the combined instrument panel that the heater is switched off. The heat symbol is shown when it is operating.

Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven heater.

Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel level is too low, the heater will be switched off automatically and a message

appears in the display. Acknowledge the message by pressing the indicator stalk (p. 101) OK button once.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the heater in combination with short driving distances may cause low charge level in the starter battery, this can lead to the heater stopping or never star- ting. In the worst case, engine starting will not be possible.

The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the starter battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis. The heater is used for a maximum of 50 minutes each time.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-

partment heater* - messages (p. 142)

Additional heater* (p. 143)

04 Climate control

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - direct start/ immediate stop Upon direct start of the engine block and pas- senger compartment heater (p. 140), it will run for 50 minutes.

Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature.

NOTE

The car can be started and driven while the heater is running.

1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct start/Stop in order to activate/deactivate the heater and select with OK.

4. Exit the menu with RESET.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-

partment heater* - timer (p. 141)

Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - messages (p. 142)

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer The timer of the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 140) is connected to the car's clock.

Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready. The car's electronic system calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature.

NOTE

All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.

Adjusting 1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel (p. 101) to Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours setting.

5. Select the required hour using the thumb- wheel.

6. Briefly press OK to move to the lit minutes setting.

7. Select the required minute using the thumbwheel.

8. Press OK3 to confirm the setting.

9. Go back in the menu structure using RESET.

10. Select the other time (continue from step 2) or exit the menu with RESET.

Starting 1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and activate with OK.

4. Exit the menu with RESET.

Switching off A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Proceed as follows:

1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK. > If a timer is set but not activated, a

clock icon is shown next to the set time.

3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

3 Press OK again to activate the timer.

|| 04 Climate control

04

142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

4. Deactivate the timer as follows:

long press on OK or

short press on OK to continue in the menu. Then select to stop the timer and confirm with OK.

5. Exit the menu with RESET.

A timer-started heater can be switched off directly (p. 141).

Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-

partment heater* - messages (p. 142)

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages Symbols and messages regarding the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 140) differ depending on whether the com- bined instrument panel is analogue (p. 60) or digital (p. 61).

When the heater has been activated the heat symbol illuminates in the information display.

When one of the timers is activated the sym- bol for activated timer illuminates in the infor- mation display at the same time as the set time is shown next to the symbol.

Symbol for activated timer in ana- logue combined instrument panel.

Symbol for activated timer in digital combined instrument panel.

The table shows symbols and display texts that appear.

Sym- bol

Display Specification

The heater is switched on and running.

The heater's timer is activated after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch and leaving the car - the engine and passenger com- partment are heated at the set time.

Fuel operated heater stopped Battery saving mode

The heater has been stopped by the car's electron- ics in order to facilitate starting the engine.

04 Climate control

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143

Sym- bol

Display Specification

Fuel operated heater stopped Low fuel level

Setting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate starting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.

Fuel operated heater Service required

Heater not work- ing. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo work- shop.

A display text clears automatically after a time or after one press on the indicator stalk (p. 101) OK button.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-

partment heater* - direct start/immediate stop (p. 141)

Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - timer (p. 141)

Additional heater* For cars with diesel engines sold in cold cli- mate zones4 an additional heater may be required to obtain the correct operating tem- perature in the engine and to obtain sufficient heating in the passenger compartment.

In such instances, the car is equipped with either

electric additional heater (p. 144) or

fuel-driven additional heater (p. 143)5.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-

partment heater* (p. 140)

Fuel-driven additional heater* The car is equipped with either an electric (p. 144) or a fuel-driven additional heater (p. 143).

The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running.

The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.

NOTE

When the auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.

Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater's automatic start sequence can be switched off if required.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven additional heater should be switched off for short distances.

1. Before starting the engine: Select key position I (p. 71).

2. Press OK to access the menu.

4 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned. 5 For cars equipped with parking heater (p. 140).

|| 04 Climate control

04

144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional heater6 or Settings7 and select with OK.

4. Select one of the options ON or OFF using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

5. Exit the menu with RESET.

NOTE

The menu options are only visible in key position I - any adjustments must therefore be made before starting the engine.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-

partment heater* (p. 140)

Electric additional heater* The car is equipped with either a fuel-driven (p. 143) or an electric additional heater (p. 143).

The heater cannot be controlled manually but is instead activated automatically after the engine has been started in outside tempera- tures below 9 C and is switched off after the set passenger compartment temperature has been reached.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-

partment heater* (p. 140)

6 Analogue combined instrument panel. 7 Digital combined instrument panel.

LOADING AND STORAGE

05 Loading and storage

05

146

Storage spaces Overview of storage spaces in the passenger compartment.

05 Loading and storage

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147

Storage compartment1 in door panel

Storage compartment, drivers side (p. 148)

Ticket clip

Storage compartment

Glovebox (p. 149)

Storage compartment, cup holder (p. 148)

Jacket holder (p. 148)

Cup holder* in rear seat

Storage pocket2

Storage compartment, rear seat

WARNING

Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

1 With ice scraper holder on the drivers side. 2 Not applicable to textile upholstery.

05 Loading and storage

05

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Storage compartment drivers side This storage compartment (p. 146) is located on the driver's side, to the left under the light- ing panel.

WARNING

Do not keep any sharp objects in the com- partment, or objects which protrude.

Jacket holder The coat hanger is located on the left-hand side of the passenger seat's head restraint.

The jacket holder is only designed for light clothing.

Related information Storage spaces (p. 146)

Tunnel console The tunnel console is located between the front seats.

Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and USB*/AUX input under the armrest.

Includes cup holder for driver and pas- senger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter (p. 149) are specified, then there is a ciga- rette lighter in the 12 V socket (p. 151) for the front seat and a detachable ashtray in the cup holder.)

Related information Storage spaces (p. 146)

Tunnel console - armrest (p. 149)

05 Loading and storage

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149

Tunnel console - armrest The tunnel console is located between the front seats.

When closed, the tunnel console's armrest can be adjusted* longitudinally.

Related information Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 151)

Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ashtray* (p. 149)

Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ashtray* A detachable ashtray is fitted in the cup holder under the armrest. The cigarette lighter is fitted in the 12 V socket (p. 151) for the front seat.

The ashtray in the tunnel console (p. 148) is detached by lifting the tray straight up.

Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils.

Related information Storage spaces (p. 146)

Glovebox The glovebox is located on the passenger side.

The owner's manual and maps can be kept in here for example. There are also holders for pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can be locked (p. 176)* using the key blade (p. 166).

Related information Storage spaces (p. 146)

Glovebox - cooling (p. 150)

05 Loading and storage

05

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Glovebox - cooling The glovebox (p. 149) can also be used as a cooled area3.

Start cooling by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment to the end position.

Switch off the cooling by moving the con- trol forwards to the end position.

Cooling is active when the climate control system is active (i.e. when the key is in key position (p. 71) II) or the engine is running.

Inlay mats* Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush. Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay mats.

WARNING

Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid get- ting caught adjacent to and under the ped- als.

Related information Cleaning the interior (p. 367)

Vanity mirror The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the sun visor.

Vanity mirror with lighting.

The light illuminates automatically when the cover is lifted.

Related information Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting

(p. 348)

3 Applicable only to cars with ECC.

05 Loading and storage

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151

Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets The electrical sockets (12 V) are located in the tunnel console's storage compartment and beside the cup holder4.

12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.

The electrical sockets can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display screens, music players and mobile phones. For the sockets to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least key position I (p. 71).

WARNING

Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

NOTE

Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. display screens, music players and mobile phones - which are connected to one of the passenger compartment's 12V electri- cal sockets could be activated by the cli- mate control system, even when the remote control key has been removed or when the car is locked, for example, when the engine block and passenger compart- ment heater* is activated at a preset time.

For this reason remove the plugs from the electrical sockets for optional equipment or accessories when not in use because the battery could be drained in the event of such an occurrence!

IMPORTANT

Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W) in either socket.

NOTE

The compressor for emergency puncture repair (p. 324) has been tested and approved by Volvo. For information on the use of Volvo's recommended temporary emergency puncture repair (TMK).

Related information Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and

ashtray* (p. 149)

12 V socket - cargo area (p. 155)

4 If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket.

05 Loading and storage

05

152

Loading Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see Weights (p. 441).

The tailgate is opened via a button on the lighting panel or the remote control key, see Locking/unlocking -

tailgate (p. 176).

WARNING

The cars driving properties change depending on the weight and positioning of the load.

To bear in mind when loading Position the load firmly against the rear

seat's backrest.

Note that objects must not prevent the func- tion of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat's backrests is folded down, see WHIPS - seating position (p. 36).

Centre the load.

Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests.

Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.

Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- lets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING

A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.

WARNING

The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro- mised or eliminated by high loads.

Never load cargo above the backrest.

WARNING

Always secure the load. Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing personal injury to the car's occupants.

Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft.

Switch off the engine and apply the park- ing brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off.

Related information Load retaining eyelets (p. 153)

Cargo net (p. 155)

Loading - long load (p. 153)

Roof load (p. 153)

05 Loading and storage

05

153

Loading - long load To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear seat backrest can be folded down. The pas- senger seat backrest can also be folded for an extra long load.

Folding the passenger seat See (p. 73).

Lowering the rear seat backrest See (p. 76).

Related information Loading (p. 152)

Roof load The load carriers recommended for roof loads are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety dur- ing a journey.

Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers.

Load carriers must always be mounted on the aluminium rail.

Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.

Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.

The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load.

Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.

WARNING

The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- racteristics are altered by roof loads. For information about the maximum permitted load on the roof, including load carriers and any space box, see Weights (p. 441).

Related information Loading (p. 152)

Load retaining eyelets The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area.

WARNING

Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which protrude may cause injury under violent braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

Related information Loading (p. 152)

05 Loading and storage

05

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Loading - bag holder The bag holders keep carrier bags in place and prevent them from overturning and spreading their contents around the cargo area. The holder has a capacity of max. 3 kg.

Bag holder

Related information Loading (p. 152)

Loading - folding bag holder* (p. 154)

Loading - folding bag holder* A folding bag holder in the floor keeps bags in place and prevents them from overturning and spreading their contents in the cargo area, and can be opened up in three posi- tions.

Folding bag holder

It can be set to two adjustment positions and one service position, as it is known, where it is fully unfolded. There are also two floor combination variants, one with adjustment positions in a tub under the floor and one with adjustment positions in plastic rails. The rais- ing below shows the adjustment position in a tub under the floor.

The load on the central holder is max. 3 kg and max. 10 kg on the outer holder.

Raising

Lift the handle* on the upper floor and fold up the floor.

Move the floor forwards to an appropriate position and place it in the adjustment groove.

3. In service position, the floor is moved all the way forwards towards the rear seat back and placed in the plastic support in the centre.

Related information Loading (p. 152)

Loading - bag holder (p. 154)

05 Loading and storage

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155

12 V socket - cargo area The electrical socket can be used for various accessories designed for 12 Volts, e.g. dis- play screens, music players and mobile phones.

Lower the cover to access the electrical socket.

The socket also provides voltage when the remote control key is not in the igni- tion switch.

IMPORTANT

Max. socket current is 10 A (120 W).

NOTE

Remember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the risk of discharging the car's battery.

NOTE

The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo. For information on the use of Volvo's recommended temporary emergency puncture repair (TMK), see Emergency puncture repair* (p. 324).

Related information Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 151)

Cargo net A cargo net prevents cargo from being thrown forward in the passenger compart- ment in the event of heavy braking.

The cargo net is fitted into four mounting points.

For safety reasons, the cargo net must always be correctly fastened and secured. The mesh is made of a strong nylon fabric and secured behind the front seat backrests.

WARNING

Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also have a cor- rectly fitted safety net.

|| 05 Loading and storage

05

156

Attaching

NOTE

The easiest way to fit the safety net is via one of the rear doors.

WARNING

It is necessary to ensure that the upper securing points of the safety net are fitted correctly and that the puller-straps are secured properly. Damaged nets must not be used.

1. Unfold the cargo net and make sure that the split upper rod is locked in the extended position.

2. Hook one end of the rod into the roof mounting with the anchoring strap locks turned towards you.

3. Hook the other end of the rod into the roof mounting on the opposite side - the telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks facilitate alignment. Take care to press forward the rod's retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end posi- tion.

4. Hook the cargo net's anchoring straps into the eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are straightened and the seats are moved forward slightly.

Pay attention to make sure that you do not press the seat/backrest hard against the net when the seat/backrest is moved back again - only adjust until the seat/ backrest makes contact with the net.

IMPORTANT

If a seat/backrest is pushed backwards hard into the safety net then the net and/or its roof mounts may be damaged.

5. Tension the cargo net with the anchoring straps.

05 Loading and storage

05

157

Removal and storage

The cargo net can be easily removed and folded up.

Release the tension in the net by pressing in the button on the anchoring strap's lock and feeding out part of the strap.

Press in the catch and detach both of the anchoring strap's hooks.

Unhook the rod from its roof mounting by pulling back on the rod in the roof mount- ings' rear end position. Press the rod in any direction so that the hook engages in the rod, which at the same time releases the hook on the other side.

Finally, remove the remaining roof mount- ing hook from the roof mounting.

4. Break the rod in the centre, fold it together and roll up the net.

Insert the net in the storage bag.

The folded cargo net is stored in its bag in the cargo area.

Related information Loading (p. 152)

Load retaining eyelets (p. 153)

Hat shelf The hat shelf can be removed to provide additional cargo space.

Hat shelf removal

Undo the hat shelf lifting eyes on both sides.

Unhook the front edge of the hat shelf and remove it.

Related information Loading (p. 152)

Loading - long load (p. 153)

LOCKS AND ALARM

06 Locks and alarm

06

159

Remote control key with key blade The remote control key is used to start the car and for locking and unlocking. It contains a detachable key blade (p. 165) made of metal. The visible section is available in two versions so that it is possible to distinguish between the remote control keys.

The car is supplied with two remote control keys - standard or withkeyless function (p. 168). They are used to start/switch off the engine and for locking/unlocking.

Additional remote control keys can be ordered - up to six can be programmed and used for the same car.

Variants There are four remote control key variants:

Remote control key, standard1

Remote control key with Keyless start1

Remote control key with Keyless drive1

PCC with Keyless drive 2

PCC plus remote control key with keyless function has extended functionality compared to the standard remote control key.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

Related information Remote control key - function (p. 162)

Remote control key/PCC - losing If you lose a remote control key (p. 159) then a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The remaining remote control keys must be taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the missing remote control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention meas- ure. The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked in MY CAR (p. 104) under Information Number of keys.

Related information Remote control key - function (p. 162)

Remote control key - range (p. 163)

1 5-button key 2 6-button key

06 Locks and alarm

06

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote control key/PCC - key memory* The key memory in the remote control key/PCC (p. 159) means that certain settings in the car can be individually adapted for dif- ferent people.

The key memory function is available in com- bination with power seat and power rearview and door mirrors. Settings for door mirrors, driver's seat and steering force can be saved in the key memory.

Key memory - door mirrors, drivers seat and steering force The settings are automatically connected to each respective remote control key, see Key memory in remote control key (p. 75) and Speed related power steering (p. 262).

When locking the car with the remote key, the combined instrument panel theme setting can be saved to the key, see Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 61) and MY CAR - Car settings (p. 108).

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Car key memory.

For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).

For remote control keys with Keyless func- tion, see Keyless* (p. 168).

Indication locking/unlocking - adjusting When the car is locked or unlocked using the remote control key (p. 159) the direction indi- cators confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly performed.

Locking - one flash and the door mirrors are folded3 in.

Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir- rors are folded3 out.

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.

When locking, indication is given only if all locks have been locked and all doors are closed. Indication is given when the last door has been closed.

Selecting the function Different options for indicating locking/ unlocking with light can be set in the car's menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).

Search in the menu system MY CAR for Settings Car settings Light settings and select Door lock confirmation light and/or Unlock confirmation light.

Related information Keyless* (p. 168)

Lock indicator (p. 161)

Alarm indicator (p. 182)

3 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161

Lock indicator A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that the car is locked.

Same LED as alarm indicator (p. 182).

NOTE

Cars that are not equipped with alarm also have this indicator.

Related information Indication locking/unlocking - adjusting

(p. 160)

Remote control key/PCC - Electronic immobiliser The electronic immobiliser is a theft protec- tion system that prevents the vehicle from being started (p. 268) by an unauthorised person.

Each remote control key/PCC (p. 159) has a unique code. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key with the cor- rect code.

The following error messages in the com- bined instrument panel's information display are related to the electronic immobiliser:

Message Specification

Insert car key

Error when reading the remote control key during starting - Remove the key from the ignition switch, press it in again and make a new start attempt.

Car key not found

(Applicable only to cars with Keyless.)

Error reading the remote control key during starting - Try to start again.

If the error persists: Insert the remote control key into the ignition switch and try to start again.

Immobiliser Try to start again

Error in immobiliser system during starting. If the error persists: Contact a work- shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Related information Remote-controlled immobiliser with

tracking system (p. 162)

Keyless* (p. 168)

06 Locks and alarm

06

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system makes it possible to track and locate the car, and to remotely activate the immobi- liser to switch off the engine.

Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more information and assistance with activating the system.

Related information Remote control key with key blade (p.

159)

Remote control key/PCC - Electronic immobiliser (p. 161)

Remote control key - function The remote control key has functions such as locking and unlocking the doors.

5-button remote control key

Locking

Unlocking

Approach light duration

Tailgate

Panic function

Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car Communicator.

Information

Function buttons Locking Locks the doors and tailgate

while the alarm is activated, see Locking/ unlocking - from the outside (p. 173).

A long press also closes all windows simulta- neously (see also Total airing function (p. 176)).

WARNING

If windows are closed using the remote control key, check that nobody's hands are trapped.

Unlocking (p. 173) - Unlocks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is deactivated.

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163

A long press also opens all windows simulta- neously (see also Total airing function (p. 176)).

The function can be changed from unlocking all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driver's door only with one press of the but- ton and, after a further press of the button - within 10 seconds - unlocking the remaining doors.

The function can be changed in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Lock settings Doors unlock with both the alternatives All doors and Driver door, then all. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).

Approach light duration (p. 89) - Used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.

Tailgate (p. 176) - Unlocks and disarms the alarm for the tailgate only.

Panic function Used to attract atten- tion in an emergency.

Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec- onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn.

The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after approx. 3 minutes.

Related information Remote control key with key blade (p.

159)

PCC* - unique functions (p. 164)

Remote control key - range Remote control key (p. 159) functions have a range of about 20 m from the car.

If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.

NOTE

The remote control key functions may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade, see Detachable key blade - unlocking doors (p. 166).

Related information Remote control key - function (p. 162)

06 Locks and alarm

06

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

PCC* - unique functions Remote control key with PCC has extended functionality compared with remote control key without PCC (p. 159) in the form of an information button and indicator lamps.

Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car Communicator.

Information button

Indicator lamps

Using the information button enables access to certain information from the car via the indicator lamps.

Using the information button Press the information button .

> All indicator lamps flash for approxi- mately 7 seconds and the light travels around on the PCC. This indicates that information from the car has been read.

If any of the other buttons are pressed during this time then the reading is interrupted.

NOTE

If none of the indicator lamps illumi- nates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Indicator lamps display information in accord- ance with the following illustration:

Green continuous light the car is locked.

Yellow continuous light the car is unlocked.

Red continuous light the alarm has been triggered since the car was locked.

Red light flashing alternately in both indi- cator lamps The alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes ago.

Related information PCC* - range (p. 165)

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165

PCC* - range The PCC's range for unlocking and tailgate is approx. 20 m from the car - for other func- tions up to approx. 100 m. If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.

NOTE

The information button function may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc.

Out of PCC range If the PCC is too far away from the car for the information to be read then the status the car was last left in is shown, without the light travelling around on the PCC.

If several PCCs are used for the car then it is only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking that shows correct status.

NOTE

If none of the indicator lamps illumi- nates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Keyless* - remote control key range (p.

169)

Remote control key - range (p. 163)

Detachable key blade A remote control key (p. 159) contains a detachable key blade of metal with which some functions can be activated and some operations carried out.

The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec- ommended when ordering new key blades.

Key blade functions

Using the remote control key's detachable key blade:

the left-hand front door can be opened manually (p. 166) if central locking can- not be activated with the remote control key.

the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated (p. 179)/deacti- vated.

the right-hand front door and the rear doors can be locked manually (p. 174), e.g. in the event of power failure.

the glovebox lock* can be opened, see Locking/unlocking - glovebox (p. 176).

the airbag for front passenger seat (PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated (p. 31).

06 Locks and alarm

06

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Detachable key blade - detaching/ attaching Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade (p. 165) is carried out as follows:

Removing the key blade

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.

Attaching the key blade Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the remote control key (p. 159).

1. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.

2. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.

Related information Detachable key blade - unlocking doors

(p. 166)

Child safety locks - manual activation (p. 179)

Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat- ing* (p. 31)

Detachable key blade - unlocking doors The detachable key blade (p. 165) can be used if the central locking cannot be activated using the remote control key (p. 159) - e.g. if the remote control key's battery is discharged - see Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery (p. 167).

The left-hand front door can be opened as follows:

1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the key blade in the door handle's lock cylin- der. For illustration and more information, see Keyless* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 171).

NOTE

When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered.

2. Deactivate the alarm (p. 181) by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch.

For cars with the Keyless system, see Keyless* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 171).

06 Locks and alarm

06

}} 167

Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery The batteries for the remote control key/PCC can be replaced.

The batteries for the remote control key/PCC should be replaced if:

the information symbol is illuminated and the combined instrument panel shows Low battery in remote control. Please change batteries.

and/or

the locks repeatedly do not react to sig- nals from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car.

Opening Slide the spring-loaded catch to the

side.

At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.

Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the hole behind the spring-loaded catch and gently prize the remote control key up.

NOTE

Turn the remote control key over with the buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat- teries falling out when it is opened.

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function.

Battery replacement

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria.

Closely study how the battery/batteries are secured on the inside of the cover, with regard to their (+) and () sides.

Remote control key with 1 battery 1. Carefully prize out the battery. 2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.

|| 06 Locks and alarm

06

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote control key and PCC* with 2 batteries 1. Carefully prize out the batteries. 2. First install one new one with the (+) side

up. 3. Position the white plastic tab in between

and finally install a second new battery with the (+) side down.

Battery type Use batteries with designation CR2430, 3 V.

Assembly 1. Press the remote control key together.

2. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.

3. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the environment.

Related information Remote control key with key blade (p.

159)

Remote control key - function (p. 162)

Keyless* Keyless lock and ignition system is available in two function levels, Keyless drive and Keyless start.

For cars with Keyless start function the car can be started (p. 268) without the remote control key in the ignition switch.

For cars with Keyless drive function, the car can be locked and unlocked (p. 171) without pressing a button on the remote control key, and also be started without the key being inserted in the ignition lock. The system makes it easier and more convenient to open the car, e.g. when your hands are full.

Both of the car's remote control keys have Keyless function. It is possible to order more remote control keys, see Remote control key with key blade (p. 159).

The car's electrical system can be set to three different levels - key position (p. 71) 0, I and II - with the remote control key.

Related information Keyless* - Secure handling of the remote

control key (p. 169)

Keyless* - interference to remote control key function (p. 170)

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169

Keyless* - remote control key range5

In order to open a door or the tailgate without pressing a button on the remote control key, a remote control key must be approx. 1.5 m from the car door handle or tailgate.

The person who wishes to lock or unlock a door must have the remote control key with him or her. It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the remote control key is on the opposite side of the car.

The red rings in the above figure indicate the range covered by the system's antennas.

If all remote control keys are removed from the car when the engine is running or key position (p. 71) I or II is active and a door has been opened and then closed, the informa- tion display in the combined instrument panel

shows a warning message while sounding an audible reminder at the same time.

When the remote control key has been returned to the car, the warning message goes off and the audible reminder ceases once either/or:

a door has been opened and closed

the remote control key has been inserted in the ignition lock

The OK button on the direction indicator stalk.

Related information Keyless* (p. 168)

Keyless* - antenna location (p. 173)

Keyless* - Secure handling of the remote control key It is important to handle all remote control keys with great care.

If a remote control key with keyless function is left in the car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car is locked. This prevents unau- thorised entry.

However, if someone breaks into the car and finds the remote control key, it is reactivated. It is therefore important to handle all remote control keys with great care.

IMPORTANT

When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered.

Related information Keyless* (p. 168)

5 Does not apply to cars with keyless start

06 Locks and alarm

06

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless* - interference to remote control key function Electromagnetic fields and screening can interfere with the Keyless function.

NOTE

Do not place/store the remote control key with keyless function near a mobile phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.

If interference is experienced nonetheless, use the remote control key (p. 159) and the key blade like a traditional remote control key.

Related information Keyless* (p. 168)

Keyless* - locking Cars with the Keyless-drive system have a touch-sensitive area on the outer handle of the doors and a rubberised button next to the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate.

Lock the doors and the tailgate by grasping one of the door handles or pressing the smaller of the tailgate's two rubberised but- tons - the lock indicator (p. 161) in the wind- screen confirms that locking has been com- pleted by starting to flash.

All doors and the tailgate must be closed before the car can be locked - otherwise the car is not locked.

NOTE

In cars with automatic gearbox selectors, the gear selector must be set to the P position; otherwise the car can be neither locked nor alarmed.

Related information Keyless* (p. 168)

Alarm indicator (p. 182)

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171

Keyless* - unlocking6

Unlocking with Keyless-drive takes place when a hand grasps a door handle or the tail- gate's rubberised pressure plate is actuated - open the door or tailgate as normal.

NOTE

The door handles normally register a hand that takes hold of the handle, but with thick gloves on or after a very quick hand movement a second attempt may be required, or with the glove taken off.

Related information Keyless* (p. 168)

Keyless* - locking (p. 170)

Keyless* - unlocking with the key blade If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the left-hand front door can be opened using the remote control key's detachable key blade (p. 166).

Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.

To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's plastic cover must be removed - this is also done with the key blade:

1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight up into the hole on the underside of the door handle/cover - do not prize. > The plastic cover loosens automati-

cally by means of the torque when the blade is pushed straight up and into the opening.

2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cyl- inder and unlock the door.

3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.

NOTE

When the left-hand front door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, this triggers the alarm (p. 181). It is switched off by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch, see Alarm - remote control key not working (p. 183).

Related information Keyless* (p. 168)

6 Does not apply to remote control key with keyless start.

06 Locks and alarm

06

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless* - key memory The key memory7 in the remote control key/PCC means that certain settings in the car can be individually adapted for different persons.

The key memory function is available in com- bination with power seat* and power rearview and door mirrors. Settings for door mirrors, driver's seat and steering force can be saved in the key memory.

Memory function in remote control key with Keyless function If several people each with a remote control key (p. 159) approach the car, then the set- tings for seat and mirrors are implemented for the person who opens the driver's door.

After the driver's door has been opened by person A with remote control key A but person B with remote control key B shall drive, the settings can be changed as follows:

Standing by the driver's door, or sitting behind the steering wheel person B presses their remote control key's unlock button, see Remote control key - function (p. 162).

Select one of three possible memories for adjusting the power seat (p. 74) with seat button 1 - 3.

Adjust seat and mirrors (p. 97) manually.

Adjust steering force in the menu system MY CAR (p. 108).

Related information Keyless* (p. 168)

Keyless* - lock settings Lock settings for the Keyless-drive function can be adapted in the MY CAR menu system

Lock settings for the Keyless-drive function can be adapted by indicating in the menu system for MY CAR which doors are to be unlocked, under Car settings Lock settings Keyless entry - there select between All doors unlock, Any door, Doors on same side and Both front doors.

For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).

Related information Keyless* (p. 168)

7 Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173

Keyless* - antenna location The Keyless system has a number of inte- grated antennae located around the car.

Rear bumper, centre

Door handle, left rear

Cargo area, central and furthest in under the floor

Door handle, right rear

Centre console, under the rear section

Centre console, under the front section.

WARNING

People who have had a pacemaker opera- tion should not come closer than 22 cm to the Keyless system's antennas with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the Keyless system.

Related information Keyless* (p. 168)

Locking/unlocking - from the outside Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried out using the remote control key (p. 162). The remote control key can lock/unlock all doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler flap. Different sequences for unlocking can be selected.

In order that the lock sequence can be acti- vated, the driver's door must be closed - if any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is activated only when it/they are closed. With the Keyless* system all the doors and tailgate must be closed.

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.

If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be dis- charged - lock or unlock the left-hand front door with the detachable key blade (p. 166).

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is triggered when the door is opened after being unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is switched off when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.

|| 06 Locks and alarm

06

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Be aware of the risk of being locked in the car when it is locked from the outside using the remote control key - it is then not possible to open any of the doors from the inside with the door controls. For more information, see Deadlocks* (p. 178).

Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked again automatically. This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintention- ally. (For cars with alarm, see Alarm (p. 181).)

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.

175)

Remote control key - function (p. 162)

Manual locking of the door In certain situations the car must be lockable manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.

The left-hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the remote control key's detachable key blade (p. 171).

Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead have a lock switch on the end of each door which must be depressed using the key blade - they are then mechanically locked/ blocked to prevent them being opened from outside. The doors can still be opened from the inside.

Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with child safety locks (p. 179).

Remove the detachable key blade (p. 166) from the remote control key. Insert the key blade in the hole for lock reset and press the key in until the key bot- toms, approx. 12 mm.

The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.

The door is blocked against opening from the outside. To return to position A, the inner door handle must be opened.

The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock button on the remote control key (p. 159) or with the central locking button on the driver's door.

NOTE

A door's lock reset only locks that par- ticular door - not all doors simultane- ously.

A manually locked rear door with acti- vated manual child safety locks (p. 179) cannot be opened from either the outside or the inside. A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking button.

Related information Remote control key/PCC - replacing the

battery (p. 167)

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175

Locking/unlocking - from the inside Locking/unlocking can be performed using the driver's door button for central locking. All doors and tailgate (p. 176) can be locked or unlocked simultaneously.

Central locking

Press one side of the button to lock - the other side to unlock.

Lamp in lock button When the lamp in the central locking button for the driver's door is illuminated it means that all doors are locked.

With central locking button only in the driver's door, other doors have no button:

Illuminated lamp means that all doors are locked.

With central locking button on both front doors and electric lock button in each rear door:

Illuminated lamp means that only that particular door is locked. When all but- tons are illuminated all doors are locked.

Unlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two different ways:

Press the central locking button .

A long press also opens all the side windows* simultaneously (see also Total airing function (p. 176)).

Pull the door handle and open the door - the door is unlocked and opened in one operation.

Locking Both front doors must be closed for the

central locking to be activated. Press the central locking button - all doors are locked. If any of the rear doors is open, it will lock when it is closed.

A long press also closes all the side windows simultaneously (see also Total airing function (p. 176)).

Automatic locking The doors and tailgate are locked automati- cally when the car starts to move.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings

Car settings Lock settings Automatic door locking. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.

173)

Alarm (p. 181)

06 Locks and alarm

06

176

Total airing function The total airing function opens or closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather.

Central locking button

A long press on the symbol in the central locking button opens all side windows simul- taneously. The same procedure on the

button closes all side windows simulta- neously.

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.

175)

Power windows (p. 95)

Locking/unlocking - glovebox The glovebox (p. 149) can only be locked/ unlocked using the detachable key blade from the remote control key (p. 159).

For information on the key blade, see Detach- able key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 166).

Locking the glovebox:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cylinder.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is horizontal in the locked position.

Pull out the key blade.

Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.

Related information Remote control key - function (p. 162)

Locking/unlocking - tailgate The tailgate can be opened, locked and unlocked in a number of different ways.

Manual opening

Rubber plate with electrical contact.

The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock. To open:

1. Push down gently on the wider of the two rubberised pressure plates under the outer handle - the lock is released.

2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully open the tailgate.

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177

IMPORTANT

Minimal force is required to release the rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel.

Do not place the lift force on the rub- ber panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel.

Unlocking with the remote control key

Using the remote control key (p. 159) button the alarm for the tailgate can be dis- armed* and the tailgate unlocked on its own.

The lock indicator (p. 161) on the instrument panel stops flashing in order to show that not all of the car is locked and the alarm's* level and movement sensors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected.

The doors remain locked and armed.

The tailgate can be opened in two different ways using the remote control key:

One press - The boot lid is unlocked, but remains closed - press lightly on the rubber- ised pressure plate under the outer handle and lift the boot lid. If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.

Two presses - The boot lid is unlocked and the lock is disengaged at which the boot lid opens about a centimetre - lift the outer han- dle to open. Rain, cold, frost or snow could however prevent the tailgate from disengag- ing from the lock.

NOTE

When the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked with 2 presses or from the car interior, automatic relocking does not take place because the boot lid/tailgate is open - it must be closed manually.

After the boot lid/tailgate has been closed it is unlocked and the alarm is not armed - relock it and re-arm the alarm with the remote control key's lock button .

Opening the car from inside

Unlocking, tailgate

To open the tailgate:

Press the lighting panel button (1). > The lock releases and the tailgate

opens by a few centimetres.

Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key (p. 162) but-

ton for locking . > The lock indicator on the instrument

panel starts flashing, which means that the car is locked and the alarm* has been activated.

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.

175)

Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p. 173)

06 Locks and alarm

06

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is unlocked with the remote control key (p. 159) button.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked until the car is locked with the remote control key button. If the car is locked during travel or with the interior buttons, the fuel filler flap will remain unlocked.

The fuel filler flap locking logic also follows the locking or unlocking of the keyless-drive and the central locking system.

Related information Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing (p. 296)

Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 296)

Deadlocks* Deadlocks8 means that all door handles are mechanically disengaged, which prevents doors being opened from the inside.

The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key (p. 159) and are set after an approximately 10 second delay after the doors have been locked.

NOTE

If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.

The car can only be unlocked from a dead- lock state with the remote control key. The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade (p. 165).

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

Temporary deactivation

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

MY CAR

OK MENU

TUNE knob control

EXIT

If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off. This is carried out as follows:

1. Access the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Reduced Guard (for a detailed description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104)).

8 Only in combination with alarm.

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179

2. Select Activate once. > The combined instrument panel shows

the message Locks and alarm Reduced guard and the deadlocks function is switched off when the car is locked.

or

Select Ask when exiting. > Each time the engine is switched off

the centre console's screen shows the message Activate Reduced Guard until engine has started again? fol- lowed by the alternatives Confirm with OK and Cancel with EXIT.

If the deadlocks function shall be switched off

Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Note that the alarm's movement and tilt detec- tors* are switched off at the same time.) > The next time the engine is started, the

system is reset to zero and the com- bined instrument panel shows the message Locks and alarm Full guard at which the deadlocks function and the alarm's movement and tilt detectors are re-engaged.

If the locking system shall not be changed

Press EXIT and lock the car.

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered.

Related information Keyless* - unlocking with the key blade

(p. 171)

Child safety locks - manual activation The child safety locks prevent children from being able to open a rear door from the inside.

The child safety locks are located on the trail- ing edge of the rear doors and are only acces- sible when the doors are open.

Activate/deactivate child safety locks

Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with manual door lock (p. 174).

Use the remote control key's detachable key blade (p. 166) to turn the knob.

The door is blocked against opening from the inside.

The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.

|| 06 Locks and alarm

06

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

A door's knob control only blocks that particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously.

Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock.

Related information Child safety locks - electrical activation*

(p. 180)

Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 175)

Child safety locks - electrical activation* The child safety locks prevent children from being able to open a rear door from the inside.

Activation The electrical child safety locks can be acti- vated/deactivated in all key positions (p. 71) higher than 0. Activation/deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided that no door is opened.

Control panel driver's door.

1. Start the engine or choose a key position higher than 0.

2. Press the button in the driver's door con- trol panel. > The information display shows the

message Rear child lock activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are active.

When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear:

windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel

doors cannot be opened from inside.

The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off - if the child safety locks are activated at engine shutdown, the function will remain activated the next time the engine is started.

Related information Child safety locks - manual activation (p.

179)

Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 175)

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181

Alarm The alarm is a device that warns in the event of e.g. a break-in in the car.

Activated alarm is triggered if:

a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened

a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*)

the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*)

the battery's cable is disconnected

the siren is disconnected.

If there is a fault in the alarm system then the information display in the combined instru- ment panel shows a message. In which case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE

The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment - air currents are also regis- tered. For this reason the alarm is trig- gered if the car is left with a window open or if the passenger compartment heater is used.

To avoid this: Close the window when leaving the car. If the car's integrated pas- senger compartment heater (or a portable electric heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from the air vents so that they are not pointing upwards in the passenger compartment. Alternatively, reduced alarm level can be used, Reduced alarm level (p. 183).

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or alter compo- nents in the alarm system yourself. Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insurance.

Arming the alarm Press the remote control key lock button.

Deactivate the alarm Press the remote control key unlock but-

ton.

Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the remote control key unlock but-

ton or insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.

Related information Alarm - automatic re-arming (p. 182)

Alarm - remote control key not working (p. 183)

06 Locks and alarm

06

182

Alarm indicator The alarm indicator shows alarm system (p. 181) status.

Same LED as lock indicator (p. 161).

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:

LED not lit Alarm not armed

The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed

The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm (and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key position I is selected) Alarm has been triggered.

Alarm - automatic re-arming Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 181) pre- vents the car being left with the alarm dis- armed unintentionally.

If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (p. 159)(and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes, then the alarm is automati- cally re-armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

Related information Alarm - automatic arming (p. 182)

Alarm - automatic arming In certain countries the alarm (p. 181) is acti- vated after a certain delay if the driver's door was opened and closed but the car was not re-locked.

Related information Alarm signals (p. 183)

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183

Alarm - remote control key not working If the alarm (p. 181) cannot be deactivated with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery (p. 167) is discharged - the car can be unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as follows:

1. Open the left-hand front door with the detachable key blade (p. 171). > The alarm is triggered, the direction

indicators flash and the siren sounds.

2. Insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch. > The alarm is deactivated.

Alarm signals When the alarm (p. 181) is triggered a siren sounds and all direction indicators flash.

A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off. The siren has its own battery and works independently of the car battery.

The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.

Reduced alarm level Reduced guard means that the movement and tilt detectors can be temporarily deacti- vated.

To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry - tempo- rarily deactivate the movement and tilt detec- tors.

The procedure is the same as with the tem- porary disengaging of deadlocks, see Dead- locks* (p. 178).

Related information Alarm (p. 181)

Alarm indicator (p. 182)

DRIVER SUPPORT

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185

Stability and traction control system (DSTC) The stability and traction control system, DSTC (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control), helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.

The activation of the system during braking may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

WARNING

The stability and traction control system is a supplementary function - it cannot han- dle all situations in all road conditions.

The driver always bears responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.

The system consists of the following func- tions:

Active Yaw Control

Spin Control

Traction control system

Engine drag control - EDC

Corner Traction Control - CTC

Driver Steering Recommendation DSR

Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA

Active Yaw Control The function checks the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.

Spin Control The function reduces engine power if the drive wheels slip against the underlying sur- face in order to maintain stability and traction.

Traction control system The function is active at low speed and trans- fers power from the driving wheel that is spin- ning to the one that is not.

Engine drag control - EDC EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involun- tary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gears on slippery road surfaces.

Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, amongst other things, impair the driver's abil- ity to steer the car.

Corner Traction Control - CTC CTC compensates for understeer and allows higher than normal acceleration in a bend without wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly reach the prevailing traffic speed.

Driver Steering Recommendation DSR DSR (Driver Steering Recommendation) helps the driver steer the car in the right direction when there is reduced traction or when the ABS system engages.

The primary role of the DSR function is to help the driver steer in the right direction when the car is skidding.

DSR engages by applying slight torque to the steering wheel in the direction in which the car should be steered to maintain/achieve maximum possible traction and stabilise the car.

Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA1

Trailer stability assist (p. 307) function is to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake. For more information, see Driving with a trailer (p. 301).

NOTE

The function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode.

Related information Stability and traction control system

(DSTC) - operation (p. 186)

Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 187)

1 Trailer Stability Assist

07 Driver support

07

186

Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - operation The stability and traction control system, DSTC (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control), helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.

Selection of level - Sport mode The stability and traction control system (DSTC) is always activated - it cannot be switched off.

However, the driver can select the Sport mode, which allows for a more active driving experience. In Sport mode the system detects whether the accelerator pedal, steer- ing wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding with the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabil- ises the car.

If the driver stops a controlled skid by releas- ing the accelerator pedal then the DSTC sys- tem intervenes and stabilises the car.

With Sport mode, maximum traction is obtained if the car has become stuck, or when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep snow.

Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:

1. Press the centre console's MY CAR but- ton and in the display screen's menu sys- tem find My V40 DSTC.

2. Uncheck the box and back out of the menu system with EXIT. > The system then allows a more sporty

driving style.

The Sport mode is active until the driver deselects it or until the engine is switched off - after the engine is started the next time the DSTC system is back in its normal mode again.

Related information Stability and traction control system

(DSTC) (p. 185)

Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 187)

MY CAR (p. 104)

07 Driver support

07

187

Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - symbols and messages The stability and traction control system, DSTC (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control),

helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.

Table

SymbolA Message Specification

DSTC Temporarily OFF DSTC system temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reacti- vated automatically when the brakes have cooled.

DSTC Service required DSTC system disengaged.

Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

and

"Message" There is a message in the combined instrument panel - read it!

Constant glow for 2 seconds.

System check when the engine is started.

Flashing light. DSTC system is being activated.

Sport mode is activated.

A The symbols are schematic.

Related information Stability and traction control system

(DSTC) (p. 185)

Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - operation (p. 186)

07 Driver support

07

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Road Sign Information (RSI) The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which road signs the car has passed.

Examples of readable speed related2 signs.

The road sign information function gives information on current speed, that a motor- way or road is starting/ending and when overtaking is prohibited. If both a sign for motorway/road for motorised traffic and a sign showing the maximum permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to show the sign symbol for maximum permitted speed.

WARNING

RSI does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.

Related information Road sign information (RSI)* - operation

(p. 188)

Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations (p. 190)

Road sign information (RSI)* - operation The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which road signs the car has passed. How the function is operated is described below.

Recorded speed information3.

When RSI has recorded a road sign with an imposed speed, the combined instrument panel displays the sign as a symbol.

Together with the symbol for the current speed limit, a sign showing that overtaking is prohibited may also be displayed where appropriate.

2 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations only show a few examples. 3 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations only show a few examples.

07 Driver support

07

}} 189

End of restriction or motorway A corresponding road sign is shown in the combined instrument panel for approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI detects a sign that involves the end of a speed limit - or other speed-related information, e.g. end of a motorway .

Examples of such signs are:

End of all restrictions.

End of motorway.

Following which, the sign information is hid- den until the next speed-related sign is detected.

Additional signs

Examples of additional signs3.

Sometimes different speed limits are signpos- ted for the same road - an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example.

An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use.

The speed applicable on an exit is indicated in certain markets by means of an additional sign containing an arrow.

Speed signs linked to this type of additional sign are displayed only if the driver is using the direction indicator.

Some speeds are applicable only after e.g. a specific dis- tance or at a certain time of

ay. The driver's attenti n is drawn to the situation by means of a symbol for an additional sign under the

symbol showing speed.

Display of additional information A symbol for additional sign in the form of an empty frame under the combined instrument panel's speed symbol means that the RSI has detected an additional sign with supplementary

information for the current speed limit.

Setting in MY CAR There are options for RSI in the MY CAR menu system; see MY CAR - driving support system (p. 109).

3 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations only show a few examples.

|| 07 Driver support

07

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Road sign information On/Off

The combined instrument panel's speed sym- bol display can be disabled. To deactivate the RSI function:

Uncheck the option Road Sign Information at Settings Car settings

Road Sign Information and go back out by pressing EXIT.

Speed warning

The driver can opt to receive a warning when the applicable speed limit is exceeded by

5 km/h or more. This warning is given by the symbol showing the applicable maximum speed temporarily flashing when this speed is exceeded.

To activate speed warning:

Check the option Speed alert at Settings Car settings Speed alert and go back out by pressing EXIT.

Related information Road Sign Information (RSI) (p. 188)

Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations (p. 190)

MY CAR (p. 104)

Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which road signs the car has passed. The function has the following limita- tions.

The RSI function's camera sensor has limita- tions just like the human eye. Find out more about this in the section on the camera sen- sor limitations (p. 231).

Signs which indirectly provide information on a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI function.

Here are some other examples of what can disrupt the function:

Faded signs

Signs positioned on bends

Rotated or damaged signs

Concealed or poorly positioned signs

Signs completely or partly covered with frost, snow and/or dirt.

Related information Road Sign Information (RSI) (p. 188)

Road sign information (RSI)* - operation (p. 188)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191

Speed limiter* A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel Digital and Analogue.

Speed limiter - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode

Activate and adjust the max. speed.

Selected speed

Speed limiter active

Related information Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 191)

Speed limiter - temporary deactivation and standby mode* (p. 193)

Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee- ded (p. 194)

Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 194)

Speed limiter* - getting started A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel Digital and Analogue.

Speed limiter - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode

Activate and adjust the max. speed.

Selected speed

Speed limiter active

|| 07 Driver support

07

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Switch on and activate When the speed limiter is active, its symbol (6) is shown in combination with a mark (5) by the set maximum speed in the combined instrument panel.

Selection and storage of the highest possible speed in the memory can be made both dur- ing a journey and while stationary.

While driving 1. Press the steering wheel button to

switch on the speed limiter. > The symbol (6) for speed limiter illumi-

nates in the combined instrument panel.

2. When the car is moving at the desired highest possible speed: Press one of the steering wheel buttons or until the combined instrument panel shows a mark (5) next to the desired maximum speed. > The speed limiter is then active and the

selected max. speed is stored in the memory.

When stationary 1. Press the steering wheel button to

switch on the speed limiter.

2. Scroll with the button until the com- bined instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the desired maximum speed. > The speed limiter is then active and the

selected max. speed is stored in the memory.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 191)

Speed limiter* - changing speed A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

To change the stored speed:

Adjust with short presses on or in the steering wheel keypad - every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last presses made are stored in the memory.

To adjust +/- 1 km/h:

Hold down the button and release it when the combined instrument panel shows a mark next to the desired maximum speed.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 191)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193

Speed limiter - temporary deactivation and standby mode* A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

Steering wheel keypad and instrument panel Dig- ital and Analogue.

Speed limiter - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode

Activate and adjust the max. speed.

Selected speed

Speed limiter active

Temporary deactivation - standby mode To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode:

Press . > The combined instrument panel's

mark (5) changes colour from GREEN to WHITE (Digital) or from WHITE to GREY (Analogue) and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum speed.

The speed limiter is reactivated with one press on . The mark (5) then changes colour from WHITE to GREEN (Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue) and the car's maximum speed is lim- ited again.

Temporary deactivation with the accelerator pedal The speed limiter can also be set in standby mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rap- idly accelerating the car out of a situation:

Depress the accelerator pedal fully. > The combined instrument panel shows

the stored maximum speed with a col- oured mark (5) and the driver can tem- porarily exceed the set maximum speed the mark (5) changes colour from GREEN to WHITE (Digital) or WHITE to GREY (Analogue) during that time.

The speed limiter is automatically reac- tivated after the accelerator pedal is released and the car's speed is slowed down to below the selected/stored maximum speed - the mark (5) changes colour from WHITE to GREEN (Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue) and the car's maximum speed is again limited.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 191)

07 Driver support

07

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

On steep roads the speed limiter's engine braking effect may be inadequate and the selected maximum speed is exceeded. The driver is alerted about this with an acoustic signal. The signal is active until the driver has slowed to below the selected maximum speed.

NOTE

The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h provided that none of the buttons

or has been depressed during the last half minute.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 191)

Speed limiter* - deactivation A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

To deactivate the speed limiter:

Press the steering wheel button . > The combined instrument panel's (p.

191) symbol for the speed limiter and the mark for the set speed are extin- guished. The selected and stored speed are thus deleted from the mem- ory and cannot be resumed with the

button.

The driver can then use the accelerator pedal to choose a speed without limi- tation.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 191)

Cruise control* The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in more relaxing driving on motorways and long, straight roads with regular traffic flows.

Overview

The steering wheel buttons and combined instru- ment panel in cars without speed limiter4.

4 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195

The steering wheel buttons and combined instru- ment panel in cars with speed limiter4.

Cruise control - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode

Activate and adjust the speed.

Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).

Cruise control active - WHITE symbol (GREY = Standby mode).

WARNING

The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and inter- vene when the cruise control is not main- taining a suitable speed and/or suitable distance.

The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Related information Cruise control* - managing speed (p.

195)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 197)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 198)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199)

Cruise control* - managing speed The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed. It is possible to activate, set or change the speed.

Activating and setting the speed

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter5.

4 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market. 5 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

|| 07 Driver support

07

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter5.

To enable cruise control:

Press the steering wheel button

> The cruise control symbol (6) in the com- bined instrument panel for cruise control active changes from GREY to WHITE and shows that the cruise control is in standby mode.

To activate cruise control:

At the required speed - press the steering wheel button or .

> The current speed is stored in the mem- ory and the combined instrument panel's marking (5) illuminates at the selected speed.

NOTE

Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds below 30 km/h.

Changing the speed Adjust with short presses on or -

every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last presses made are stored in the memory.

To adjust +/- 1 km/h:

Hold down the button and release it at the required speed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accel- erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting - the car returns to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

NOTE

If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then it is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 194)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 197)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 198)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199)

5 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed. The function can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode.

Temporary deactivation - standby mode

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter6.

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter6.

To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it in standby mode:

Press .

> The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from WHITE to GREY.

Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if:

wheels lose traction

the foot brake is used

speed falls below approx. 30 km/h

the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute7

the gear selector/lever is moved to neu- tral position N (automatic gearbox)

the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute.

The driver must then regulate the speed.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 194)

Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 198)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199)

6 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market. 7 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.

07 Driver support

07

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Cruise control* - resume set speed The cruise control (p. 194) (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed. After temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 197) it is possible to resume the set speed.

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter8.

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter8.

To reactivate the cruise control from standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button .

> The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from GREY to WHITE and the speed is then set to the last speed stored.

NOTE

A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by selecting

.

Related information Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 197)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199)

8 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199

Cruise control* - deactivate The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed. How it is deactivated is described here.

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter9.

The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter9.

The cruise control is deactivated with a steer- ing wheel button (1) or by switching off the engine - the set speed is deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the button.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 194)

Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 195)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 197)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 198)

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

The adaptive cruise control provides a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows.

The driver sets the desired speed (p. 203) and time interval to the car in front. When the radar detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is automatically adapted to that. When the road is clear again the car returns to the selected speed.

If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or set to standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is warned instead by a Distance Alert (p. 214) about the short distance.

9 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

|| 07 Driver support

07

200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and inter- vene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suita- ble distance.

The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before it is used.

The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise con- trol is being used.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Automatic gearbox Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced functionality with the adaptive cruise control's Queue Assist (p. 206).

Related information Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.

202)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 200)

Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 206)

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle (p. 205)

Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality (p. 208)

Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action (p. 211)

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages (p. 212)

Adaptive cruise control* - function The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

Function overview10.

Warning lamp - braking by driver required

Steering wheel (p. 77) keypad

Radar sensor (p. 209)

Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise control system and a coordinated spacing system.

10 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201

WARNING

Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- vene if the system does not detect a vehi- cle in front.

The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy- cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.

The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly measured by a radar sensor. Cruise control regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used by the adaptive cruise control.

WARNING

The brake pedal moves when Cruise Con- trol brakes. Do not rest your foot beneath the brake pedal as it may become trapped.

The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane according to

what the driver set for time interval (p. 204). If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the cruise control's set speed. This also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the cruise control's set speed.

The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies with large differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar sensor (p. 209) braking may come unexpect- edly or not at all.

The adaptive cruise control can be activated to follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h11 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls below 30 km/h or if the engine speed becomes too low, the cruise control is set in standby mode at which automatic braking ceases - the driver must then take over him- self/herself to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.

Warning lamp - braking by driver required Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity that is equivalent to more than 40% of the car's braking capacity.

If the car needs to be braked more heavily than cruise control capacity and the driver

does not brake, then cruise control uses the warning lamp and warning sound from the collision warning system (p. 223) in order to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required.

NOTE

The warning lamp may be difficult to see in strong sunlight or when wearing sun- glasses.

WARNING

Cruise Control warns only of vehicles which the radar sensor has detected. Hence the warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. Do not wait for a warning without braking when so required.

Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes, with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to slow down.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

11 Queue Assist (p. 206) (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h.

07 Driver support

07

202 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Adaptive cruise control* - overview Operation of the adaptive cruise control (p. 199) and steering wheel keypad varies depending on whether or not the car is equip- ped with speed limiter (p. 191)12.

Adaptive cruise control with Speed limiter

Cruise control - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Activate and adjust the speed.

Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = standby mode).

Time distance

ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE = standby mode).

Adaptive cruise control without Speed limiter

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Activate and adjust the speed.

(Not used)

Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = standby mode).

Time distance

ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE = standby mode).

Related information Adaptive cruise control* - managing

speed (p. 203)

Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode (p. 204)

12 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 203

Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

To enable cruise control:

Press the steering wheel button - a similar WHITE symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel (p. 212) which shows that the cruise control is in standby mode (p. 204).

To activate cruise control:

At the required speed - press the steering wheel button or .

> The current speed is stored in the mem- ory, the combined instrument panel shows a "magnifying glass" around the selected speed for a second or so and its marking changes from WHITE to GREEN.

When this symbol changes colour from WHITE to GREEN, the cruise control is active and the car main-

tains the stored speed.

Only when the symbol shows an image of another vehicle is the distance to the vehicle in front controlled by the cruise control.

At the same time a speed range is marked:

the higher speed with GREEN marking is the pre- programmed speed

the lower speed is the speed of the car in front.

Changing the speed To change the stored speed:

Adjust with short presses on or - every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last presses made are stored in the memory.

If speed is increased using the accelera- tor pedal prior to pressing the / but- ton, then it is the car's current speed when the button is pressed that is stored in the cruise control.

To adjust +/- 1 km/h:

Hold down the button and release it at the required speed.

NOTE

If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then it is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.

In certain situations, cruise control cannot be activated. In this case, the combined instrument panel (p. 212) shows Cruise control Unavailable.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 202)

07 Driver support

07

204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corre-

sponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds.

To set/change the time distance:

Turn the steering wheel button set's thumbwheel (or use the / buttons for cars without Speed limiters).

At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly.

The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably.

Note that a short time interval only allows the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.

The same symbol is also shown when Dis- tance Alert (p. 214) is activated.

NOTE

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

If Cruise Control does not appear to react when activated, this may be because the time distance to the car in front is prevent- ing an increase in speed.

The higher the speed the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a given time interval.

Read more about how you manage the speed (p. 203).

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. The cruise control can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode.

Temporary deactivation - standby mode with Speed limiter To temporarily disengage adaptive cruise control and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button

This symbol and stored speed mark- ing then changes colour from GREEN to WHITE.

Temporary deactivation - standby mode without Speed limiter To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button

Standby mode due to driver intervention The adaptive cruise control is temporarily dis- engaged and set automatically in standby mode if:

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205

the foot brake is used

the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute13

the gear selector/lever is moved to neu- tral position N (automatic gearbox)

the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute.

The driver must then regulate the speed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accel- erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

For more information, see the sections Man- aging speed (p. 203) and Overtaking another vehicle (p. 205).

Automatic standby mode The adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems, e.g. Stability and traction con- trol system (DSTC) (p. 185). If any of these systems stop working then cruise control is automatically deactivated.

In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the combined instru- ment panel. The driver must then intervene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

An automatic deactivation can be due to:

the driver opens the door

the driver takes off his seatbelt

engine speed is too low/high

speed has fallen below 30 km/h14

wheels lose traction

brake temperature is high

the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).

For more information on symbols, messages and their meaning, see section Symbols and messages in the display (p. 212).

Resume set speed Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is reactivated with one press on the steering wheel button - the speed is then set to the last stored speed.

NOTE

A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by selecting

.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action (p. 211)

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead and it can also assist during overtaking.

Read more about the different time intervals (p. 204) to the vehicle in front.

When the car is following another vehicle and the driver indicates an impending overtaking manoeuvre with the direction indicator15, the adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accel- erate the car towards the vehicle in front.

This function is active at speeds above 70 km/h.

Read more about how you manage the speed (p. 203).

WARNING

Be aware that this function can be acti- vated in more situations other than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road - the car will then acceler- ate briefly.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

13 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode. 14 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it can go all the way down to 0 km/h. 15 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.

07 Driver support

07

206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

Keypad with Speed limiter The adaptive cruise control is disengaged with a short press of the steering wheel but- ton . The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the button.

Keypad without Speed limiter A short press on the steering wheel button

sets the adaptive cruise control in standby mode. With a further short press the cruise control is deactivated. The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the button.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

Adaptive Cruise Control* - Queue Assist The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Queue Assist also provides the adap- tive cruise control with enhanced functionality at speeds lower than 30 km/h.

In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive cruise control is supplemented with the Queue Assist function (also referred to as "Queue Assist").

Queue Assistant has the following functions:

Extended speed range - also at lower than 30 km/h and at stationary

Change of target

Automatic braking ceases when station- ary

Note that the lowest programmable speed for the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h - even though the cruise control is capable of follow- ing another vehicle down to a standstill, a lower speed cannot be selected.

Learn more about how you manage the speed (p. 199) and different time intervals to the vehicle in front (p. 204).

Extended speed range

NOTE

In order to activate the cruise control the driver's door must be closed and the driver must be wearing the seatbelt.

With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle within the range 0-200 km/h.

NOTE

Activation of the cruise control below 30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a reasonable distance.

For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the cruise control is set in standby mode (p. 204) with automatic braking. The driver must then reactivate it in one of the following ways:

Press the steering wheel button .

or

Depress the accelerator pedal.

> The cruise control will then resume fol- lowing the vehicle in front.

07 Driver support

07

}} 207

NOTE

Queue Assist can keep the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the brakes release.

See more information under the header below, "Cessation of automatic braking when stationary".

Change of target

If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front.

When the adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds lower than 30 km/h and changes target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will slow down for the stationary vehicle.

WARNING

When the adaptive cruise control is follow- ing a vehicle ahead at speeds in excess of 30 km/h and the target is changed from a vehicle ahead to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead select the stored speed.

The driver must intervene him/herself and brake.

Automatic standby mode with change of target The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set in standby mode:

when the speed is below 5 km/h and cruise control is not sure whether the tar- get object is a stationary vehicle or some other object, e.g. a speed bump.

when the speed is below 5 km/h and the vehicle in front turns off so the cruise control no longer has a vehicle to follow.

Termination of automatic braking at a standstill In the following situations, Queue Assist stops automatic braking at a standstill:

the driver opens the door

the driver takes off his seatbelt.

This means that the brakes are released and the car will start to roll - the driver must there-

fore intervene and brake the car himself in order to maintain its position.

IMPORTANT

Queue Assist can keep the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the brakes release.

The driver's attention is drawn to this over several stages, with increasing intensity:

1. Acoustic alarm (pinging) and text mes- sage.

2. A warning lamp in the windscreen also starts to flash.

3. "Stabbing" braking occurs. For more information on symbols, mes- sages and their meaning, see the section Symbols and messages in the display (p. 212).

Queue Assist releases the foot brake and is set to standby mode in these situations as well:

the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal

the gear selector is moved to P, N or R position

the driver sets the cruise control in standby mode

the parking brake is applied.

|| 07 Driver support

07

208 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality (p. 208)

Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

Switch from Adaptive cruise control to Cruise control A button press can be used to deactivate the adaptive element (spacing system) in the adaptive cruise control (p. 199), with the car then only following the set speed.

Hold down the steering wheel button - the combined instrument panel's sym- bol changes from to .

> By these means the cruise control is acti- vated.

WARNING

The car no longer brakes automatically after switching from ACC to CC - it merely follows the set speed.

Switch back from Cruise control to Adaptive cruise control Switch off cruise control with 1-2 presses on

. The next time the system is switched on it is the Adaptive cruise control that is acti- vated.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode (p. 204)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209

Radar sensor The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars or larger vehicles in the same direction, in the same lane.

The radar sensor is used by the following functions:

Adaptive cruise control*

Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Pedestrian Detection*

Distance Warning*

Modification of the radar sensor could result in it being illegal to use.

IMPORTANT

In the event of visible damage to the car's grille, or if you suspect that the radar sen- sor may be damaged:

Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The function may completely or partially disappear - or malfunction - if the grille, the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged or has loosened.

Related information Radar sensor - limitations (p. 209)

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

Collision warning system* (p. 223)

Distance Warning* (p. 214)

Radar sensor - limitations The radar sensor (p. 209) has certain limita- tions, due to its limited field of vision, amongst other things.

The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehicles in front is reduced significantly:

if the radar sensor becomes blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have col- lected in front of the radar sensor.

NOTE

Keep the surface in front of the radar sen- sor clean.

if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi- cantly different from your own speed.

Field of vision The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected.

ACC field of vision.

Sometimes the radar sensor is late at detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g. a vehicle that drives in between the car and vehicles in front.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected.

In bends the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view.

|| 07 Driver support

07

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and inter- vene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suita- ble distance.

The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before it is used.

The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise con- trol is being used.

WARNING

Accessories or other objects such as auxil- iary lamps must not be fitted in front of the grille.

WARNING

Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- vene if the system does not detect a vehi- cle in front.

The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy- cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

Collision warning system* (p. 223)

Distance Warning* (p. 214)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211

Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

If the combined instrument panel shows the message Radar blocked See manual this

means that the radar signals from the radar sensor (p. 209) are blocked and that vehicles in front of the car cannot be detected.

In turn this means that - apart from Adaptive Cruise Control - Distance Warning (p. 214) and Collision Warning (p. 223) with Auto Brake are not operating either.

The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action:

Cause Action

The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.

Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals.

No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road surface.

The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

07 Driver support

07

212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages The adaptive cruise control (p. 199) (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver

maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

SymbolA Message Specification

The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode (p. 204).

The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed.

Standard cruise control is selected manually.

DSTC Normal to enable Cruise

The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until DSTC has been set to Normal mode - Stability and traction control system (DSTC) (p. 185).

Cruise control Cancel- led

The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.

Cruise control Unavaila- ble

The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.

This could be due to:

brake temperature is high

the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.

For more information about fault tracing, see the section Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action (p. 211)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213

SymbolA Message Specification

Radar blocked See manual

The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

The driver can then choose to switch to normal cruise control Cruise control* (p. 194) (CC) - a text message provides information on appropriate alternatives.

Read more about radar sensor limitations (p. 209).

Cruise control Service required

The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.

Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Press Brake To hold + acoustic alarm + warning light in windscreen + "pull- ing" brakes

(Only with Queue Assis- tant)

The car is at a standstill and the adaptive cruise control will release the foot brake, which is why the car may start rolling soon.

The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.

Below 30 km/h Only fol- lowing

(Only with Queue Assis- tant)

Shown with attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehi- cle in front within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).

A The symbols are schematic.

Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 199)

07 Driver support

07

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Distance Warning* Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function that informs the driver about the time interval to vehicles in front.

Distance Warning is active at speeds above 30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in front of the car, in the same direction. No dis- tance information is provided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.

Orange-coloured warning lamp16.

An orange-coloured warning lamp in the windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time interval.

NOTE

Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control is active.

WARNING

Distance warning only reacts if the dis- tance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected.

Operation

Press the button in the centre console to switch the function on or off. The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

Some combinations of the selected equip- ment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console - in which case the func-

tion is handled by the car's menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Distance Alert. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).

Set time interval

Controls and symbol for time interval.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Time interval - On.

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corre-

sponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds.

16 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215

The same symbol is also shown when adap- tive cruise control (p. 199) is activated.

NOTE

The higher the speed the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a given time interval.

The set time interval is also used by the function adaptive cruise control (p. 200).

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

Related information Distance Alert* - limitations (p. 215)

Distance Alert* - symbols and messages (p. 216)

Distance Alert* - limitations Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function that informs the driver about the distance to vehicles in front. The function, which uses the same radar sensor as the adaptive cruise con- trol (p. 199) and collision warning with auto brake (p. 223), has some limitations.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sunglasses, could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen.

Poor weather or winding roads could affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles in front.

The size of other vehicles could also affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This could mean that the warning lamp illumi- nates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent.

Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range.

For further information on radar sensor limita- tions, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 209) and Collision warning system* - operation (p. 228).

Related information Distance Warning* (p. 214)

Distance Alert* - symbols and messages (p. 216)

07 Driver support

07

216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Distance Alert* - symbols and messages Distance Warning (p. 214) (Distance Alert) is a function that informs the driver about the time

interval to vehicles in front. The function has certain symbols and messages that can be displayed in the combined instrument panel if

the function is reduced due to its limitations (p. 215).

SymbolA Message Specification

Radar blocked See manual

Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.

Radar sensor (p. 209) is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

For information, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 209).

Collision warn. Service required

Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake (p. 229) fully or partially disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A The symbols are schematic.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217

City Safety City Safety is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, amongst other things, when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.

The City Safety function is active at speeds under 50 km/h and it helps the driver by auto- matically braking the car in the event of immi- nent risk of collision with vehicles in front, should the driver not react in time by braking and/or steering away.

City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.

City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.

City Safety must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on City Safety to do the braking, there might be a risk of a colli- sion sooner or later.

The driver or passengers normally only notice City Safety if a situation arises where the car is extremely close to being in a collision.

If the car is also equipped with Collision Warning with Auto Brake (p. 223)* these two systems complement each other.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components must only be per- formed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

WARNING

City Safety does not engage in all driv- ing situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.

City Safety does not react to vehicles driving in a different direction from the car, to small vehicles and motorcycles or to people and animals.

City Safety can prevent collision at a speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at a higher speed difference, it is only possi- ble to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain full brake function, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

Never wait for City Safety to engage. The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the proper distance and speed.

Related information City Safety - limitations (p. 219)

City Safety - function (p. 217)

City Safety - operation (p. 218)

City Safety - laser sensor (p. 220)

City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 222)

City Safety - function City Safety detects the traffic in front of the car with a laser sensor (p. 220) fitted in the top edge of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of collision, City Safety will automatically brake the car, which may be experienced as sudden braking.

|| 07 Driver support

07

218

Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window17.

If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation to the vehicle in front then City Safety can completely prevent a collision.

City Safety activates a short, sharp braking and stops the car in normal circumstances, just behind the vehicle in front. For most dri- vers this is well outside normal driving style and may be experienced as being uncomfort- able.

If the difference in speed between the vehi- cles is greater than 15 km/h then City Safety may not prevent the collision on its own. To obtain full brake force, the driver must depress the brake pedal. This could then make it possible to prevent a collision, even at speed differences above 15 km/h.

When the function is activated and brakes, the combined instrument panel shows a mes- sage (p. 222) to the effect that the function is/has been active.

NOTE

When City Safety brakes, the brake lights come on.

Related information City Safety (p. 217)

City Safety - operation (p. 218)

City Safety - limitations (p. 219)

City Safety - operation City Safety is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, amongst other things, when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.

On and Off

NOTE

The City Safety function is always switched on after the engine has been started via key position I and II (p. 71).

In certain situations, it may advisable to disa- ble City Safety, e.g. where leafy branches could sweep over the bonnet and/or wind- screen.

After starting the engine City Safety can be deactivated as follows:

Using MY CAR on the centre console display screen with its menu system, search and locate Settings Car settings Driver support systems City Safety. Select the Off option. See MY CAR (p. 104) for more information.

17 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

07 Driver support

07

219

However, the function (p. 217) will be enabled the next time the engine is started, regardless of whether the system was enabled or disabled when the engine was switched off.

WARNING

The laser sensor (p. 220) emits laser light even when City Safety is disabled man- ually.

To enable City Safety again:

Follow the same procedure as for disa- bling, but select the On option.

Related information City Safety (p. 217)

City Safety - limitations (p. 219)

City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 222)

City Safety - limitations The sensor in City Safety is designed to detect cars and other large vehicles in front of the car irrespective of whether it is day or night. However, the function has a number of limitations.

The sensor has poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g. heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms or white-out situations. Mist- ing, dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may also disrupt the function.

Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxili- ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function.

The laser light from the sensor in City Safety measures how the light is reflected. The sensor cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity. The rear sections of the vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate and rear light reflectors.

On slippery road surfaces the braking dis- tance is extended, which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS and DSTC sys- tems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.

When your own car is reversing, City Safety is temporarily deactivated.

City Safety is not activated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is why the system does not intervene in situations where a vehicle in front is being approached very slowly, e.g. when parking.

Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why City Safety does not intervene in situations where the driver is steering or accelerating in a clear manner, even if a colli- sion is unavoidable.

When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta- tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov- ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.

On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when City Safety has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the laser sensor (p. 220) free from ice, snow and dirt. For an illustration of sensor location, see City Safety - function (p. 217).

Do not affix or mount anything on the windscreen in front of the laser sensor

Remove ice and snow from the bonnet - snow and ice must not exceed a height of 5 cm.

|| 07 Driver support

07

220

Fault tracing and action If the message (p. 222) Windscreen sensors blocked See manual is shown in the combined instrument panel it indicates that the laser sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of the car. This means that City Safety is not operational.

The Windscreen sensors blocked See manual message is not shown for all situa- tions in which the laser sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be diligent about keeping the windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor clean.

The following table presents possible causes for the message being shown, along with suggestions for appropriate action.

Cause Action

The windscreen sur- face in front of the laser sensor is dirty or covered with ice or snow.

Clean the wind- screen surface in front of the sensor from dirt, ice and snow.

The laser sensor field of vision is blocked.

Remove the blocking object.

IMPORTANT

If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in the windscreen in front of either of the laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger), then a workshop must be con- tacted for replacement of the windscreen - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended. For an illustration of sensor loca- tion, see City Safety - function (p. 217).

Failure to take action may result in reduced performance for City Safety.

To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or reduced operation for City Safety, the following also applies:

Volvo recommends that you do not repair cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the laser sensor - instead, the whole windscreen should be replaced.

Before replacing a windscreen, con- tact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted.

The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted dur- ing replacement.

Related information City Safety (p. 217)

City Safety - function (p. 217)

City Safety - operation (p. 218)

City Safety - laser sensor The City Safety function includes a sensor which transmits laser light. Contact a qualified workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. It is absolutely essential to follow the prescribed instructions when handling the laser sensor.

The following two labels relate to the laser sensor:

The upper label in the figure describes the laser beam's classification:

Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser beam with optical instruments - Class 1M laser product.

The lower label in the figure describes the laser beam's physical data:

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA (U.S. Food Administration)

07 Driver support

07

221

standards for laser product design with the exception of deviations in accordance with "Laser Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.

Radiation data for the laser sensor The following table specifies the laser sen- sor's physical data.

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 J

Maximum average output 45 mW

Pulse duration 33 ns

Divergence (horizontal x verti- cal)

28 12

WARNING

If any of these instructions are not followed then there is a risk of eye injury!

Never look into the laser sensor (which emits spreading invisible laser radia- tion) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a mag- nifying glass, microscope, lens or simi- lar optical instruments.

Testing, repair, removal, adjustment and/or replacement of the laser sen- sor's spare parts must only be carried out by a qualified workshop - we rec- ommend an authorised Volvo work- shop.

To avoid exposure to harmful radia- tion, do not carry out any readjust- ments or maintenance other than those specified here.

The repairer must follow specially drawn up workshop information for the laser sensor.

Do not remove the laser sensor (this includes removing the lenses). A removed laser sensor fulfils laser class 3B as per standard IEC 60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safe and therefore entails a risk of injury.

The laser sensor's connector must be unplugged before removal from the windscreen.

The laser sensor must be fitted onto the windscreen before the sensor's connector is plugged in.

The laser sensor transmits a laser light when the remote control key is in key position II (p. 71) even if the engine is switched off.

Related information City Safety (p. 217)

07 Driver support

07

222

City Safety - symbols and messages In conjunction with automatic braking by the City Safety (p. 217) system, one or more

symbols (p. 222) may illuminate in the com- bined instrument panel and a text message may be shown. A text message can be

acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK but- ton on the direction indicator stalk.

SymbolA Message Meaning/Action

Auto braking by City Safety City Safety is braking or has automatically braked.

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual

The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.

Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.

Read about the laser sensor's limitations.

City Safety Service required City Safety is not operational.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A The symbols are schematic.

Related information City Safety (p. 217)

City Safety - function (p. 217)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 223

Collision warning system* "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- trian Detection is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- trian Detection is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- trian Detection may prevent a collision or reduce the collision speed.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes- trian Detection must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on Collision Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking, there might be a risk of a collision sooner or later.

Two system levels The Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection function is available in

two variants, depending on how the car is equipped:

Level 1

The driver is merely warned18 of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the driver must himself brake.

Level 2

The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals - the car is braked automatically if the driver him- self does not act within a reasonable time.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of components included in Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection must only be carried out in a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Collision warning system* - function (p.

224)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 227)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 225)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 228)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 229)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 231)

Collision warning system* - symbols and message (p. 233)

18 No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".

07 Driver support

07

224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Collision warning system* - function "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

Function overview19.

Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk.

Radar sensor20

Camera sensor

Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes three steps in the following order:

1. Collision warning

2. Brake support20

3. Auto Brake20

The collision warning system and City Safety (p. 217) complement each other.

1 - Collision warning The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision.

The collision warning system detects pedes- trians, stationary vehicles as well as vehicles driving in the same direction in front of the car.

If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian or a vehicle then the driver's attention is attracted with a flashing red warning signal and an acoustic signal.

2 - Brake support If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake sup- port is activated.

This means that the brake system is prepared for rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.

If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then full brake function is imple- mented.

Brake support also reinforces the driver's braking if the system considers that the brak- ing is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

3 - Auto Brake The automatic brake function is activated last.

If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is imminent then the automatic brak- ing function is deployed - this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

19 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 20 With system Level 2 only.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225

WARNING

The collision warning system does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions. The collision warning system does not react to vehicles or cyclists driving in another direction to the car or to animals.

Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision. This section "Func- tion" and the section "Limitations" inform about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using the Collision Warn- ing system with Auto Brake.

Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at a vehicle speed exceeding 80 km/h.

Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists do not work in darkness and tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.

The auto-brake function can prevent a col- lision or reduce collision speed. To ensure full brake performance, the driver should always depress the brake pedal - even when the car auto-brakes.

Never wait for a collision warning. The driver is always responsible that the cor- rect distance and speed are maintained - even when the collision warning system with auto-brake is used.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 223)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 227)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 225)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 228)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 229)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 231)

Collision warning system* - symbols and message (p. 233)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detection "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

Optimum examples of what the system interprets as a cyclist - with clear body and bicycle con- tours, directly from behind and in the car's cen- tre line.

Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function that detects a cyclist receives as unambiguous information as pos- sible about the body and bicycle contours - this implies the opportunity to identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement.

|| 07 Driver support

07

226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a cyclist.

The function can only "see" cyclists from behind, who are travelling in the same direction.

For the function to be able to detect a cyclist, he/she must be an adult and rid- ing a "senior bicycle".

The bicycle must be equipped with a highly visible and approved21 rearward- facing red reflector, fitted at least 70 cm above the roadway.

The function can only detect cyclists directly from behind and who are travel- ling in the same direction - not at an angle from behind, not from the side.

Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand edge of the car's imagined/extended side lines may be detected late or not at all.

The function's capacity to detect cyclists at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the human eye.

The function's capacity to detect cyclists is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.

For optimum bicycle detection, the City Safety function must be activated, see City Safety (p. 217).

WARNING

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Cyclist Detection is a means of assistance.

The function cannot detect:

all cyclists in all situations and does not see partially obscured cyclists, for example.

cyclists in clothing that obscures the contours of the body or who are approaching from the side.

bicycles that have no rearward-facing red reflector.

bicycles loaded with large objects. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 223)

Collision warning system* - function (p. 224)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 227)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 229)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 228)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 231)

Collision warning system* - symbols and message (p. 233)

21 The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 227

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body contours.

Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function that detects pedes- trians receives as unambiguous information as possible about the contours of the body - this implies the opportunity to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement.

If large parts of the body are not visible to the camera then the system cannot detect a pedestrian.

In order for a pedestrian to be detected he/she must appear full-length and have a height of at least 80 cm.

The system cannot detect a pedestrian carrying larger items.

The camera sensor's ability to see pedes- trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the human eye.

The camera sensor's capacity to detect pedestrians is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels - even when street- lights are lit.

WARNING

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is an assistance tool.

This function cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and it cannot see e.g. parti- ally obscured pedestrians, people in cloth- ing that hides the contours of the body or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.

The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 223)

Collision warning system* - function (p. 224)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 228)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 225)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 229)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 231)

Collision warning system* - symbols and message (p. 233)

07 Driver support

07

228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Collision warning system* - operation "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

Settings for the collision warning system are made from MY CAR via the centre console's screen and menu system.

Warning signals On and Off It is possible to select whether the collision warning system's acoustic and visual warning signals should be switched on or off.

When starting the engine, the setting that was selected when the engine was switched off is obtained automatically.

NOTE

The Brake Support and Auto Brake func- tions are always activated - they cannot be deactivated.

Light and acoustic signals

To deactivate the light and acoustic signals:

Locate Settings Car settings Driver support systems Collision Warning - there select to uncheck the box.

The warning lamp, see Collision warning sys- tem - function (p. 224), is tested every time the engine is started by briefly illuminating the warning lamp's separate points of light if the collision warning system's light and acoustic warnings are activated.

Audible signal The warning sound can be activated/deacti- vated separately:

Select On or Off in the menu system under Settings Car settings Driver support systems Collision Warning

Warning sound.

Set warning distance The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warnings are deployed.

Select Long, Normal or Short in the menu system MY CAR under Settings

Car settings Driver support systems Collision Warning Warning distance

The warning distance determines the sys- tem's sensitivity. Warning distance Long pro- vides an earlier warning. First test with Long and if this setting produces too many warn- ings, which could be perceived as irritating in certain situations, then change to warning distance Normal.

Only use warning distance Short in excep- tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.

NOTE

When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the collision warning system is switched off.

The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time.

In order for the collision warning system to be effective, always drive with Distance Alert (p. 214) set at time interval 45.

NOTE

Even if the warning distance has been set to Long warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles in front brake heavily.

WARNING

No automatic system can guarantee 100 % correct function in all situations. Therefore, never test Collision Warning with Auto Brake by driving at people or vehicles - this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 229

Checking settings The settings required can be controlled on the centre console's screen. Search with the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Driver support systems Collision Warning, MY CAR (p. 104).

Maintenance

Camera and radar sensor22.

For the sensors to work correctly, they must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car sham- poo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 223)

Collision warning system* - function (p. 224)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 227)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 225)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 229)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 231)

Collision warning system* - symbols and message (p. 233)

Collision warning system* - general limitations "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

The function has certain limitations - for example, it is not active until approx. 4 km/h..

The collision warning system's visual warning signal may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead. The warning sound should therefore always be activated.

On slippery road surfaces the braking dis- tance is extended, which may reduce the capacity to avoid a collision. In such situa- tions the ABS and DSTC (p. 185) systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.

22 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

|| 07 Driver support

07

230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

The visual warning signal can be temporar- ily disengaged in the event of high passen- ger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example. If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system.

Warnings may not appear if the dis- tance to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal move- ments are large, e.g. a very active driv- ing style.

WARNING

Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front correctly.

The sensor system has a limited range for pedestrians and cyclists23 - the system can provide effective warnings and brake interventions for them at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h. For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h.

Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles could be disengaged due to dark- ness or poor visibility.

Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h.

The collision warning system uses the same radar sensors as the adaptive cruise control (p. 199).

If warnings are perceived as being too fre- quent or disturbing then the warning distance can be reduced. This then leads to the sys- tem providing a warning at a later stage, which reduces the total number of warnings; see Collision warning system - operation (p. 228).

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo- rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti- vated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is why the system does not intervene in situa- tions where the car is approaching a vehicle in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.

In situations where the driver demonstrates active, aware driving behaviour, a collision warning may be postponed slightly in order to keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.

When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta- tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov- ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.

On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 223)

Collision warning system* - function (p. 224)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 227)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 225)

23 For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 228)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 231)

Collision warning system* - symbols and message (p. 233)

Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

The function uses the car's camera sensor, which has certain limitations.

The cars camera sensor is also used - as well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by the functions:

Active high beam (p. 83)

Road sign information (p. 188)

Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 235)

Lane Keeping Aid (p. 239).

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt.

Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working.

The camera sensors have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick

fog for example. Under such conditions the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.

Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car- riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings could also significantly reduce camera sensor function when it is used to scan the carriage- way and detect pedestrians and other vehi- cles.

The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim- ited, which is why pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles cannot be detected in some situa- tions, or they are detected later than anticipa- ted.

During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for approx. 15 minutes after the engine is started in order to protect camera functionality.

Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Windscreen Sensors blocked then this means that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road markings in front of the car.

At the same time, this means that - besides Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Auto- matic main/dipped beam dimming, Road Sign Information, Driver Alert Control and Lane

|| 07 Driver support

07

232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keeping Aid functions will not have full func- tionality either.

The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action.

Cause Action

The windscreen surface in front of the camera is dirty or covered with ice or snow.

Clean the wind- screen surface in front of the camera from dirt, ice and snow.

Thick fog, heavy rain or snow means that the camera does not work suffi- ciently well.

No action. At times the camera does not work during heavy rain or snow- fall.

Cause Action

The windscreen surface in front of the camera has been cleaned but the message remains.

Wait. It may take several minutes for the camera to measure the visibil- ity.

Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera.

Visit a workshop to have the wind- screen inside the camera cover cleaned - an author- ised Volvo work- shop is recom- mended.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 223)

Collision warning system* - function (p. 224)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 227)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 225)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 228)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 229)

Collision warning system* - symbols and message (p. 233)

07 Driver support

07

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 233

Collision warning system* - symbols and message "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to

assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

SymbolA Message Specification

Collis'n warning OFF Collision warning system switched off.

Shown when the engine is started.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Collision warn. Unavailable

The collision warning system cannot be activated.

Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Auto braking was acti- vated

Auto Brake has been active.

The message clears after one press of the OK button.

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual

Camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Radar blocked See manual

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.

Radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Collision warn. Serv- ice required

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

|| 07 Driver support

07

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 223)

Collision warning system* - function (p. 224)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 227)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detec- tion (p. 225)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 228)

Collision warning system* - general limita- tions (p. 229)

Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 231)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235

Driver Alert System* The Driver Alert System is intended to assist drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving on.

The Driver Alert System consists of different functions which can either be switched on at the same time or individually:

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p. 236).

Lane keeping assistant - operation (p. 241).

A switched-on function is set in standby mode and is not activated automatically until speed exceeds 65 km/h.

The function is deactivated again when speed decreases to below 60 km/h.

The functions use a camera which is depend- ent on the lane having side markings painted on each side.

WARNING

Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a sup- plementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Driver aid status

The current status for all driver aids can be checked in MY CAR (p. 106).

Related information Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 235)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages (p. 237)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p. 236)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* DAC is intended to attract the driver's atten- tion when he/she starts to drive less consis- tently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep.

The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads.

A camera detects the side markings painted on the carriageway and compares the section of the road with the driver's steering wheel movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly.

In some cases driving ability is not affected despite driver fatigue. In which case there may not be any warning issued for the driver. For this reason it is always important to stop and take a break in the event of any signs of

|| 07 Driver support

07

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a warning.

NOTE

The function must not be used to extend a period of driving. Always plan breaks at regular intervals, and make sure you are well rested.

Limitation In some cases the system may issue a warn- ing despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example:

in strong side winds

on rutted road surfaces.

DAC is not intended for city traffic.

NOTE

The camera sensor has certain limitations, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 231).

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 235)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p. 236)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages (p. 237)

Lane Keeping Aid* (p. 239)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation Settings for Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 235) are made from the centre console screen and its menu system (p. 104).

To set Driver Alert in standby mode:

In MY CAR, search for Car settings Driver support systems Driver Alert and check the box - No check in the box means: Standby function disengaged.

Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h and remains active as long as the speed is over 60 km/h.

If the vehicle is being driven errati- cally, the driver is notified by an acoustic signal plus the text mes- sage (p. 237) Driver Alert Time for

a break - the linked symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel at the same time. The warning is repeated after a time if driving ability does not improve.

The warning symbol can go off:

Press the left stalk switch OK button.

WARNING

An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition.

In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon as possible and rest.

Studies have shown that it is equally as dangerous to drive while tired as it is under the influence of alcohol.

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 235)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 235)

Lane Keeping Aid* (p. 239)

07 Driver support

07

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 235) can show symbols and text messages in the combined

instrument panel or in the centre console's screen in different situations.

Combined instrument panel

SymbolA Message Specification

Driver Alert Time for a break

The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limita- tions (p. 231).

Driver Alert system Service required

The system is disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A The symbols are schematic.

Display

Sym- bol

Message Specification

Driver Alert OFF The function is disengaged.

Driver Alert Available The function is activated.

|| 07 Driver support

07

238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Sym- bol

Message Specification

Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h

The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.

Driver Alert Unavailable The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor lim- itations (p. 231).

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 235)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p. 236)

Lane Keeping Aid* (p. 239)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239

Lane Keeping Aid* The lane keeping assistant is one of the func- tions in the Driver Alert System - sometimes also referred to as LKA (Lane Keeping Aid). The lane keeping assistant is intended for use on motorways and similar major roads to reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving its own lane in certain situations.

A camera reads the painted side lines of the road/lane. If the car is about to cross a side line, the Lane Keeping Aid actively steers the car back into the lane with slight steering tor- que in the steering wheel.

If the car reaches or passes a side line, the Lane Keeping Aid warns the driver with puls- ing vibrations in the steering wheel.

WARNING

LKA is merely a driver's aid and does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.

The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable laws and road traffic regulations are followed.

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 235)

Lane keeping assistant - limitations (p. 241)

Lane keeping assistant - function (p. 239)

Lane keeping assistant - operation (p. 241)

Lane keeping assistant - symbols and messages (p. 243)

Lane keeping assistant - function

Off & On The Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed interval 65-200 km/h on roads with clearly visible side lines. The function is tem- porarily deactivated on narrow roads with less than 2.6 metres between the lane side lines.

Press the button in the centre console to acti- vate or deactivate the function. The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

Some combinations of the selected equip- ment leave no vacant space for an On/Off button in the centre console - in which case the function is handled instead by the car's menu system MY CAR. Here, proceed as fol- lows:

|| 07 Driver support

07

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Select On or Off under Settings Car settings Lane Keeping Aid.

For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106).

In addition, the following selections can be made in MY CAR:

Warning with vibration in the steering wheel: Vibration only - On or Off.

Active steering: Steering assist only - On or Off.

Both Warning with vibration in the steer- ing wheel and Active steering: Full function - On or Off.

Active steering The Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car within the side lines for the lane.

LKA intervenes and steers away.

If the vehicle approaches the left or right side line of the lane and the direction indicator is not activated, the car is steered back into the lane.

Warning with vibration in the steering wheel

LKA steers and warns with pulsing steering wheel vibrations24.

If the vehicle passes a side line, the Lane Keeping Aid warns the driver with pulsing vibrations in the steering wheel. This occurs regardless of whether the car is actively steered back by applying a slight steering tor- que.

Dynamic cornering

LKA does not engage in sharp inside curves.

In certain cases, the Lane Keeping Aid allows the car to cross side lines without engaging active steering or warning with pulsing vibra- tions in the steering wheel. Using an adjacent lane for dynamic cornering when there is a clear line of vision is an example of one such case.

Related information Lane Keeping Aid* (p. 239)

Lane keeping assistant - limitations (p. 241)

Lane keeping assistant - operation (p. 241)

Lane keeping assistant - symbols and messages (p. 243)

24 The figure shows 3 pulsing vibrations when the side line is passed.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241

Lane keeping assistant - operation

The lane keeping assistant is supplemented with self-explanatory graphics in different sit- uations. Here are some examples:

NOTE

LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long as the direction indicator is switched on.

LKA "sees" and follows the side lines (marked in red in the figure).

If the Lane Keeping Aid is active and detects/"sees" the side lines, the LKA symbol indicates this with WHITE lines.

GREY side line the Lane Keeping Aid does not see a line on that side of the car.

LKA intervenes on the right-hand side (marked in red in the figure).

The Lane Keeping Aid intervenes and steers away from the side line - this is indicated with:

RED line for the side in question.

Related information Lane Keeping Aid* (p. 239)

Driver Alert System* (p. 235)

Lane keeping assistant - limitations (p. 241)

Lane keeping assistant - function (p. 239)

Lane keeping assistant - symbols and messages (p. 243)

Lane keeping assistant - limitations

The Lane Keeping Aid camera sensor is restricted in a similar way to the human eye. For more information, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limita- tions (p. 231) and (p. 229).

NOTE

In certain demanding situations LKA may find it difficult to assist the driver correctly - in which case it is recommended that LKA is switched off.

Examples of such a situation could be:

roadworks

winter road conditions

poor road surface

very sporty driving style

poor weather with reduced visibility.

Hands on the steering wheel In order for Lane Keeping Aid to operate, the driver must have his/her hands on the steer- ing wheel. LKA continual monitors this. If hands are not detected on the steering wheel, a text message encouraging the driver to actively steer the car is shown.

If the driver does not follow the request to begin steering, the Lane Keeping Aid goes into standby mode and will remain in this mode until the driver begins to steer the car again.

|| 07 Driver support

07

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information Lane Keeping Aid* (p. 239)

Lane keeping assistant - function (p. 239)

Lane keeping assistant - operation (p. 241)

Lane keeping assistant - symbols and messages (p. 243)

07 Driver support

07

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243

Lane keeping assistant - symbols and messages

In situations where there is no LKA function or it is interrupted, a symbol may be shown in

the combined instrument panel in combina- tion with an explanatory message - follow the recommendation given if appropriate.

Message examples:

SymbolA Message Specification

Lane Keeping Aid Unavaila- ble at this speed

The Lane Keeping Aid is set to standby mode because the speed is lower than 65 km/h.

Lane Keeping Aid Unavaila- ble for current markings

The lane does not have clear side lines or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limita- tions (p. 231) and (p. 229).

Lane Keeping Aid Available The function scans the lane's side lines.

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 231) and (p. 229).

Lane Keeping Aid Service required

The system is disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Lane Keeping Aid Interrup- ted

LKA has been set to standby mode. The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is active again.

A The table's symbols are schematic. The symbols shown in the combined instrument panel may have a slightly different appearance.

|| 07 Driver support

07

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information Lane Keeping Aid* (p. 239)

Lane keeping assistant - limitations (p. 241)

Lane keeping assistant - function (p. 239)

Lane keeping assistant - operation (p. 241)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245

Park assist syst* Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal using the centre console's VOL knob or in the car's menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 104).

Parking assistance is available in two vari- ants:

Rear only

Both front and rear.

NOTE

When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.

WARNING

Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking.

The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.

Be aware of e.g. people and animals near the car.

Related information Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors

(p. 248)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 245)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 247)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 248)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 247)

Park assist camera (p. 249)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)

Park assist syst* - function The parking assistance system is automati- cally activated when the engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.

|| 07 Driver support

07

246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

On/Off for the sensors for parking assistance and CTA25.

The centre console's display screen shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle.

Display screen view - showing an obstacle left front and right rear.

Marked sectors show which of the four sen- sor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the car symbol a selected sector box is, the shorter the distance between the car and a detected obstacle.

The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind the car. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically.

When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is constant and the active sensor's field nearest the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is within the distance for the constant tone both behind and in front of the car, then the tone sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.

IMPORTANT

Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone.

The sensors cannot detect high objects, such as projecting loading docks.

In such situations, pay extra attention and manoeuvre/reposition the car par- ticularly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since the sensors are temporarily unable to function opti- mally.

Related information Park assist syst* (p. 245)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 248)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 247)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 248)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 247)

Park assist camera (p. 249)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)

25 Side warning, CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) (p. 260)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247

Park assist syst* - backward Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind comes from one of the rear loudspeakers.

Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged.

When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the tow- bar, rear parking assistance is switched off automatically - otherwise the sensors would react to the trailer.

NOTE

When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genu- ine trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the sensors do not react to them.

Related information Park assist syst* (p. 245)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 248)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 245)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 247)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 248)

Park assist camera (p. 249)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)

Park assist syst* - forward Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

The parking assistance system is automati- cally activated when the engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.

The distance covered in front of the car is about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in front comes from one of the front loudspeakers.

Front park assist is active up to approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is illuminated in order to indicate that the sys- tem is activated. When the speed is below 10 km/h the system is reactivated.

|| 07 Driver support

07

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

IMPORTANT

When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors - the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle.

Related information Park assist syst* (p. 245)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 248)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 245)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 248)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 247)

Park assist camera (p. 249)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)

Park assist syst* - fault indication Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

If the combined instrument panel's information symbol illuminates with a constant glow and the text mes-

sage Park assist syst Service required is shown, then parking assistance is disen- gaged.

IMPORTANT

Under some circumstances, the parking sensors can give false warning signals due to external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

Related information Park assist syst* (p. 245)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 248)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 245)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 247)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 247)

Park assist camera (p. 249)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

The sensors for parking assistance must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.

Sensor location, front.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249

Sensor location, rear.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement.

Related information Park assist syst* (p. 245)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 245)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 247)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 248)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 247)

Park assist camera (p. 249)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)

Park assist camera The parking camera is an assist system and is activated when reverse gear is engaged (can be changed in the settings menu, see MY CAR - menu options (p. 106)).

The camera image is shown on the centre console's screen.

NOTE

When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.

WARNING

The parking camera is an aid and can never replace the responsibilities of the driver when reversing.

The camera has blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.

Be aware of people and animals near the car.

Function and operation

CAM button location.

The camera shows what is behind the car and if something appears from the sides.

The camera shows a wide area behind the car and part of the bumper and any towbar.

Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly - this is normal.

NOTE

Objects on the display screen may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen.

If another view is active the parking camera system takes over automatically and the camera image is displayed on the screen.

When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken lines are shown graphically which illustrate

|| 07 Driver support

07

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

where the car's rear wheels will roll with the current steering wheel angle, this facilitates tight parking, reversing into tight spaces and for hitching a trailer. The cars approximate external dimensions are illustrated by means of two dashed lines. These help lines can be switched off in the settings menu.

If the car is also equipped with parking assis- tance sensors* then their information is dis- played graphically as coloured fields in order to illustrate the distance to detected obsta- cles, see Park assist syst* - function (p. 245).

The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after reverse gear has been disengaged or until the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h forward or 35 km/h backward.

Camera location next to the opening handle.

Light conditions The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions. Because of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality. Poor light condi- tions can result in a slightly reduced image quality.

NOTE

Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and ice to ensure optimum function. This is particularly important in poor light.

Park assist lines

Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis- played for the driver.

The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and are directly related to steering wheel move-

ment, which shows the driver the path the car will take when it turns.

NOTE

When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car, the lines on the display show the route the car will take - not the trailer.

The screen shows no lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car's electrical system.

The parking camera is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.

IMPORTANT

Remember that the display only shows the area behind the car - so pay attention to the sides and front of the car when turning the steering while reversing.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251

Boundary lines

Different lines in the system.

Boundary line, free reversing zone

"Wheel tracks"

The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also the limit of the car's most protruding parts, such as door mirrors and corners - also dur- ing turning.

The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no obstacle is in the way.

Cars with reversing sensors*

Coloured areas (x 4 - one per sensor) show dis- tance.

If the car is also equipped with parking assis- tance sensors (see Park assist syst* - function (p. 245)) the distance indication will be more precise and the coloured areas show which of the 4 sensors is/are registering an obsta- cle.

Colour / paint Distance (metres)

Light yellow 0,71,5

Yellow 0,50,7

Orange 0,30,5

Red 00,3

Related information Park assist camera - settings (p. 252)

Park assist camera - limitations (p. 252)

Park assist syst* (p. 245)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)

07 Driver support

07

252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Park assist camera - settings The parking camera is an assist system and is activated when reverse gear is engaged.

Press OK/MENU when a camera view is shown. Make the settings as desired.

Miscellaneous The default setting is that the camera is

activated when reverse gear is engaged.

One press on CAM activates the camera even if reverse gear is not engaged.

Change between normal and zoomed image by turning TUNE or by pressing CAM.

Towbar The camera can be used to advantage when hitching a trailer. A help line for the towbar's intended "course" towards the trailer can be shown in the display - just as for the "wheel tracks".

The towbar can be zoomed in for preci- sion manoeuvring with one press on CAM. Pressing again gives normal view.

The towbar's park assist line is activated in the menu system MY CAR where a selection can be made between displaying the "wheel tracks" or towbar course - both options can- not be displayed simultaneously.

Related information Park assist camera (p. 249)

Park assist camera - limitations (p. 252)

Park assist syst* (p. 245)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)

MY CAR (p. 104)

Park assist camera - limitations The parking camera is an assist system and is activated when reverse gear is engaged.

NOTE

Bicycle racks or other accessories moun- ted on the back of the car may obscure the line of sight of the camera.

To bear in mind Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that is hidden from view. Obsta- cles could thereby go undetected until they are very close to the car.

Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice and snow.

Clean the camera lens regularly with luke- warm water and car shampoo - take care not to scratch the lens.

Related information Park assist camera (p. 249)

Park assist camera - settings (p. 252)

Park assist syst* (p. 245)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space. The combined instrument panel uses symbols, graphics and text when elements are to be executed.

The On/Off button is on the centre console.

NOTE

When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.

WARNING

PAP does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always has the final responsibil- ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and for paying attention to the surround- ings and other road users approaching or passing during parking.

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations (p.

256)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function (p. 253)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation (p. 254)

Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and messages (p. 257)

Park assist camera (p. 249)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space. The combined instrument panel uses symbols, graphics and text when elements are to be executed.

NOTE

The PAP function measures the space and turns the steering wheel - the driver's task is to follow the combined instrument pan- el's instructions and select the gear (reverse/forward), control the speed, brake and stop.

PAP can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started:

The functions DSTC or ABS must not intervene during an ongoing PAP function - these can be activated due to e.g. steep and slippery surfaces, see the sections on Foot brake (p. 289) and Stability and traction control system (p. 185) for more information.

Trailers must not be connected to the car.

The speed must be below 50 km/h.

|| 07 Driver support

07

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Principle for PAP.

The PAP function parks the car using the fol- lowing steps:

1. The function searches for a parking space and measures it (A & B (p. 254)). During measurement, speed must not exceed 30 km/h.

2. The car is steered into the space while reversing (C & D (p. 255)).

3. The car is straightened up in the space by driving back and forth (E & F (p. 255)).

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)

Park assist camera (p. 249)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space.

The driver is instructed about how PAP works by means of simple, clear instructions in the combined instrument panel - using both graphics and text graphics and text message (p. 257).

NOTE

Remember that certain steering wheel positions may obstruct the combined instrument panel's instructions when you turn it during the parking manoeuvre.

1 - Searching and checking measurements

The PAP function searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough. Proceed as follows:

1. Activate PAP by pressing this button and do not drive faster than 30 km/h.

2. Keep an eye on the combined instrument panel and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text message so request.

3. Stop the car when the graphics and text so request.

NOTE

PAP searches the area for a parking space, displays instructions and guides the car in on its passenger side. But if required the car can also be parked on the driver's side of the street:

Activate the direction indicator for the driver's side - the car is then parked on that side of the street instead.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255

2 - Reversing in

During the Reversing step, PAP will steer the car into the parking space. Proceed as fol- lows:

1. Check that the area behind the car is clear, then engage reverse gear.

2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel - and no faster than approx. 7 km/h.

3. Keep an eye on the combined instrument panel and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text message so request.

NOTE

Keep your hands away from the steer- ing wheel when the PAP function is activated.

Make sure that the steering wheel is not hindered in any way and can rotate freely.

To achieve optimum results - wait until the steering wheel is fully turned before starting to drive backward/ forward.

3 - Straightening up

When the car has reversed into the parking space, it must be straightened up and stop- ped.

1. Engage first gear or D position, wait until the steering wheel has been turned, then drive slowly forwards.

2. Stop the car when the graphics and text message so request.

3. Engage reverse gear and drive back- wards slowly until the graphics and text message tell you to stop.

The function is disengaged automatically when parking is complete, and the graphics and text message show that parking is com- plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct the positioning. Only the driver can determine whether the car is properly parked.

IMPORTANT

The warning distance is shorter when the sensors are used by Active Park Assist compared with when Park Assist uses the sensors.

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)

Park assist camera (p. 249)

07 Driver support

07

256 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space. The combined instrument panel uses symbols, graphics and text when elements are to be executed.

The PAP sequence is stopped:

if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h

if the driver touches the steering wheel

if the ABS or DSTC function is enabled - e.g. if a wheel loses grip on a slippery road surface.

A text message indicates where the PAP sequence was stopped.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement.

IMPORTANT

Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is inter- ference with the sensors from external sound sources which emit the same ultra- sound frequencies as those with which the system works.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

To bear in mind The driver should bear in mind that the Park Assist Pilot is an aid not an infallible, fully- automatic function. The driver must therefore be prepared to intervene. There are also details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.:

PAP starts out from the current location of the parked vehicles - if they are inap- propriately parked then the car's tyres and wheel rims may be damaged against kerbs.

PAP is designed for parking on straight streets, not sharp curves or bends. For this reason, make sure the car is parallel to the parking space when PAP measures the space.

It is not always possible to find parking spaces on narrow streets since there is not enough space for manoeuvring. In such parking situations, it helps the sys-

tem to drive as close to the side of the road as possible where you intend to park.

Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic while being parked.

Objects situated higher than the detection areas of the sensors are not included when calculations are made for the park- ing manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to swing into the parking space too early, and hence such parking pockets should be avoided.

The driver is responsible for determining whether the space selected by PAP is suitable for parking.

Use approved tyres26 with the correct tyre pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to park the car.

Heavy rain or snow may cause the sys- tem to measure the parking space incor- rectly.

Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare wheel are fitted.

Do not use PAP if loaded objects are pro- truding from the car.

26 "Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257

IMPORTANT

The PAP system's parameters may need to be updated when changing to another approved wheel rim size involving changed tyre circumference. Consult a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Maintenance

The PAP sensors are located in the bumpers - 6 front and 4 rear.

For the PAP function to work correctly, its sensors must be cleaned (p. 248) regularly with water and car shampoo - these are the same sensors as are used by parking assis- tance (p. 245).

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)

Park assist camera (p. 249)

Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and messages The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space. The combined instrument panel uses symbols, graphics and text when elements are to be executed.

The combined instrument panel can show dif- ferent combinations of symbols and text with varying content - sometimes with a self- explanatory piece of advice on appropriate action.

If a message says that the Park Assist Pilot is disengaged, contact with an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 253)

BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a function designed for providing support for the driver when driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.

BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a warning about:

vehicles in the car's blind spot

quickly approaching vehicles in the left and right lanes closest to the car.

WARNING

BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.

BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mir- rors.

BLIS can never replace the driver's responsibility and attention - it is always the driver's responsibility to change lanes in a safe manner.

|| 07 Driver support

07

258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Overview

Position of the BLIS lamp27.

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehi- cle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

Maintenance

Sensor location.

The sensors for the BLIS functions are located inside the rear wing/bumper on each side of the car.

To ensure optimal functionality, the areas in front of the sensors must be kept clean.

Related information BLIS - operation (p. 258)

CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)* (p. 260)

BLIS - operation BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a function designed for providing support for the driver when driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.

Activate/deactivate BLIS BLIS is activated when the engine is started. This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door panels flashing once.

Button for activating/deactivating.

The BLIS function can be deactivated/acti- vated by pressing the BLIS button on the centre console.

Some combinations of the selected equip- ment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console - in which case the func-

27 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

07 Driver support

07

259

tion is handled by the car's menu system MY CAR28:

Select On or Off at Settings Car settings BLIS.

When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp in the button goes out/illuminates and the combined instrument panel confirms the change with a text message. The door panel indicator lamps flash once upon activation.

To extinguish the message:

Press the left stalk switch OK button.

or

Wait approx. 5 seconds the message extinguishes.

When BLIS operates

Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone for quickly approaching vehicle.

The BLIS function is active at speeds above approx. 10 km/h.

The system is designed to react when:

the vehicle is overtaken by other vehicles

another vehicle is quickly approaching the vehicle.

When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a con- stant glow. If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning in this situation then the BLIS lamp will change from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light.

WARNING

BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is being reversed.

Limitations Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can

reduce functionality and make it impossi- ble to provide warnings. BLIS cannot detect hazards if it is covered.

Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.

BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con- nected to the car's electrical system.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Related information BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) (p.

257)

BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages (p. 262)

28 For information about the menu system - My car - menu option (p. 106).

07 Driver support

07

260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)* CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is a driver aid intended to warn about crossing traffic when the car is reversing. CTA is a supplement to BLIS (p. 257).

Activate/deactivate CTA CTA is activated when the engine is started. This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door panels flashing once.

In cars equipped with parking assistance (p. 245), the CTA function can be deactivated/ activated with the parking assistance On/Off button.

On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.

CTA itself can be deactivated in the MY CAR menu system as follows:

Go to Settings Car settings BLIS Cross Traffic Alert and deselect. The

CTA function is then deactivated. BLIS remains activated.

WARNING

CTA is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.

CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors.

CTA can never replace the driver's respon- sibility and attention - it is always the driv- er's responsibility to reverse in a safe man- ner.

When CTA operates

Principle for CTA.

CTA supplements the BLIS function by being able to see crossing traffic from the side dur- ing reversing, such as when reversing out of a parking space.

CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions, it may also be able to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians.

CTA is only active during reversing and is activated automatically when reverse is selected at the gearbox.

If CTA detects something approaching from the side, an acoustic warning signal sounds. The signal comes from either the left or the right speaker depending on which direction the approaching object is coming from.

CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS lamps.

An additional warning is provided in the form of an illuminated icon in the display screen's PAS graphics (p. 245).

Limitations CTA does not perform optimally in all situa- tions, but has a certain limitation - for exam- ple, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructing objects.

Here are some examples of when CTA's "field of vision" may be limited from the beginning and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close:

07 Driver support

07

261

The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.

Blind CTA sector.

Sector where CTA can detect/"see".

In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely "blind" on one side.

However, when the driver is slowly reversing the car, the angle is changed in relation to the

vehicle/object that is blocking, at which the blind sector rapidly decreases.

Examples of further limitations:

Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can reduce functionality and make it impossi- ble to provide warnings. CTA cannot detect hazards if it is covered.

Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.

CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con- nected to the cars electrical system.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Maintenance

Sensor location.

The sensors for the CTA functions are located inside the rear wing/bumper on each side of the car.

To ensure optimal functionality, the areas in front of the sensors must be kept clean.

Related information BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) (p.

257)

BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages (p. 262)

07 Driver support

07

262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages In situations where the BLIS (p. 257) and CTA (p. 260) functions fail or are interrupted, the combined instrument panel may show a sym- bol, supplemented by an explanatory mes- sage - follow any recommendation given.

Message examples:

Message Specification

CTA OFF CTA has been deactivated manually. BLIS is active.

BLIS and CTA OFF Trailer attached

BLIS and CTA are tempo- rarily disabled because a trailer is connected to the cars electrical system.

BLIS and CTA Serv- ice required

BLIS and CTA are not working.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

A text message can be acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK button on the direc- tion indicator stalk.

Related information BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) (p.

257)

CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)* (p. 260)

Speed related power steering Speed related power steering causes the steering wheel force to increase with the speed of the car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.

The steering is firmer and more immediate on motorways. Steering is light and requires no extra effort when parking and at low speed.

The driver can choose between three differ- ent levels of steering force for road respon- siveness or steering sensitivity. Go to the menu system MY CAR and locate Settings

Car settings Steering wheel force and select Low, Medium or High.

This menu is not accessible when the car is moving.

Related information MY CAR (p. 104)

STARTING AND DRIVING

08 Starting and driving

08

264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Alcolock* The function of the Alcolock1 is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally.

WARNING

The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely.

Related information Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.

264)

Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 266)

Alcolock* - storage (p. 265)

Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p. 265)

Alcolock* - symbols and messages (p. 268)

Alcolock* - functions and operation The function of the Alcolock2 is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol.

Functions

Nozzle for breath test.

Switch.

Transmission button.

Lamp for battery status.

Lamp for result of breath test.

Lamp indicates ready for breath test.

Operation Battery

Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta- tus:

Indicator lamp (4)

Battery status

Green flash- ing

Charging in progress

Green Fully charged

Yellow Semi-charged

Red Discharged - fit the charger in the holder or connect the power supply cable from the glovebox.

NOTE

Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will keep the built-in battery fully charged and the Alcolock is activated automatically when the car is opened.

Related information Alcolock* (p. 264)

1 Also called Alcoguard. 2 Also called Alcoguard.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265

Alcolock* - storage The function of the Alcolock3 is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol.

Store the Alcolock in its holder. Release the handheld unit by depressing it slightly in its holder and releasing it - it then springs out and can be removed from the holder.

Handheld unit storage and charging station.

Replace the handheld unit in the holder by pushing it in until it engages.

Store the handheld unit in the holder - this provides it with the best protection and keeps its batteries fully charged.

Related information Alcolock* (p. 264)

Alcolock* - before starting the engine The function of the Alcolock4 is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol.

The Alcolock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened.

Nozzle for breath test.

Switch.

Transmission button.

Lamp for battery status.

Lamp for result of breath test.

Lamp indicates ready for breath test.

1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the Alcolock is ready for use.

2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If the Alcolock is outside the car when it is unlocked then it must first be activated with the switch (2).

3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath and blow with an even pressure until a "click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds. The result will be one of the alternatives in the following table Result after breath test.

4. If no message is shown then the trans- mission to the car may have failed - in which case, press the button (3) to trans- mit the result to the car manually.

5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alco- lock in its holder.

6. Start the engine following an approved breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it must be repeated.

3 Also called Alcoguard. 4 Also called Alcoguard.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

266 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Result after breath test

Indicator lamp (5) + Display text

Specification

Green lamp + Alcoguard Approved test

Start the engine - no alcohol content meas- ured.

Yellow lamp + Alcoguard Approved test

Engine starting possi- ble - measured alcohol content is above 0.1 promille but below the limit value in forceA.

Red lamp + Dis- approved test Wait 1 minute

Engine starting not possible - measured alcohol content is above the limit value in forceA.

A Limit values vary from country to country. Find out what applies in your country. See also Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 266)

NOTE

After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test.

Related information Alcolock* (p. 264)

Alcolock* - to bear in mind The function of the Alcolock5 is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol.

In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible:

Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.

Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result.

Change of driver

Nozzle for breath test.

Switch.

Transmission button.

Lamp for battery status.

Lamp for result of breath test.

Lamp indicates ready for breath test.

In order to ensure that a new breath test is carried out in the event of a change of driver - depress the switch (2) and the send button (3) simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At which point the car returns to start inhibition mode and a new approved breath test is required before starting the engine.

Calibration and service The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated at a workshop6 every 12 months.

30 days before recalibration is necessary the combined instrument panel shows the mes- sage Alcoguard Calibr. required. If calibra- tion is not carried out within these 30 days then normal engine starting will be blocked - only starting with the Bypass function will then be possible, see the following heading "Emergency situation".

The message can be cleared by pressing the send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reappears each time the engine is started - only recalibration at a workshop6 can clear the message permanently.

5 Also called Alcoguard. 6 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267

Cold or hot weather The colder the weather the longer it takes before the Alcolock is ready for use:

Temperature (C) Maximum heat- ing time (sec-

onds)

+10 to +85 10

-5 to +10 60

-40 to -5 180

At temperatures below -20 C or above +60 C the Alcolock requires additional power supply. The combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard insert power cable. In which case, connect the power supply cable from the glovebox and wait until indicator lamp (6) is green.

In extremely cold weather the heating time can be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.

Emergency situation In the event of an emergency situation or the Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.

NOTE

All activation with bypass is logged and saved in a memory; see Recording data (p. 17).

After the Bypass function has been activated the combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time while driving and can only be reset by a work- shop6.

The Bypass function can be tested without the error message being logged - in which case, carry out all the steps without starting the car. The error message is cleared when the car is locked.

When the Alcolock is installed, either the Bypass or Emergency function is selected as the bypassing option. This setting can be changed afterwards at a workshop6.

Activating the Bypass function

Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch OK button and the button for haz- ard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru- ment panel first shows Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after which the engine can be started.

This function can be activated several times. The error message shown during driving can only be cleared at a workshop6.

Activating the Emergency function

Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch OK button and the button for haz- ard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru- ment panel shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the engine can be started.

This function can be used once, after which a reset must be made at a workshop6.

Related information Alcolock* (p. 264)

6 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

08 Starting and driving

08

268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Alcolock* - symbols and messages The function of the Alcolock7 is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol.

In addition to the previously described mes- sages related to how the alcolock works before starting the engine (p. 265) the follow- ing can also be displayed:

Display text Meaning/Action

Alcoguard Restart possi- ble

The engine has been switched off for less than 30 minutes - engine star- ting possible without new test.

Alcoguard Service required

Contact a workshopA.

Alcoguard No signal

Transmission failed - send manually with but- ton (3) or take a new breath test.

Alcoguard Invalid test

Test failed - take a new breath test.

Alcoguard Blow longer

Blowing too short - blow for longer.

Display text Meaning/Action

Alcoguard Blow softer

Blowing too hard - blow more gently.

Alcoguard Blow harder

Blowing too weak - blow harder.

Alcoguard wait Preheat- ing

Heating not finished - wait for text Alcoguard Blow 5 seconds.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Alcolock* (p. 264)

Starting the engine The engine is started and switched off using the remote control key and the START/STOP ENGINE button.

Ignition switch with remote control key extrac- ted/inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.

7 Also called Alcoguard.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269

IMPORTANT

Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the detachable key blade; see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 166)

1. Insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch and press it in to its end posi- tion. Note that if the car is equipped with Alcolock* then a breath test must first be approved before the engine can be started. For more information on the Alcolock, see Alcolock* (p. 264).

2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed8. (For cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the brake pedal.)

3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button and then release it.

The starter motor works until the engine is started or until its overheating protection trig- gers.

IMPORTANT

If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover.

WARNING

Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car, and make sure that the key position is 0 - in particular if there are children in the car. For information on how this works, see Key positions (p. 71).

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal oper- ating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

Keyless drive* Follow steps 23 for keyless(p. 168) starting of petrol and diesel engines.

NOTE

A prerequisite for the engine to start is that one of the car's remote control keys with the Keyless drive function is in the passen- ger compartment or cargo area.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving or during towing.

Related information Key positions (p. 71)

8 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.

08 Starting and driving

08

270

Switching off the engine The engine is switched off using the START/ STOP ENGINE button.

To switch off the engine:

Press the START/STOP ENGINE button - the engine stops.

If the car has an automatic gearbox and the gear selector is not in a position P or if the car is moving - Press twice or hold the START/STOP ENGINE button depressed until the engine stops.

Related information Key positions (p. 71)

Steering lock The steering lock makes steering difficult if the car is e.g. taken unlawfully.

Function The steering lock locks when the driver's

door is opened after the engine has been switched off.

The steering lock unlocks when the remote control key is in the ignition switch9 and the START/STOP ENGINE button is depressed.

A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock unlocks or locks.

Related information Starting the engine (p. 268)

Key positions (p. 71)

Steering wheel (p. 77)

Jump starting If the starter battery (p. 351) is discharged then the car can be started with current from another battery.

When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short cir- cuits or other damage:

1. Insert the remote control key in key posi- tion (p. 71) 0.

2. Check that the donor battery has a volt- age of 12 V.

3. If the donor battery is installed in another car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other.

9 Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.

08 Starting and driving

08

271

4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).

IMPORTANT

Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.

5. Open the clips on the front cover of the battery in your car and remove the cover.

6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive terminal (2).

7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).

8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at the top, the outer screw head (4).

9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting procedure.

10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.

11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- charged battery.

IMPORTANT

Do not use the connections when attempt- ing to start, as there is a risk of sparking.

12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - first the black and then the red. > Make sure that none of the black jump

lead's clamps comes into contact with the battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead!

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con- nected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.

Related information Starting the engine (p. 268)

Gearboxes There are two main types of gearbox - Manual and Automatic.

Manual gearbox (p. 272)

Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 273) and Powershift (p. 276)

IMPORTANT

To prevent damage to any drive system components, the working temperature of the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of overheating, a warning symbol in the com- bined instrument panel lights up and a text message is shown. Follow the recommen- dation given in the text message.

08 Starting and driving

08

272 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Manual gearbox The function of the gearbox is to change the gear ratio depending on speed and power requirements.

Gearing pattern.

Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted on the gear lever.

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.

Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not sufficient to hold the car in all situa- tions.

Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possi- bility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.

Follow the gearing pattern printed on the gear lever and start from neutral position, N then depress the gear lever before moving it to R position.

Engage reverse gear only when the car is stationary.

Related information Gearboxes (p. 271)

Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p. 450)

Gear shift indicator* The gear shift indicator notifies the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the lowest possible fuel consumption.

An essential detail in connection with environ- mental driving is to drive in the right gear and to change gear in plenty of time.

An indicator is available as an aid on certain variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which notifies the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the lowest possible fuel consump- tion. However, taking into consideration cha- racteristics such as performance and vibra- tion-free running, it may be advantageous to change gear at a higher engine speed. The framed number indicates the current gear.

Manual gearbox Gear shift indicator for man- ual gearbox. Only one marker is illuminated at a time - it is illuminated in the centre only during normal driving.

When gearing up/down as recommended, the upper one is illuminated at +" or the lower at "-", marked red in the illustration.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 273

Automatic gearbox

Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear shift indicator.

With "Analogue" combined instrument panel, the gear positions and indicator arrows are displayed in its centre.

Related information Manual gearbox (p. 272)

Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* An automatic gearbox with Geartronic differs from an Automatic gearbox - Powershift (p. 276), in that it has a hydraulic torque con- verter that transfers power from engine to gearbox. It has two different gear modes - Automatic and Manual.

D: Automatic gear positions. +/: Manual gear positions. S: Sport mode*.10

The combined instrument panel shows the position of the gear selector using the follow- ing indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc.

Gear positions Automatic gear positions are indicated on the right of the combined instrument panel. (Only one marker is illumi- nated at a time - the one showing the current gear selector position.)

Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when the mode is active.

P Parking position Select P when starting the engine or when the car is parked.

In order to be able to move the gear selector from P-position, the brake pedal must first be depressed firmly.

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Apply the parking brake as well, as a precaution - , see Parking brake (p. 292).

NOTE

The gear selector must be in P position to allow the car to be locked and alarmed.

IMPORTANT

The car must be stationary when posi- tion P is selected.

10 The gear lever's gearshift pattern varies depending on engine option.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

274 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - the automatic trans- mission in P is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.

R Reverse The car must be stationary when position R is selected.

N Neutral No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in position N.

D Drive D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when the gear selector is moved to position D from position R.

Geartronic Manual gear positions (+/-) The driver can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released.

The manual gear position is reached by mov- ing the lever to the side from position D to the end position at "+/-". The combined instru- ment panel's symbol "+/-" changes colour from WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3

etc. are displayed in a box which corre- sponds to the gear that has just been selected.

Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to change up a gear and release the lever, which returns to its neutral position between "+" and "".

or

Pull the lever back towards "" (minus) to change down a gear and release it.

The manual gearshift mode "+/-" can be selected at any time while driving.

Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than a level suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling.

To return to automatic driving mode:

Move the lever to the side to the end position at D.

NOTE

f the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the lever has been moved forwards or backwards in its "+/-" position. The com- bined instrument panel then shifts the indi- cation from S to show which of the gears 1, 2, 3 etc. is engaged.

Geartronic - Sport mode (S) The Sport programme provides sportier characteristics and allows higher engine speed for the gears. At the same time it responds more

quickly to acceleration. During active driving, the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to a delayed upshift.

To activate Sport mode:

Move the gear selector to the side from D position to the end position at "+S" - the combined instrument panel changes indi- cation from D to S.

Sport mode can be selected at any time while driving.

Geartronic - Winter mode It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if 3rd gear is engaged manually.

1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear selector from D position to the end position at "+/" - the combined instru- ment panel shifts the indication from D to the figure 111.

2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the combined instrument panel shifts the indication from 1 to 3.

3. Release the brake and accelerate care- fully.

11 If the car has Sport mode* then "S" is shown first.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 275

The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car moves off with a lower engine speed and reduced engine power on the drive wheels.

Kick-down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick- down position, the gearbox automatically changes up.

Kick-down is used when maximum accelera- tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function

To prevent overrevving the engine, the gear- box control program has a protective down- shift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down function.

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/ kick-down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depend- ing on engine speed. The car changes up when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine.

Related information Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 276)

Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p. 450)

08 Starting and driving

08

276 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Automatic gearbox - Powershift* An automatic gearbox with Powershift differs from an automatic gearbox with Geartronic (p. 273), in that it has double mechanical clutch discs.

D: Automatic gear positions. +/: Manual gear positions. S: Sport mode*.12

The Powershift automatic gearbox transmits the motive force from the engine to the drive wheels with double mechanical clutch discs, as opposed to Geartronic which instead uses a conventional hydraulic torque converter.

Powershift transmission operates in the same way and has similar controls and functions as the Geartronic automatic transmission. One exception is Geartronic's Winter mode, see Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 273).

Powershift enables driving away on a slippery road surface if 2nd gear is engaged manually instead of 3rd gear (Geartronic).

Powershift or Geartronic The model with Powershift transmission should not be towed as it is dependent on the engine running in order to receive sufficient lubrication. If towing still has to take place, the route must be as short as possible and then with very low speed.

In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift trans- mission, this can be verified by checking the designation on the gearbox label under the bonnet - see Type designations (p. 438). The designation MPS6 means that it is Powershift transmission - otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission.

To bear in mind The transmission's double clutch has over- load protection that is activated if it becomes too hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a long time.

Overheated transmission causes the car to shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illuminates and the combined instrument

panel shows a message. The transmission can also overheat during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or slower) on an uphill gradi- ent, or with a trailer hitched. The transmission cools down when the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed and the engine running at idling speed.

Overheating during slow driving in queues can be avoided by driving in stages:

Stop the car and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until there is a moderate distance to the traffic ahead, drive for- ward a short distance, and then wait another moment with your foot on the brake pedal.

IMPORTANT

Use the foot brake to hold the car station- ary on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car with the accelerator pedal. The gear- box could then overheat.

For important information regarding Powershift transmission, see Towing (p. 308).

Text message and action In some situations the combined instrument panel may show a text message at the same time as a symbol is illuminated.

12 The gear lever's gearshift pattern varies depending on engine option.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 277

Symbol Message Driving characteristics Action

Transm. overheat brake to hold

Difficulty in maintaining even speed at constant engine speed.

Transmission overheated. Keep the car stationary using the foot brake.A

Transm. overheat park safely

Significant pulling in the car's traction. Transmission overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe manner.A

Transm. cooling let engine run

No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears.

A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.

The table shows three steps with an increased degree of seriousness should the transmission become too hot. In parallel with the text message, the driver is also advised that the car's electronics are temporarily changing the driving characteristics. Follow the instructions in the text message where appropriate.

NOTE

The examples in the table are no indication of the car being defective, but show that a safety function has been activated with a view to preventing damage to any of the car's components.

WARNING

If a warning symbol combined with the text Transm. overheat park safely is ignored then the heat in the gearbox may become so high that the power transmission between engine and gearbox is temporar- ily halted in order to prevent the clutch from malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox tem- perature has cooled to an acceptable level.

For more possible text messages with their respective proposals for solutions concerning automatic gearbox, see Messages (p. 103).

A text message extinguishes automatically after the action has been carried out or after one press on the indicator stalk OK button.

Related information Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 273)

Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p. 450)

08 Starting and driving

08

278 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Gear selector inhibitor There are two different types of gear selector inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

G 0 2 1 3 5 1

The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gearbox has special safety systems:

Parking position (P)

Stationary car with engine running:

Keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the gear selector to another posi- tion.

Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking position (P) To be able to move the gear selector from P to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in position II.

Shiftlock Neutral (N) If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 sec- onds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.

To be able to move the gear selector from N to another gear position the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in key position II (p. 71).

Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor

If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat battery, the gear selector must be moved from the P position so that the car can be moved.

Lift out the contoured insert in the com- partment behind the centre console and locate a spring-loaded button in the bot- tom of the compartment.

Press and hold the button.

Move the gear selector from the P posi- tion and release the button.

4. Refit the storage compartment insert.

Related information Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 273)

Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 276)

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 279

Hill start assist (HSA)* The foot brake can be released before setting off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start Assist) function means that the car does not roll backwards.

The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal to accelerator pedal.

The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver acceler- ates.

Related information Starting the engine (p. 268)

Start/Stop* Some engine and gearbox combinations come fitted with a Start and Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights - the engine is then switched off temporarily and restarts automatically when the journey is due to con- tinue.

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Cor- poration's core values and it influences all of our operations. This target orientation has resulted in several separate energy-saving functions of which Start/Stop is one, all with the collective task of reducing fuel consump- tion, which in turn helps to reduce exhaust emissions.

General information about Start/Stop

The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter and cleaner...

The Start/Stop function gives the driver the opportunity for a more active environmentally conscious way of driving the car by means of being able to allow the engine to stop auto- matically, whenever appropriate.

Manual or Automatic

Note that there are differences in the Start/Stop function depending on whether the gearbox is manual or automatic.

Related information Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.

280)

Starting the engine (p. 268)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 283)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 281)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 286)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 353)

08 Starting and driving

08

280 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Start/Stop* - function and operation Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start and Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. The Start/Stop function is activated automatically when the engine is started with the key.

Start/StopThe function is activated automatically when the engine is started with the key. The driver is made aware of the function by the function's On/Off button symbol lighting up in the combined instrument panel and the On/Off button lamp illuminating.

All of the car's normal systems such as light- ing, radio, etc. work as normal even with an engine that has stopped automatically, except that some equipment may have the function temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system.

Auto-stopping the engine The following is required for the engine to auto-stop:

Conditions M/A A

Declutch, set the gear lever in neu- tral position and release the clutch pedal - the engine stops automati- cally.

M

Stop the car with the foot brake and then keep your foot on the pedal - the engine stops automati- cally.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

In some cases the engine stops automatically before the car is completely stationary.

The combined instrument panel's symbols for the Start/Stop function illuminate as verification and reminder that the engine has stop- ped automatically.

Auto-starting the engine

Conditions M/ AA

With the gear lever in neutral posi- tion:

1. Depress the clutch pedal or press the accelerator pedal - the engine starts.

2. Engage a suitable gear and drive.

M

The following option is also availa- ble on a downhill gradient:

Release the foot brake and let the car move off - the engine starts automatically when the speed exceeds normal walking pace.

M

Release the foot pressure on the foot brake - the engine starts auto- matically and the journey can con- tinue.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

Deactivating the Start/Stop function In certain situations, it may advisable to temporarily switch off the automatic Start/Stop function - this is carried out with a push of this button.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 281

Disengaged function is indicated by the combined instrument panel's Start/Stop symbols and the button's lamp extinguishing.

The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is reactivated with the button or until the next time the engine is started with the key.

Start assistance HSA The foot brake can also be released on an uphill slope to auto-start the engine - the HSA (p. 279) (Hill Start Assist) function prevents the car from rolling backwards.

HSA means that the pressure in the brake system remains temporarily available while the driver moves his/her foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal for driving off with the engine auto-stopped. The temporary braking effect releases after a couple of sec- onds or when the driver accelerates.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 279)

Starting the engine (p. 268)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 283)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 281)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 286)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 353)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start and Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. Although the Start/Stop function is activated, the engine does not always stop automatically.

The engine does not auto-stop if:

Conditions M/ AA

the car has not achieved approx. 5 km/h (= fast walking pace) first after a key start or the last auto- stop.

M + A

the driver has opened the seatbelt's buckle.

M + A

the capacity of the starter battery is below the minimum permissible level.

M + A

the engine does not have normal operating temperature.

M + A

outside temperature is below freez- ing point or above approx. 30 C.

M + A

the windscreen's electric heating is activated.

M + A

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

282 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Conditions M/ AA

the environment in the passenger compartment differs from the preset valuesB - indicated by the ventilation fan running at a high speed.

M + A

the car is reversed. M + A

the starter battery's temperature is below freezing point or too high.

M + A

the driver makes greater steering wheel movements.

M + A

the exhaust system's particulate fil- ter is full - the temporarily disen- gaged Start/Stop function is reacti- vated once an automatic cleaning cycle has been performed (see Die- sel particle filter (p. 299)).

M + A

the road is very steep. M + A

a trailer is connected electrically to the cars electrical system.

M + A

the atmospheric air pressure is less than equivalent to 1500-2400 metres above sea level - the current air pressure varies with the prevailing weather conditions.

M + A

Conditions M/ AA

adaptive cruise control Queue Assist is activated.

A

the drivers door has been opened with the gear selector in D position.

A

the gear selector is moved out of the D position to S positionC or "+/-".

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. B Car with ECC. C Sport mode.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 279)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 280)

Starting the engine (p. 268)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 283)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 286)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 353)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start and Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. An auto-stop- ped engine may restart in certain cases with- out the driver having decided that the journey should continue.

In the following cases the engine also starts automatically if the driver has not depressed the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes his/her foot off the brake pedal (automatic gearbox):

Conditions M/AA

Misting forms on the windows. M + A

The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the preset valuesB.

M + A

The outside temperature falls below freezing point or exceeds approx. 30 C.

M + A

There is a temporarily high current take-off or starter battery capacity drops below the lowest permissi- ble level.

M + A

Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.

M + A

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 283

Conditions M/AA

The car starts to roll - faster than the equivalent normal walking pace.

M

The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with the gear selector in D or N position.

A

Steering wheel movements. A

The gear selector is moved from the D position to "+/-" or R.

A

The drivers door is opened with the gear selector in D position.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. B Car with ECC.

WARNING

Do not open the bonnet when the engine has stopped automatically - the engine may suddenly start automatically. First switch off the engine as normal using the START/STOP ENGINE button before opening the bonnet.

Related information Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.

280)

Starting the engine (p. 268)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 283)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 281)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 286)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 353)

Start/Stop* (p. 279)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start and Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. The engine does not always auto-start after having auto- stopped.

In the following cases the engine does not auto-start after having auto-stopped:

Conditions M/ AA

A gear is engaged without declutching - a display text prompts the driver to set the gear lever in neutral position in order to enable automatic starting.

M

The driver is unrestrained, the gear selector is in P position and the drivers door is open - a normal engine start must take place.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 279)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 280)

Starting the engine (p. 268)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 284)

08 Starting and driving

08

284 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 281)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 286)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 353)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start and Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. In the event that a start-up fails and the engine stops, pro- ceed in accordance with the below:

1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine starts automatically.

2. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in neutral position. The combined instrument panel then shows the text Put gear in neutral.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 279)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 280)

Starting the engine (p. 268)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 283)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 281)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 286)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 353)

Start/Stop* - settings Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start and Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. The car's MY CAR (p. 104) menu system contains an intro- duction of Volvo's Start-Stop system, as well as recommendations for energy-saving driv- ing techniques.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 279)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 280)

Starting the engine (p. 268)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 283)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 285

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 281)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 286)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 353)

08 Starting and driving

08

286 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages The Start/Stop function can show text mes- sages on the information display.

Text message In combination with this indicator lamp the Start/Stop function may display text messages in the com-

bined instrument panel for certain situations.

For some of them there is a recommended action that should be performed. The follow- ing table shows some examples.

Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA

Engine in Auto Start Illuminates for a few seconds after Start/Stop has been activated. M + A

Eco DRIVe OFF Illuminates for a few seconds after Start/Stop has been switched off. M + A

Auto Start/Stop Service required

Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.

M + A

Engine management system An automatic function check is carried out. M + A

Autostart Engine running + acoustic signal

Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine. M + A

Engine in Auto Start The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed.

M

Press Start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.

M

Depress clutch pedal to start

The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed. M

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 287

Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA

Depress brake pedal to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake pedal to be depressed. M

Press brake and clutch to start

The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed. M

Put gear in neutral to start Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position. M

Engine in Auto Start The engine is ready to start automatically - waiting for the brake pedal to be released. A

Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.

A

Press Start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button and the gear selector in P or N.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

If a message does not go out following com- pletion of the action then a workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 279)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 280)

Starting the engine (p. 268)

Start/Stop* - settings (p. 284)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 283)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 282)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 281)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox (p. 284)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 353)

08 Starting and driving

08

288 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

All Wheel Drive (AWD)* All Wheel Drive (AWD All Wheel Drive) means that the car is driven by all four wheels. All-wheel drive is always engaged.

AWD principle13.

The power is automatically distributed between the front and rear wheels. An elec- tronically controlled clutch system distributes the power to the wheels that have the best grip on the current road surface. This pro- vides the best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels.

All-wheel drive improves driving safety in rain, snow and icy conditions.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) HDC can be compared to an automatic engine brake. When you release the accelera- tor on downhill gradients the car is normally braked by means of the engine striving for low engine idling speeds, so-called engine brak- ing. But the steeper the road and the more load there is in the car, the faster the car rolls despite engine braking. In order to then reduce speed the driver has to assist using the footbrake.

General The function makes it possible to increase/ reduce speed on steep downhill gradients, with a foot only on the accelerator pedal, without using the footbrake. The sensitivity of the accelerator pedal decreases and becomes more precise by means of the full actuation of the pedal being restricted to adjusting engine speed within a limited range. The brake system brakes itself and provides the car with a low and even speed, so allow- ing the driver to fully focus on steering.

HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients with an uneven road surface and slippery sections. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailer from a ramp.

WARNING

HDC does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Function

HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switch on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the button illuminates when the func- tion is switched on.

When HDC is working normally the combined instrument panel's symbol

illuminates combined with the text message Hill descent control ON.

13 The figure is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 289

The function only operates in first gear posi- tion and in reverse gear. For an automatic gearbox, gear position 1 must be selected, which is shown with the figure 1 in the com- bined instrument panel; see Automatic gear- box - Geartronic* (p. 273).

NOTE

HDC cannot be activated on an automatic gearbox in position D.

Operation HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of 10 km/h forwards with engine braking and 7 km/h backwards. However, any speed within the gear's speed register can be selected using the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released, the car is braked quickly to 10 or 7 km/h respectively, irrespective of the hill's gradient and without the need for the footbrake.

The brake lights come on automatically when the function is operating. The driver can brake or stop the car at any time by using the foot- brake.

HDC is deactivated:

with the on/off button on the centre con- sole

if a gear higher than 1 is selected on a manual gearbox

if a gear higher than 1 is selected on an automatic gearbox, or if the gear selector is moved to position D.

The function can be disengaged at any time. If it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then the braking effect will not release directly, but slowly instead.

NOTE

With HDC activated you may experience a delay between acceleration pedal activa- tion and engine response.

Foot brake The foot brake is used to reduce the car's speed while driving.

The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If one brake circuit is damaged then this will mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level and harder pressure on the pedal is nee- ded to produce the normal braking effect.

The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo.

WARNING

The brake servo only works when the engine is running.

If the brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force must be used to brake the car.

In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up.

For more general information on heavy loads on the car, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 446).

Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs may result in delayed brake function. This

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

290

delay is minimised by cleaning the brake lin- ings.

Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road surfaces, prior to long-stay parking and after the car has been washed. Carry this out by braking gently during a short period while en route.

Maintenance To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- ble, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Book- let.

IMPORTANT

The wear on the brake system's compo- nents must be checked regularly.

Contact a workshop for information about the procedure or engage a workshop to carry out the inspection - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification

Constant glow Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss.

Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started - automatic function check.

WARNING

If and illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake sys- tem.

If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake sys- tem checked - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- ther before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

Related information Parking brake (p. 292)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 291)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 291)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 291)

08 Starting and driving

08

291

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), prevents the wheels from locking up during braking.

The function allows steering ability to be maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal.

A short test of the ABS system is made auto- matically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the ABS system may be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The test may be experienced as pulses in the brake pedal.

Related information Foot brake (p. 289)

Parking brake (p. 292)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 291)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 291)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about sudden braking. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow.

Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is working and/or in the event of sudden brak- ing. After the car's speed has been slowed below 10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to the normal constant glow - while at the same time the Hazard warning flashers are activated, and they flash until the driver accelerates the car to at least 20 km/h or they are deactivated with their button.

Related information Foot brake (p. 289)

Parking brake (p. 292)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 291)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 291)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking force and so reduce the braking distance.

EBA detects the driver's braking style and increases the braking force when necessary. The brake force can be reinforced up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as neces- sary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.

Related information Foot brake (p. 289)

Parking brake (p. 292)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 291)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 291)

08 Starting and driving

08

292

Parking brake The parking brake holds the car stationary, when the driver's seat is empty, by mechani- cally locking/blocking two wheels.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has automatic transmis- sion, is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.

Combined instrument panel warning symbol.

Applying the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Pull the lever firmly. > The combined instrument panel warn-

ing symbol comes on.

NOTE

- The combined instrument panel's warning symbol illuminates regardless of whether the parking brake is applied slightly or fully.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position.

4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brake lever must be applied at least a lit- tle more firmly.

When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).

Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill:

Turn the wheels away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill:

Turn the wheels towards the kerb.

Disengaging the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Pull the lever up slightly, press the button, release the lever and release the button. > The combined instrument panel warn-

ing symbol goes off.

If the driver forgets to release the parking brake in addition to the illuminated warning lamp a pinging sound combined with a message in the combined instrument panel alerts the driver of this when the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h.

Related information Foot brake (p. 289)

08 Starting and driving

08

293

Driving in water Fording means that the car is driven through a water-covered roadway. Fording must be car- ried out with great caution.

The car can be driven through water at a maximum depth of 30 cm at a maximum speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water.

During driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.

Clean the electric contacts of the electric engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.

Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time - this could cause electrical malfunctions.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.

In depths greater than 30 cm, water could enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems.

In the event of the engine stalling in water, do not try restart - tow the car from the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.

Related information Recovery (p. 310)

Towing (p. 308)

Overheating Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat - in particular with a heavy load.

For information about overheating when driv- ing with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer (p. 301).

Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates.

If the temperature in the engine's cooling system is too high then a warning symbol is illuminated and a text message High engine temp Stop safely is shown in the combined instrument panel's information display - stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes in order to cool down.

If the text message High engine temp Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop engine is shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car.

In the event of overheating in the gearbox a built-in protection function is activated, which is indicated in the combined instru- ment panel with a warning symbol and the text message Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely - follow the recommendation given and lower the speed and stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for a few minutes in order to allow the gearbox to cool down.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

294

If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.

Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off.

Related information Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox (p.

302)

Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox (p. 302)

Driving with open tailgate When driving with the tailgate open, toxic exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car through the cargo area.

WARNING

Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area.

Related information Loading (p. 152)

Overload - starter battery The electrical functions in the car load the starter battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the key position II when the engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode - which uses less power, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use func- tions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off. Examples of such functions are:

ventilation fan

headlamps

windscreen wiper

audio system (high volume).

If the battery voltage is low the information display shows the text Low battery Power save mode. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces cer- tain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.

In which case, charge the starter battery by starting the engine and then running it for at least 15 minutes - battery charging is more effective during driving than run- ning the engine at idling speed while sta- tionary.

Related information Starter battery (p. 351)

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 295

Before a long journey Before a long journey, it makes good sense to go through the following points:

Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption (p. 454) is nor- mal.

Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid).

Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.

Carrying a warning triangle (p. 323) is a legal requirement in certain countries.

Related information Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 337)

Spare wheel* (p. 317)

Lamp replacement (p. 342)

Winter driving For winter driving it is important to perform certain checks in order to ensure that the car can be driven safely.

To bear in mind: Check the following in particular before the cold season:

The engine coolant (p. 449) must contain at least 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost erosion down to approximately 35 C. To achieve opti- mum antifreeze protection, different types of glycol must not be mixed.

The fuel tank must be kept filled to pre- vent condensation.

Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star- ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. For more information on suitable oils, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 446).

IMPORTANT

Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.

The condition of the battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather

places great demands on the battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.

Use washer fluid (p. 351) to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.

To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec- ommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice.

NOTE

The use of winter tyres is a legal require- ment in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries.

Slippery driving conditions Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.

08 Starting and driving

08

296

Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as follows:

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

Open the fuel filler flap by slightly press- ing in the rear part of the hatch.

Take out the flap.

Close the flap after fuelling.

For a description of locking and unlocking the fuel filler flap, see Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap (p. 178). The fuel filler flap's lock logic also follows Keyless drive and the lock- ing and unlocking of the central locking.

Related information Filling up with fuel (p. 296)

Fuel filler flap - manual opening The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when it cannot be opened from outside.

Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo area (same side as fuel filler flap).

Carefully pull the line back in a straight line. The flap can now be opened from outside.

IMPORTANT

Pull the wire gently - minimal force is required to disengage the hatch lock.

Related information Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap (p. 178)

Filling up with fuel (p. 296)

Filling up with fuel The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler system. Filling is carried out as follows:

Open the fuel filler flap (p. 296). See also Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 296).

Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler opening. Take care to insert the nozzle properly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe consists of two opening covers. The noz- zle must be pushed past both covers before refuelling is started.

Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out.

NOTE

Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

08 Starting and driving

08

297

NOTE

Avoid spilling by waiting approximately 5-8 seconds before carefully removing the nozzle once refuelling is complete.

Related information Filling with fuel - with a fuel can (p. 299)

Fuel - handling Fuel of a lower quality than that recom- mended by Volvo must not be used as engine power and fuel consumption is negatively affected.

WARNING

Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and fuel splashing in the eyes.

In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swal- lowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.

WARNING

Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

IMPORTANT

Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels which are not recommended will invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any sup- plementary service agreements; this is applicable to all engines.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.

Related information Economical driving (p. 300)

Economical driving (p. 300)

08 Starting and driving

08

298

Fuel - petrol Petrol is used as fuel.

Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Most engines can be run with octane ratings of 95 and 98 RON. Only in exceptional cases should 91 RON be used.

95 RON can be used for normal driving.

98 RON is recommended for optimum performance and minimum fuel consump- tion.

When driving in temperatures above +38 C, fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.

IMPORTANT

Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter.

Do not use any additives which have not been recommended by Volvo.

Related information Economical driving (p. 300)

Fuel - handling (p. 297)

Filling up with fuel (p. 296)

Fuel - diesel Diesel is used as fuel.

Only use diesel fuel from well-known produc- ers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Die- sel should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur particles for exam- ple.

At low temperatures (-6 C to -40 C), a par- affin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel fuel designed for low temperatures around freezing point is available from the major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous at low temperatures and reduces the risk of paraffin precipitate.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter- gent and water.

IMPORTANT

Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard.

The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels that must not be used:

Special additives

Marine diesel fuel

Heating oil

FAME14 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and vegetable oil.

These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.

Empty tank The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the workshop in order to restart the engine after fuelling.

Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Do this before starting the engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel:

1. Insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch and push it in to the end posi- tion, see Key positions (p. 71).

2. Press the START button without depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.

14 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.

08 Starting and driving

08

299

3. Wait approx. 1 minute. 4. To start the engine: Depress the brake

and/or clutch pedal and then press the START button again.

NOTE

Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage:

Stop the car on as flat/level ground as possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.

Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine operation.

The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel, see Volvo service programme (p. 332).

IMPORTANT

Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.

Related information Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 299)

Fuel - handling (p. 297)

Economical driving (p. 300)

Filling with fuel - with a fuel can When filling with fuel (p. 296) from a fuel can, use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

Take care to insert the funnel properly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe consists of two opening covers. The funnel must be pushed past both covers before filling is started.

Related information Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap (p. 178)

Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 296)

Diesel particle filter (DPF) Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, which results in more efficient emission con- trol.

The particles in the exhaust gases are collec- ted in the filter during normal driving. So- called "regeneration" is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter. This requires the engine to have reached nor- mal operating temperature.

Filter regeneration takes place automatically and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly dur- ing regeneration.

Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has become approximately 80% full of particles, a yellow warning triangle is shown in the combined instrument panel, and the message Soot filter full See manual is shown in the information display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating temperature, preferably on a main road or

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

300 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

motorway. The car should then be driven for approximately 20 minutes more.

NOTE

The following may arise during regenera- tion:

a smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily

fuel consumption may increase tem- porarily

a smell of burning may arise.

When regeneration is complete the warning text is cleared automatically.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that the engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.

IMPORTANT

If the filter is completely filled with parti- cles, it may be difficult to start the engine and the filter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that the filter will need to be replaced.

Related information Fuel - diesel (p. 298)

Economical driving (p. 300)

Economical driving Driving economically means driving smoothly while thinking ahead and adjusting your driv- ing style and speed to the prevailing condi- tions.

Avoid driving with open windows.

Do not use winter tyres when the winter season is over.

Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration and heavy braking.

Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check it regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 457).

Drive in the highest gear possible, adap- ted to the current traffic situation and road - lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption. Use the gear shift indi- cator (p. 272)15.

Remove unnecessary items from the car - the greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.

Use engine braking to slow down, when it can take place without risk to other road users.

Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump- tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.

A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption

- remove the load carriers when not in use.

Do not run the engine to operating tem- perature at idling speed, but rather drive with a light load as soon as possible - a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.

High speed results in increased fuel con- sumption - the wind resistance increases with speed.

For more information, see Volvo Cars' envi- ronmental philosophy (p. 20) and Fuel con- sumption and CO2 emissions (p. 454).

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates impor- tant systems such as the power steering and brake servo.

15 Manual gearbox

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 301

Driving with a trailer When driving with a trailer there are a number of important points to think about regarding e.g. the towing bracket, the trailer and how the load is positioned in the trailer.

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by corresponding weights (p. 441).

If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then the car is delivered with the necessary equipment for driving with a trailer.

The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.

If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.

Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket com- plies with the specified maximum towball load.

Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended air pressure (p. 322) for a full load.

The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.

Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.

The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes.

Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.

For safety reasons, the maximum permit- ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights.

Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12 %.

Trailer cable An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin connector. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.

Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indi- cators are broken, the symbol for direction indicators in the combined instrument panel flashes faster than normal and the information display shows the text Bulb fail - Ind. signal trailer.

If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp trailer text is shown.

Level control* The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective of the car's load (up to the

maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal.

Trailer weights For information on Volvo's permitted trailer weights, see Towing capacity and towball load (p. 442).

NOTE

The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. The maximum permitted speed for a car with a trailer attached is 100 km/h. National vehi- cle regulations may further restrict the trailer weight and speed. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.

Related information Towing bracket (p. 303)

Lamp replacement (p. 342)

08 Starting and driving

08

302 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox When driving with a trailer (p. 301) in hilly ter- rain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.

Do not run the engine at higher revolu- tions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature may become too high.

Diesel engine 5-cyl In the event of a risk of overheating the

optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000 rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant.

Related information Manual gearbox (p. 272)

Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.

An automatic gearbox selects the opti- mum gear related to load and engine speed.

In the event of overheating, a warning symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel and a text message is shown in the information display - follow the recommendation given.

Steep inclines Do not lock the automatic transmission in

a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revo- lutions.

IMPORTANT

See also the specific information on slow driving with a trailer for cars with automatic gearbox - Powershift (p. 276).

Parking on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Activate the parking brake.

3. Move the gear selector to position P.

4. Release the foot brake.

Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake.

Block the wheels with chocks when park- ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

Starting on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Move the gear selector to driving posi- tion D.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.

Related information Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 273)

Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 276)

08 Starting and driving

08

303

Towing bracket A towing bracket means that it is possible to e.g. tow a trailer behind the car.

If the car is equipped with a detachable tow- bar, the installation instructions for the loose section must be followed carefully, see Detachable towbar - attachment/removal (p. 304).

WARNING

If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:

Follow the installation instructions carefully.

The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off.

Check that the indicator window shows green.

Important checks The towbar's towball must be cleaned

and greased regularly.

WARNING

The moving parts of the detachable towbar must not be lubricated/oiled. This may reduce safety.

NOTE

When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated.

Related information Driving with a trailer (p. 301)

Detachable towbar - specifications (p. 304)

Detachable towbar - storage (p. 303)

Detachable towbar - storage Store the detachable towbar in the cargo area.

The storage location for the removable towbar.

IMPORTANT

Always remove the detachable towbar after use and store it in the designated location in the car.

Related information Detachable towbar - specifications (p.

304)

Detachable towbar - attachment/removal (p. 304)

Driving with a trailer (p. 301)

08 Starting and driving

08

304

Detachable towbar - specifications Specifications for detachable towbar.

G 0 2 1 4 8 5

Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

A 887

B 73

C 881

D 441

E 109

F 306

G Side member

H Ball centre

Related information Detachable towbar - attachment/removal

(p. 304)

Detachable towbar - storage (p. 303)

Driving with a trailer (p. 301)

Detachable towbar - attachment/ removal The attachment/removal of the detachable towbar is performed in the following way:

Attaching

Remove the protective cover by first pressing in the catch and then pulling the cover straight back .

G 0 2 1 4 8 7

Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clockwise.

08 Starting and driving

08

}} 305

G 0 2 1 4 8 8

The indicator window must show red.

G 0 2 1 4 8 9

Insert the towball section until you hear a click.

G 0 2 1 4 9 0

The indicator window must show green.

G 0 0 0 0 0 0

Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position. Remove the key from the lock.

G 0 2 1 4 9 4

Check that the towball section is secure by pulling it up, down and back.

WARNING

If the towball is not fitted correctly then it must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towball hitch, the remainder of the towbar must be clean and dry.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

306

G 0 2 1 4 9 5

Safety cable.

WARNING

Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable in the intended bracket.

Removal of detachable towbar

Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the unlocked position.

Push in the locking wheel and turn it anticlockwise until you hear a click.

Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towball rearward and upward.

WARNING

Secure the detachable towbar safely if it is stored in the car, see Detachable towbar - storage (p. 303).

Push the protective cover until it snaps tight.

Related information Detachable towbar - storage (p. 303)

Detachable towbar - specifications (p. 304)

Driving with a trailer (p. 301)

08 Starting and driving

08

307

Trailer Stability Assist - TSA The trailer stability assist TSA (Trailer Stability Assist) function is to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake.

The TSA function is part of the DSTC system (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), see Stability and traction control system (DSTC) (p. 185).

Function The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds (70-90 km/h) if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.

In order for snaking to occur, there must be a triggering factor, e.g.:

Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind.

Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole.

Sweeping steering wheel movements.

Operation If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress. This makes the car/trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could, for example, end up in the wrong lane or leave the car- riageway.

TSA system continually monitors car move- ments, particularly lateral movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are indi- vidually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car.

If snaking is not eliminated the first time the TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is once again stable, the TSA system stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car.

Miscellaneous The TSA system can engage within the speed interval 65-160 km/h.

NOTE

TSA function is switched off if the driver selects Sport mode, see Stability and traction control system (DSTC) (p. 185).

TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situa- tion the TSA system cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.

The DSTC symbol in the combined instrument panel flashes when the

TSA system is working.

Related information Stability and traction control system

(DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 187)

Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - operation (p. 186)

08 Starting and driving

08

308

Towing During towing, one vehicle is towed by another vehicle using a tow rope.

Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before towing begins.

1. Unlock the steering lock (p. 270) by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch and giving a long press on the START/STOP ENGINE button - key position (p. 71) II is activated.

2. The remote control key must remain in the ignition switch while the car is being towed.

3. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal - thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.

4. Be prepared to brake to stop.

WARNING

Check that the steering lock is unlocked before towing.

The remote control key must be in key position II - in position I all airbags are deactivated.

Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when the car is being towed.

WARNING

The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off - the brake pedal needs to be depressed about 5 times more heavily and the steer- ing is considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearbox Prior to towing:

Move gear lever into neutral and release the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Geartronic

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

Do not tow cars with automatic trans- mission at speeds higher than 80 km/h or for distances in excess of 80 km. Follow the speeds that are permitted in accordance with local traffic regula- tions.

Prior to towing:

Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Powershift The model with Powershift transmission should not be towed as it is dependent on the engine running in order to receive sufficient

lubrication. If towing still has to take place, the route must be as short as possible and then with very low speed.

In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift trans- mission, this can be verified by checking the type designation (p. 438) on the transmis- sion's label under the bonnet. The designa- tion MPS6 means that it is Powershift transmission otherwise it is Geartronic auto- matic transmission.

IMPORTANT

Avoid towing.

However, the car can be towed for a short distance at low speed to move it from a dangerous position - not further than 10 km and not faster than 10 km/h. Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels roll- ing forward.

In the event of moving a longer dis- tance than 10 km, the car must be transported with the drive wheels raised from the road - professional recovery is recommended.

Prior to towing:

Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.

08 Starting and driving

08

309

Jump starting Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. Use a donor battery if the battery is dis- charged and the engine does not start, see Jump starting (p. 270).

IMPORTANT

The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the engine.

Related information Towing eye (p. 309)

Towing eye The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear.

Attaching the towing eye

Take out the towing eye that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

NOTE

To access the towing eye/wheel wrench in the foam block:

Version 1: Lift the emergency puncture repair kit compressor unit (point 5) to access the wheel wrench. Lift out the bottle of sealant (point 6) to access the towing eye.

Version 2: Lift the emergency puncture repair kit compressor unit (point 5) to access the towing eye. The wheel wrench is located underneath the jack.

|| 08 Starting and driving

08

310

The cover for the towing eye's attach- ment point is available in two variants which must be opened in the following way:

Open the rear bumper's recess using a coin or similar inserted in the recess, carefully turning it outwards. Then turn out the cover completely and remove it.

The front bumper's recess has a mark- ing along one side or in a corner: Press the marking with a finger and fold out the opposite side/corner at the same time - the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed.

Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the wheel wrench.

The towing eye is unscrewed after use. Place the towing eye back in its position.

Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

Related information Towing (p. 308)

Recovery (p. 310)

Recovery Recovery means that the vehicle is transpor- ted away by means of another vehicle.

Call a recovery service for recovery assis- tance.

The towing eye may be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed plat- form. The car's position and ground clear- ance determine whether it is possible. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be dam- aged if you try to pull it up using the towing eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehi- cle's lifting device if necessary.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be transpor- ted with the wheels rolling forward.

An all-wheel drive car (AWD) with raised front suspension must not be towed at speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be towed further than 50 km.

Related information Towing (p. 308)

WHEELS AND TYRES

09 Wheels and tyres

09

312

Tyres - direction of rotation Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow.

G 0 2 1 7 7 8

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).

NOTE

Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension, and also the same make.

Follow the recommended tyre pressure (p. 322) specified in the tyre pressure table.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 316)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 317)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 312)

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 314)

Tyres - maintenance Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is to provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear.

Driving characteristics Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs.

Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indi- cate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.

09 Wheels and tyres

09

313

New tyres

Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the fric- tion capacity/characteristics gradually deteri- orate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manu- facture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the figure was manufactured in week 15 of 2010.

Summer and winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right.

Wear and maintenance Correct tyre pressure (p. 322) results in more even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, cli- mate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns (p. 314) arising, the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable dis- tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km and then at 10000 km intervals. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, the least worn tyres must always be placed on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to cor- rect than oversteer, and leads to the car con- tinuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels.

Wheels must be stored lying down or hanging up - never standing up.

WARNING

A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 316)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 317)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 312)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

314 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tyres - tread wear indicators A tread wear indicator shows the status of the tyre's tread.

G 0 2 1 8 2 9

Tread wear indicators.

Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.

Related information Tyres - speed ratings (p. 317)

Tyres - air pressure (p. 322)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 312)

Wheel bolts Wheel bolts are used to fasten the wheels at the hubs and are available in different ver- sions.

Low wheel bolt

High wheel bolt

Locking wheel bolts

Tightening torque Type 1 wheel bolt (steel rim): 110 Nm

Type 2 wheel bolt (aluminium rim): 130 Nm

Type 3 Lockable wheel bolt (steel/ aluminium rim): 110 Nm

Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine acces- sories. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

Locking wheel bolts* Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu- minium and steel rims. Under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lock- able wheel bolts.

Related information Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 316)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 315

Jack A jack is used to raise the car, e.g. when changing the tyres.

The original jack should only be used for changing to the spare wheel. The jack's thread must always be well greased.

Related information Warning triangle (p. 323)

Emergency puncture repair* (p. 324)

Winter tyres Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for winter road conditions.

Winter tyres Volvo recommends winter tyres with particu- lar dimensions. Tyre dimensions are depend- ent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.

Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe- cially the studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem- peratures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than4 mm.

Using snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

WARNING

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an acci- dent.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.

319)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

316

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in accordance with the examples in the table below.

Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen- sions, for example: 7Jx16x50.

7 Rim width in inches

J Rim flange profile

16 Rim diameter in inches

50 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel centre to wheel contact surface against the hub)

Related information Wheel bolts (p. 314)

Tyres - dimensions The car's wheels, tyres and rims have a cer- tain dimension, see the examples in the table below.

The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Example of designation:215/55R16 97W.

205 Tyre width (mm)

50 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%)

R Radial ply

17 Rim diameter in inches (")

93 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, load index (p. 316) (LI)

W Speed rating for maximum permitted speed, speed rating (p. 317) (SS). (In this case 270 km/h).

Related information Tyres - air pressure (p. 322)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 312)

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 314)

Tyres - load index Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a certain load.

Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight deter- mines the load capacity required of the tyres.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 316)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 317)

Tyres - air pressure (p. 322)

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 314)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317

Tyres - speed ratings Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed and therefore belongs to a particular speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol).

Tyre speed class must at least correspond with the car's top speed. Minimum speed rat- ing is indicated in the speed rating table below. The only exception to these conditions is winter tyres (p. 315) (both those with metal studs and those without), where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h). Traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.

NOTE

The maximum permitted speed is speci- fied in the table.

Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)

T 190 km/h

H 210 km/h

V 240 km/h

W 270 km/h

Y 300 km/h

WARNING

The car must be fitted with tyres which have the same or a higher load index (p. 316) (LI) and speed rating (SS) than speci- fied. If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 316)

Tyres - air pressure (p. 322)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 312)

Spare wheel* A spare wheel (Temporary spare) is used to temporarily replace a punctured normal wheel.

A spare wheel is only intended for use tempo- rarily and must be replaced by an normal wheel as soon as possible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of a spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all- wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table, Tyres - air pressure (p. 322).

IMPORTANT

Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare wheel on the car.

The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.

319)

Changing wheels - fitting the spare wheel* (p. 320)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

318 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Changing wheels - taking out the spare wheel* (p. 318)

Jack (p. 315)

Warning triangle (p. 323)

Wheel bolts (p. 314)

Changing wheels - taking out the spare wheel* The spare wheel* plus jack* and wheel wrench* are stored under the floor in the cargo area.

1. Lift the rear edge of the luggage compart- ment floor (or on models with a jointed luggage compartment floor, take hold of the luggage compartment floor handle, lift and move the rear part of the floor for- wards).

2. Lift out the storage compartment* (only models with a jointed cargo area floor).

3. Lift out the lower floor (models with a join- ted luggage compartment floor only).

4. Undo the attaching screw and lift out the foam block containing the jack and tools.

5. Take hold of the far end of the spare wheel, then lift. Push the spare wheel for- wards slightly and lift it out of the storage compartment.

6. Remove the wheel wrench, the jack and the towing eye from the foam block.

NOTE

The jack must be lifted out in order to access the towing eye.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.

319)

Changing wheels - fitting the spare wheel* (p. 320)

Jack (p. 315)

Spare wheel* (p. 317)

Warning triangle (p. 323)

Wheel bolts (p. 314)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 319

Changing wheels - removing wheels The car's wheels can be changed for e.g. win- ter wheels/winter tyres.

Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal surface.

1. Apply the parking brake and engage reverse gear, or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox.

WARNING

Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label.

The decal also indicates the jack's maxi- mum lift capacity at a specified lifting height.

2. Take out the wheel to be fitted (summer tyre, winter tyre or spare wheel) as well as the tools. If it is a spare wheel being fitted then there is a package in its location containing gloves and a plastic bag for the punctured wheel.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones for example.

4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel covers. Use the removal tool to hook in and pull off any full-wheel wheel covers. Alternatively, the wheel covers can be pulled away by hand.

5. Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench* until the stop position as shown in the following illustration.

The wheel wrench and towing eye.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye must be screwed into all threads in the wheel bolt wrench.

6. Loosen the wheel bolts -1 turn anti- clockwise with the wheel wrench.

|| 09 Wheels and tyres

09

320 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.

7. There are two jacking points on each side of the car.

IMPORTANT

The ground under the jack must be firm, smooth and level.

8. Wind up the jack so that the flange in the bodywork ends up in the notch in the head of the jack.

9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.

Park the car such that passengers have the car, or ideally a crash barrier, between themselves and the roadway.

NOTE

The car's regular jack is designed only for use occasionally and for a short time, such as when changing a wheel with a punc- tured tyre, switching between summer tyres and winter tyres, etc. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment.

Related information Changing wheels - fitting the spare

wheel* (p. 320)

Changing wheels - taking out the spare wheel* (p. 318)

Jack (p. 315)

Spare wheel* (p. 317)

Warning triangle (p. 323)

Wheel bolts (p. 314)

Changing wheels - fitting the spare wheel* It is important that the procedure for fitting the spare wheel is carried out correctly.

Fitting 1. Clean the contact surfaces between

wheel and hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly.

3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate.

4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is important that the wheel bolts are tight- ened with the correct tightening torque. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

09 Wheels and tyres

09

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 321

5.

Refit any full wheel covers.

NOTE

The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be positioned over the valve on the wheel rim during fitting.

Putting back the jack* and tools

The tools and jack must be returned to their correct places in the foam block after use.

1. Unscrew the towing eye from the wheel bolt wrench.

2. Put back any tools that have been used in the relevant compartments in the foam block in the following order:

towing eye/funnel/torx wrench/socket for locking wheel bolts/tool for wheel covers

jack (must be cranked to the correct height so that it fits into the foam block's compartment, the handle above the foot and down in the groove in the foam block)

socket wrench (above the jack).

3. If the spare wheel has been used, then the punctured wheel can be placed in the plastic bag contained in the package with the gloves. Place the foam block back in the storage compartment and tighten the mounting screw to the floor of the storage compartment.

If the spare wheel has not been used, place the foam block in the spare wheel and place the spare wheel back in the storage compartment. Tighten the attach- ing screw to the floor of the storage com- partment.

4. Return the detachable towbar.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

IMPORTANT

The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.

|| 09 Wheels and tyres

09

322 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information Changing wheels - taking out the spare

wheel* (p. 318)

Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 319)

Jack (p. 315)

Spare wheel* (p. 317)

Warning triangle (p. 323)

Wheel bolts (p. 314)

Tyres - air pressure Tyres can have different air pressures which are measured in bar.

Check the air pressure in the tyres The air pressure (p. 457) for the tyres must be checked every month. Check air pressure with cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature. After several few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases. Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel consumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and steering characteris- tics.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.

Tyre pressure label

G 0 2 1 8 3 0

The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between front and rear door) shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions. This is also specified in the tyre pressure table.

Tyre pressures for the car's recom- mended tyre dimension (p. 316)

ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy (p. 300)

NOTE

Temperature differences change the tyre pressure.

Fuel economy, ECO pressure In order to obtain optimum fuel economy at speeds below 160 km/h an ECO pressure is recommended (applies to both full and light load - see the tyre pressure table (p. 457)).

09 Wheels and tyres

09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 323

Related information Tyres - speed ratings (p. 317)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 312)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 312)

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 314)

Warning triangle The warning triangle is used to warn other road users of a stationary vehicle.

Storage and folding up

Lift the floor hatch (or push the rear part of the luggage compartment floor for- wards in models with a jointed floor and then lift the lower floor) and remove the warning triangle.

Take the warning triangle from the case, fold out and assemble the two loose sides.

Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.

Follow the regulations for the use of a warn- ing triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use.

Related information Spare wheel* (p. 317)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

324 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

First aid kit* The first aid box contains first aid equipment.

A case containing first aid equipment is located on the left-hand side of the cargo area.

Emergency puncture repair* Emergency puncture repair, the emergency puncture repair kit* (TMK - Temporary Mobi- lity Kit), is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the air pressure.

The emergency puncture repair kit consists of a compressor and a bottle of sealant. The sealing works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before its expiration date and after use. The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emer- gency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits, cracks or similar damage. Connect the compressor to one of the car's 12 V sockets. Choose the socket that is nearest to the punctured tyre.

NOTE

The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* - operation

(p. 326)

Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking (p. 328)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 326)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 325

Emergency puncture repair kit* - location Emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Tempo- rary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the air pressure.

Location of the emergency puncture repair kit

Version 1.

Version 2.

Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location. The warning triangle and emergency puncture repair kit are located under the floor in the cargo area.

1. Lift the rear edge of the luggage compart- ment floor (or on models with a jointed luggage compartment floor, take hold of the luggage compartment floor handle, lift and move the rear part of the floor for- wards).

2. Lift out the storage compartment (optional extra) - models with a jointed luggage compartment floor only.

3. Lift out the lower floor (models with a join- ted luggage compartment floor only).

4. Unhook the elastic part of the belt over the TMK compressor unit on the left side.

5. Lift the TMK compressor unit straight up.

6. To access the bottle of sealant, it must be pushed to the left until it can be lifted out of the foam block.

NOTE

To access the towing eye/wheel wrench in the foam block:

Version 1: Lift the emergency punc- ture repair kit compressor unit (point 5) to access the wheel wrench. Lift out the bottle of sealant (point 6) to access the towing eye.

Version 2: Lift the emergency punc- ture repair kit compressor unit (point 5) to access the towing eye. The wheel wrench is located underneath the jack.

After use, hook the belt back onto the left side.

Version 1: The belt must be pulled behind the foam block (not above).

Version 2: The belt must be in the fork on the rear part of the foam block.

Related information Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview

(p. 326)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant (p. 330)

Emergency puncture repair* (p. 324)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

326 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview Emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Tempo- rary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the air pressure.

Label, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

Pressure reducing valve

Air hose

Bottle holder with sealant

Pressure gauge

Related information Emergency puncture repair kit* - location

(p. 325)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant (p. 330)

Emergency puncture repair* (p. 324)

Emergency puncture repair* - stowing components (p. 330)

Emergency puncture repair* - operation Emergency puncture repair, the emergency puncture repair kit* (TMK - Temporary Mobi- lity Kit), is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the air pressure.

Emergency puncture repair

For information on the function of the parts, see Emergency puncture repair kit.

09 Wheels and tyres

09

}} 327

1. Detach the label for maximum permitted speed (which is fitted on one side of the compressor) and affix it to the steering wheel.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

WARNING

The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.

2. Check that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and the air hose.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in.

3. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle's stopper.

4. Screw the bottle into its holder.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

6. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and start the car.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

7. Flick the switch to position I.

WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contact- ing an authorised tyre centre is recom- mended.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.

8. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

|| 09 Wheels and tyres

09

328 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

9. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Mini- mum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.

10. Switch off the compressor and unplug the cable from the 12 V socket.

11. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit the valve cap.

12. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 324)

Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking (p. 328)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 326)

Emergency puncture repair* - stowing components (p. 330)

Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking Emergency puncture repair (p. 324), in which the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 326)* (TMK - Temporary Mobility Kit), is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the air pres- sure.

Check tyre pressure 1. Connect the tyre sealing equipment

again.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.

If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.

If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table (p. 457) (1 bar = 100 kPa). Release air using the pres- sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

3. Make sure the compressor is switched off. Detach the air hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.

4. Fold the hose into the box and leave the bottle where it is. Place TMK in the cargo area.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

09 Wheels and tyres

09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 329

Volvo recommends that you drive to the near- est authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* - operation

(p. 326)

Emergency puncture repair* - stowing components (p. 330)

Inflating tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit* The car's original tyres can be inflated using the compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit.

1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and air hose.

2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V sockets and start the car.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table. (Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and cable.

7. Refit the dust cap.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 324)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 326)

09 Wheels and tyres

09

330 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Emergency puncture repair* - stowing components After using the puncture repair kit, the com- ponents returned to their correct places in the foam block.

Version 1.

The components are fitted in the foam block in the following order:

1. Towing eye/socket wrench 2. Bottle (pressed in from the side) 3. TMK kit 4. Funnel 5. Jack 6. Torx wrench 7. Towbar

Version 2.

The components are fitted in the foam block in the following order:

1. Socket wrench 2. Towing eye 3. Bottle 4. TMK kit 5. Jack

Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 324)

Emergency puncture repair* - operation (p. 326)

Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking (p. 328)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 326)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - sealant The container (bottle) with the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 326) contains sealant and it can be replaced.

Replace the bottle when the expiration date has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ- mentally hazardous waste.

WARNING

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natu- ral rubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 324)

Emergency puncture repair kit* - location (p. 325)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

10 Maintenance and service

10

332

Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- ble, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Related information Climate control system - fault tracing and

repair (p. 341)

10 Maintenance and service

10

}} 333

Raising the car When raising the car it is important that the jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recom- mended by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with the equipment.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

334

Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).

If the car is raised with a front workshop jack then it must be positioned under one of the two lifting points furthest in under the car. If the car is raised with a rear workshop jack then it must be positioned under one of the lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.

If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop lift then the front and rear lifting arms can be positioned under the outer lifting points (jack- ing points). Alternatively, the inner lifting points can be used at the front.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.

319)

10 Maintenance and service

10

335

Bonnet - opening and closing The bonnet can be opened when the handle in the passenger compartment has been turned clockwise and the lock by the grille has been moved to the left.

The handle for bonnet opening is always on the left-hand side.

Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees clockwise. You will hear when the catch releases.

Move the catch to the left and open the bonnet. (The catch hook is located between the headlamp and grille, see illustration.)

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.

Related information Engine compartment - checking (p. 336)

Engine compartment - overview (p. 335)

Engine compartment - overview The overview shows normal checking points.

The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on engine variant.

Coolant expansion tank

Filling washer fluid

Radiator

Engine oil dipstick1

Filling engine oil

Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located on the driver's side)

Starter battery

Relay and fuse box

Air filter

1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

336

WARNING

The ignition system has very high voltage and output. The voltage in the ignition sys- tem is highly dangerous. The car's electri- cal system must always be in key position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in key position II or when the engine is hot.

Related information Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 335)

Engine compartment - checking (p. 336)

Engine compartment - checking Some oils and fluids should be checked at regular intervals.

Regular checking Check the following oils and fluids at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling:

Coolant

Engine oil

Washer fluid

WARNING

Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start automati- cally some after the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

Related information Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 335)

Engine compartment - overview (p. 335)

Coolant - level (p. 340)

Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 337)

Washer fluid - filling (p. 351)

Engine oil - general An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied.

Volvo recommends:

10 Maintenance and service

10

337

When driving under adverse conditions, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 446).

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the combined instrument panel's warning symbol for low oil pressure is used. Other variants have an oil level sensor, when the driver is informed via the instru- ment's warning symbol and display

texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.

Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord- ance with the intervals specified in the Serv- ice and Warranty Booklet.

Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con- ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade; see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 446).

For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 447).

Related information Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 337)

Engine oil - checking and filling Depending on engine variant the oil level is checked with the dipstick or the electronic oil level sensor.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

338

Engine with oil dipstick2

Dipstick and filler pipe.

Checking the oil level in a new car is espe- cially important before the first scheduled oil change.

Volvo recommends checking the oil level every 2 500 km. The most accurate measure- ments are made on a cold engine before star- ting. The measurement will be inaccurate if taken immediately after the engine is switched off. The dipstick will indicate that the level is too low because the oil has not had time to flow down into the oil sump.

G 0 2 1 7 3 7

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

Measurement and filling if required 1. Ensure that the car is level. After switch-

ing off the engine it is important to wait 5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump.

2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.

3. Re-insert the dipstick.

4. Pull it out and check the level.

5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres should be added. If the level is signifi- cantly below, then an additional amount is required.

6. If required, check the level again, do it after driving a short distance. Then repeat steps 1-4.

WARNING

Never fill above the MAX mark. The level should never be above MAX or below MIN as this could lead to engine damage.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani- fold due to the risk of fire.

Engine with electronic oil level sensor3

Filler pipe4.

2 Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel. 3 Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel. 4 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).

10 Maintenance and service

10

339

You do not need to take action with respect to the engine oil level before a message is shown in the combined instrument panel's information display, see following figure.

Message and graph in the display. The left-hand display shows the digital combined instrument panel and the right-hand the analogue.

Message

Engine oil level

On certain cars, the oil level can be checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off.

WARNING

If the message Oil service required is shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may be too high.

IMPORTANT

In the event of the message Oil level low Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres.

NOTE

The oil level is only detected by the system during driving. The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level display is correct.

WARNING

Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) appears as shown in the illustration below. The level must never be above MAX or below MIN, as this could lead to engine damage.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani- fold due to the risk of fire.

Measuring the oil level If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the sequence below.

1. Activate key position II; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch to position Oil level. > You will then see information displayed

about the engine oil level.

The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. The rec- ommended filling level is 4. Message and graph in the display. The left-hand display shows the digital combined instrument panel and the right- hand the analogue.

Related information Engine oil - general (p. 336)

10 Maintenance and service

10

340

Coolant - level The coolant cools the internal combustion engine to the correct operating temperature. The heat that is transferred from the engine to the coolant can be used to heat the passen- ger compartment.

The coolant level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank.

Checking the level and topping up

When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather conditions. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.

WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.

For capacities and for standards regarding water quality; see Coolant - grade and vol- ume (p. 449).

Check the coolant regularly The level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank. If the system is not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.

IMPORTANT

A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.

Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.

Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- ommendations.

When changing coolant/replacing cooling system components, flush the cooling system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready- mixed coolant.

The engine must only be run with a well-filled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.

10 Maintenance and service

10

341

Brake and clutch fluid - level Brake and clutch fluid level should be between the reservoir MIN and MAX marks.

Checking the level Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser- voir. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks that are visible inside the reser- voir. Check the level regularly.

Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service.

For capacities and recommended brake fluid grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume (p. 451). The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, fre- quent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- ther before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo recommends that the reason for the loss of brake fluid is investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Filling

The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.

Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks, which are located on the inside of the reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Do not forget to refit the cap.

Climate control system - fault tracing and repair The air conditioning system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised work- shop.

Troubleshooting and repair The air conditioning system contains fluores- cent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when looking for leaks.

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pres- surised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Related information Volvo service programme (p. 332)

10 Maintenance and service

10

342

Lamp replacement Lamp replacement can be carried out for bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps, please refer to a workshop.

The bulbs are specified (p. 348). The follow- ing list contains locations of bulbs and other light sources that are specialised, such as LED5 lamps, or are unsuitable for changing for some other reason, except at a workshop:

Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon lamps)

Position/parking lamps front6

Daytime running lights6

Side direction indicators, door mirrors6

Approach lighting, door mirrors

Interior and cargo area lighting

Glovebox lighting

Position/parking lamps rear

Side marker lamps, rear

Brake light above the rear windscreen

Number plate lighting.

WARNING

On cars with Xenon headlamps, the replacement of Xenon lamps must be car- ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Working with Xenon lamps demands extreme cau- tion because the headlamp is equipped with a high voltage unit.

WARNING

The cars electrical system must be in key position 0 when replacing bulbs; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 71).

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

NOTE

If an error message remains after the bro- ken bulb has been replaced then we rec- ommend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 348)

Lamp replacement - location of front lamps (p. 343)

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps (p. 346)

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting (p. 348)

5 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 6 Certain variants

10 Maintenance and service

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 343

Lamp replacement - location of front lamps The overview shows the location of the lamps at the front.

Position/parking lamps (p. 345) (LED in Xenon headlamps)

Main beam in Xenon headlamps (p. 344) / Extra main beam in Xenon head- lamps (p. 345)

Dipped beam in halogen headlamps (p. 344) / Xenon lamps in Xenon headlamps (p. 342)

Indicator (p. 345)

Daytime running lights (p. 346) (LED* or bulb depending on variant)

Related information Lamp replacement (p. 342)

Lamps - specifications (p. 348)

Lamp replacement - headlamps All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the engine compartment. First loosen and remove the whole headlamp.

1. Lift out the bonnet stop.

2. Loosen the screw with a Torx tool, size T30.

3. Turn the locking pin anticlockwise.

Pull out the locking pin.

4. Release the headlamp by alternately tilting and pulling it out.

IMPORTANT

Take care when lifting out the headlamp so as not to damage any parts.

5. Press down the catch.

Unplug the connector.

Place the headlamp on a soft surface so as not to scratch the lens.

IMPORTANT

Do not pull the electrical cable, only the connector.

6. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.

The headlamp must be fitted and the contact fitted correctly before switching on the lights or switching key position.

Related information Lamp replacement (p. 342)

Lamp replacement - location of front lamps (p. 343)

Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs (p. 344)

Lamps - specifications (p. 348)

10 Maintenance and service

10

344

Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by releasing the headlamp's larger cover.

1. Press the hooks together.

Angle out the cover.

2. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.

Related information Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 343)

Lamp replacement - dipped beam (p. 344)

Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 344)

Lamp replacement - extra main beam (p. 345)

Lamp replacement - dipped beam The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 343).

2. Undo the cover (p. 344).

3. Press the bulb holder upwards until it releases.

Pull out the bulb holder.

4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 348)

Lamp replacement - main beam The main beam bulb is fitted inside the head- lamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 343).

2. Undo the cover (p. 344).

3. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.

Pull out the bulb holder.

4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 348)

10 Maintenance and service

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 345

Lamp replacement - extra main beam The extra main beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 343).

2. Undo the cover (p. 344).

3. Press the bulb holder upwards until it detaches.

Pull out the bulb holder.

4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 348)

Lamp replacement - direction indicators front The direction indicator lamp is fitted inside the headlamp's smaller cover.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 343).

2. Undo the cover.

3. Push in the catch.

Pull out the bulb holder.

4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 348)

Lamp replacement - position/parking lamps front The position/parking lamp bulb holder is located on the side of the headlamp.

NOTE

Not applicable to cars with Xenon head- lamps* as these are equipped with LED lamps.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 343).

2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.

Pull out the bulb holder.

3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 348)

10 Maintenance and service

10

346

Lamp replacement - daytime running lights The daytime running light bulb is fitted inside the bumper's cover.

NOTE

Only applies to daytime running lights with bulbs.

1. Undo the cover.

2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.

Pull out the bulb holder.

3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 348)

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps The overview shows the location of the lamps at the rear.

Brake light (LED)

Position/parking lights (LED)

Brake lights (p. 346)

Side marker lamps (LED)

Indicator (p. 346)

Reversing lamp (p. 346)

Fog lamps (p. 347)

Related information Lamp replacement (p. 342)

Lamps - specifications (p. 348)

Lamp replacement - direction indicators rear, brake lights and reversing lamp Direction indicators rear, brake lights and reversing lamp are replaced from inside the cargo area.

1. Remove the hatch in the upholstery (1) on the same side as the defective bulb.

2. Press the catch sideways.

Pull out the bulb holder.

3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.

4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

10 Maintenance and service

10

347

Related information Lamp replacement - location of rear

lamps (p. 346)

Lamps - specifications (p. 348)

Lamp replacement - rear fog lamp The fog lamp bulb is fitted in the bumper's bulb holder.

Insert (approx.20 mm) a blunt, knife-like object, e.g. a table knife, at the triangle.

Carefully prise until the lug releases.

IMPORTANT

Take care not to damage any parts.

Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.

Pull out the bulb holder.

3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 348)

10 Maintenance and service

10

348

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the lamp lenses.

1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens and gently prize up the lug on the edge.

2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp lens.

3. Using needle-nose pliers, pull the bulb straight out to the side. Do not squeeze too hard with the pliers. Otherwise, the bulb glass could break.

4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 348)

Lamps - specifications The specifications apply to bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps, please refer to a workshop.

Lighting [W]A Type

Dipped beamB 55 H7 LL

Main beamB 65 H9

Additional main beamC

55 H7 LL

Front direction indicators

21 HY21W

Position/parking lamps frontB

5 W5W LL

Daytime running lightsD

19 PW19W

Side direction indi- cators, door mir- rorsD

5 WY5W LL

Direction indica- tors, rear

21 PY21W LL

Brake lights 21 P21W LL

Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL

Lighting [W]A Type

Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL

Vanity mirror light- ing

1,2 T5 Socket W2x4.6d

A Watt B Cars with halogen headlamps C Cars with Xenon headlamps D Certain variants

Related information Lamp replacement (p. 342)

Lamp replacement - location of front lamps (p. 343)

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps (p. 346)

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting (p. 348)

10 Maintenance and service

10

}} 349

Wiper blades The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving.

The windscreen wiper blades must be in serv- ice position when they are to be replaced.

Service position

Wiper blades in service position.

In order to make replacement possible, to clean or lift the wiper blades (for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for example), they must be in service position.

IMPORTANT

Before placing the wiper blades in the service position, make sure that they are not frozen down.

1. Place the remote control key in the igni- tion lock7 and briefly press the START/ STOP ENGINE button to set the car's electrical system to key position I. For detailed information on key positions, see Key positions - functions at different lev- els (p. 71).

2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button again to set the cars electrical system in key position 0.

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk switch up and hold it in position for approx. 1 second. > The wipers then move to standing

straight up.

The wipers return to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the cars electrical sys- tem to key position I (or when the car is started).

IMPORTANT

If the wiper arms in the service position have been folded up from the windscreen, they must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the wipers are allowed to return to their starting position. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.

Replacing the wiper blades

7 Not necessary in cars with Keyless function.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

350

Fold up the wiper arm when it is in serv- ice position. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard.

Check that the blade is firmly installed.

4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen.

The wipers return from service position to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the cars electrical system to key position I (or when the car is started).

G 0 2 1 7 6 3

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side.

WARNING

If the car is equipped with airbag Pedestrian Airbag then Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms are used and that you only use genuine parts for them.

Replacing the wiper blades, rear window

1. Fold out the wiper arm.

2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the arrow).

3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end position against the wiper arm as a lever to detach the blade more easily.

4. Press the new wiper blade into position. Check that it is firmly installed.

5. Lower the wiper arm.

Cleaning For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see Car washing (p. 364).

10 Maintenance and service

10

351

IMPORTANT

Check the blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.

Related information Washer fluid - filling (p. 351)

Washer fluid - filling Washer fluid is used for cleaning the head- lamps and windows. Washer fluid with anti- freeze must be used during winter.

The windscreen and headlamp washers share a common reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reser- voir and hoses.

For capacities, see Washer fluid - quality and volume (p. 451).

Related information Wiper blades (p. 349)

Starter battery The service life and function of the battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving con- ditions, climatic conditions etc.

The starter battery is a traditional 12 V bat- tery.

Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running.

Check that the cables to the battery are correctly connected and properly tight- ened.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con- nected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.

IMPORTANT

Only a traditional battery charger should ever be used when charging the battery.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

352

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for info- tainment system may be temporarily dis- engaged, and/or the message in the com- bined instrument panel's information dis- play about the starter battery's state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable, following the connection of an external battery or battery charger:

The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external bat- tery or battery charger - only the car chassis may be used as the ground- ing point.

See Jump starting (p. 270) for a descrip- tion of how the cable clamps must be attached.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.

The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decrea- ses gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold fur- ther limits starting capacity.

To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is rec- ommended or that the battery is con- nected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging.

A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.

Related information Battery - symbols (p. 352)

Starter battery - replacement (p. 353)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 353)

Battery - symbols There are information and warning symbols on the battery.

Symbols on the battery

Use protective goggles.

Further information is available in the owner's manual.

Store the battery out of the reach of children.

The battery contains cor- rosive acid.

10 Maintenance and service

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 353

Avoid sparks and naked flames.

Risk of explosion.

Must be taken for recy- cling.

NOTE

An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally safe manner as it con- tains lead.

Related information Starter battery (p. 351)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 353)

Starter battery - replacement The starter battery should be replaced by an authorised workshop.

The starter battery is a traditional 12 V bat- tery.

Volvo recommends that you allow an author- ised workshop to replace the batteries - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. For more information on the car's starter bat- tery, see Jump starting (p. 270).

Battery - Start/Stop Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to the starter battery, are equipped with a sup- port battery.

Start/Stop Cars with the Start/Stop function are equip- ped with two 12 V batteries - one extra pow- erful starter battery and one support battery that helps during the Start/Stop function's starting sequence.

For more information on the Start/Stop func- tion, see Start/Stop* (p. 279).

For more information on the car's starter bat- tery, see Jump starting (p. 270) and Starter battery - specification (p. 459).

Battery Start Support

Cold start capacityA, CCA (A)

Starter battery - specification

(p. 459)

120C

180D

SizeB, LWH (mm)

278175190C

315175190D

15090106C

15090130D

Capacity (Ah)

70C

80D

8C

10D

A According to EN standard. B Largest possible size. C Manual gearbox. D Automatic gearbox.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

354

IMPORTANT

When replacing the starter battery in a car with the Start/Stop function, batteries of the correct type must be installed, EFB8

for manual gearbox and AGM9 for auto- matic gearbox.

NOTE

The higher the current take-off in the car (extra cooling/heating, etc.) the more the batteries must be charged = increased fuel consumption.

When the capacity of the battery has fallen below the lowest permissible level then the Start/Stop function is disengaged.

Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to high current take-off means:

The engine starts automatically10 without the driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual gearbox).

The engine starts automatically without the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake pedal (automatic gearbox).

Location of the batteries

(1) Starter battery11 (2) Support battery

The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal starter battery. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed then the Start/Stop function may tempo- rarily cease to work after the connection of an external battery or battery charger:

The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external bat- tery or battery charger - only the car chassis may be used as the ground- ing point.

See Jump starting (p. 270) for a descrip- tion of how the cable clamps must be attached.

8 Enhanced Flooded Battery 9 Absorbed Glass Mat 10 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position. 11 See Starter battery (p. 351) for a detailed description of the starter battery.

10 Maintenance and service

10

355

NOTE

If the battery has become so discharged that everything is "black" and in principle the car does not have all the normal elec- trical functions and the engine is subse- quently started using an external battery or battery charger, then the Start/Stop func- tion will be activated. It will then be possi- ble for the engine to be auto-stopped but in the event of an auto-stop the Start/Stop function may fail to auto-start the engine due to inadequate capacity in the battery.

The battery must first be charged in order to ensure a successful auto-start after an auto-stop. At an outside temperature of +15 C the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour. At a lower outside tem- perature a charging time of 3-4 hours is recommended. The recommendation is that the battery is charged using an exter- nal battery charger.

If this is not possible then the recommen- dation is to temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function until the battery has been adequately recharged.

For more information on charging the starter battery, see Starter battery (p. 351).

Related information Battery - symbols (p. 352)

Fuses - general All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from dam- age by short circuiting or overloading.

If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.

Changing 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the

fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

Location, fuse boxes

Fuse box locations in a left-hand drive car. In a right-hand drive car the fuse box under the glovebox changes sides.

Engine compartment

Under the glovebox

Below right front seat

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 356)

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 359)

Fuses - under right front seat (p. 362)

10 Maintenance and service

10

356

Fuses - in engine compartment Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine and brake functions, amongst other things.

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

The fuse box also provides space for several spare fuses.

Replacing fuses The fuses can be accessed following the removal of the cover fitted on the starter bat- tery and the cover for the electrical distribu- tion unit.

Removing the covers Fold out the locking catches that are fitted on the sides of the cover on the starter battery.

Lift the cover straight up.

10 Maintenance and service

10

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 357

Fold out the locking catch that is fitted on the side of the electrical distribution unit.

Rotate the cover upward until the lock lugs (1) are released.

Fold the cover toward the engine to access the fuses.

Refitting the covers Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Positions The label on the inside of the cover shows the positions of the fuses.

Fuses 7-18 are of "JCASE" type and should be replaced by a workshop12.

Fuses 19-45 and 47-48 are of "Mini Fuse" type.

Function A

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 30

Headlamp washers* 20

Ventilation fan 40

Primary fuse for fuses 32-36 30

Electric windscreen, right side* 40

Electric windscreen, left side* 40

Parking heater* 20

Windscreen wipers 20

Function A

Central electronic module, refer- ence voltage, support battery

5

Horn 15

Brake lights 5

Light switches 5

Internal relay coils 5

12 V socket, tunnel console front

15

Transmission control module 15

Solenoid clutch A/C (petrol, 4-cyl. diesel)

15

12 V socket, tunnel console rear 15

Climate sensor*; air intake throt- tle motors

10

Engine control module (5-cyl.) 5

Power seat, right* 20

12 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

358 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Function A

Relay coil in cooling fan relay (4-cyl., 5-cyl. diesel); Lambda- sonds (4-cyl. petrol); Mass air flow meter (diesel), Bypass valve, EGR cooling (diesel); Reg- ulator valve, fuel flow (5-cyl. die- sel); Regulator valve, fuel pres- sure (5-cyl. diesel)

10

Relay coil in cooling fan relay (5-cyl. petrol); Lambda-sonds (5-cyl. petrol)

20

Oil pump, automatic gearbox (5-cyl.); Mass air flow sensor (petrol); EVAP valve (4-cyl. pet- rol); Valves (5-cyl. petrol); Sole- noids (5-cyl. petrol); Crankcase ventilation heater (5-cyl. petrol); Control motor, turbo (4-cyl. die- sel); Regulator valve, fuel flow (4-cyl. diesel); Control module, radiator roller cover (4-cyl. die- sel); Solenoid, piston cooling (5- cyl. diesel); Turbo control valve (5-cyl. diesel); Oil level sensor (5-cyl. diesel); Solenoid clutch A/C (5-cyl.)

10

Function A

Valves (4-cyl. petrol); Solenoids (4-cyl. petrol); Injectors (5-cyl. petrol); Lambda-sond (5-cyl. diesel); Crankcase ventilation heater (5-cyl. diesel)

10

Ignition coils (petrol) 10

Diesel filter heater; Glow plug control module (5-cyl. diesel)

15

Engine control module (4-cyl.) 10

Engine control module (5-cyl.); Throttle unit (5-cyl. petrol)

15

ABS 5

Engine control module; Trans- mission control module; Airbags

10

Light height control* 10

Electric control servo 5

Central electronic module 15

Collision warning 5

Accelerator pedal sensor 5

Function A

Charging point, support battery

Coolant pump (when no parking heater is available)

10

Related information Fuses - under glovebox (p. 359)

Fuses - under right front seat (p. 362)

10 Maintenance and service

10

}} 359

Fuses - under glovebox Fuses under the glovebox protect the airbag and passenger compartment lighting func- tions, amongst other things.

On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses.

Replacing fuses The fuses can be accessed when a protective cover has been removed from the fuse box.

Cover removal Take hold of the recess and pull until the locking lugs in the lower edge of the cover are released from the fuse box.

Remove the cover.

NOTE

A relatively large amount of tensile force is required to release the locking lugs at the top edge of the cover from the electrical distribution unit.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

360 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Cover refitting

Guide in the lower lugs.

Turn the cover upwards until the upper lugs engage.

NOTE

Make sure that the upper locking lugs are seated properly in the grooves of the elec- trical distribution unit.

Positions The fuses are of "Mini Fuse" type.

Function A

Fuel pump 20

Function A

Rear window wiper 15

Interior lighting, Roof console for front reading lamps and passenger compartment light- ing

5

Interior lighting; Power seats* 10

Blind, glass roof* 10

Rain sensor*; Dimming, interior rearview mirror*; Moisture sen- sor*

5

Collision warning* 5

Unlocking, tailgateA 10

Reserve position 3, constant voltage

5

Steering lock 15

Combined instrument panel 5

Central locking system, fuel filler flapB

10

Function A

Climate panel 10

Steering wheel module 7,5

Siren*; Data link connector OBDII

5

Main beam 15

Reversing lamp 10

Windscreen wipersC; Rear windscreen wiperC

20

Immobiliser 5

Reserve position 1, constant voltage

15

Reserve position 2, constant voltage

20

Movement sensor alarm*; Remote receiver

5

Windscreen wipersD; Rear windscreen wiperD

20

Central locking system, fuel filler flapE

10

Unlocking, tailgateF 10

10 Maintenance and service

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 361

Function A

Electric additional heater*; But- ton seat heating rear*

7,5

Airbags; Pedestrian airbag 10

Reserve position 4, constant voltage

7,5

A See also fuse 84. B See also fuse 83. C See also fuse 82. D See also fuse 77. E See also fuse 70. F See also fuse 65.

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 356)

Fuses - under right front seat (p. 362)

10 Maintenance and service

10

362 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuses - under right front seat Fuses under the right-hand front seat protect infotainment and trailer functions, amongst other things.

On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses.

Positions Fuses 24-28 are of "JCASE" type and

should be replaced by a workshop13.

Fuses 1-23 and 29-46 are of "Mini Fuse" type.

Function A

Keyless* 10

Door handle (Keyless*) 5

Control panel, left front door 25

Control panel, right front door 25

Function A

Control panel, left rear door 25

Control panel, right rear door 25

Power seat left* 20

13 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

10 Maintenance and service

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 363

Function A

Internal relay coil 5

Audio control unit (amplifier)* 5

Telematics*; Bluetooth* 5

Audio; Infotainment control unit 15

Digital radio*; TV* 10

12 V socket, cargo area 15

Trailer socket 2* 20

Primary fuse for fuses 12-16: Infotainment

40

Trailer socket 1* 40

Rear window defroster 30

Function A

BLIS* 5

Parking assistance* 5

Parking camera* 5

Seat heating (driver's side) 15

Seat heating (passenger side) 15

Seat heating, rear right* 15

Seat heating, rear left* 15

AWD control module* 15

Function A

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 356)

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 359)

10 Maintenance and service

10

364

Car washing The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.

Washing by hand Remove bird droppings from the paint-

work as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discol- our paintwork very quickly. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration.

Hose down the underbody.

Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt has been removed so as to reduce the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the surfaces must not be hot from the sun!

Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.

Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.

Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non-scratching sponge instead.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.

Wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades.

For cleaning:

Set the wiper blades to the service posi- tion; see Wiper blades (p. 349).

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Do not use any strong solvents.

Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it cannot reach everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom- mended for achieving optimum results.

NOTE

The car must only be washed by hand over the first few months. This is because the paint is more delicate when it is new.

High-pressure washing When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car (the distance applies to all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the locks.

10 Maintenance and service

10

365

Testing the brakes

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush. The heat from the friction causes the brake linings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, such as glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo.

Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims.

Related information Polishing and waxing (p. 365)

Cleaning the interior (p. 367)

Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 366)

Polishing and waxing Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spi- rit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

366 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

IMPORTANT

Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.

Related information Car washing (p. 364)

Water and dirt-repellent coating The windows are treated with a surface coa- ting that improves visibility in difficult weather conditions.

Water and dirt-repellent coating* There is natural wear of the water- repellent coating.

Maintenance:

Never use products such as car wax, degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this could ruin their water-repellent prop- erties.

Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface.

To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice only use plastic ice scra- pers.

Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recom- mended in order to maintain the water- repellent properties. This should be used first after three years and then each year.

IMPORTANT

Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. Use the heating to remove ice from the door mirrors; see Win- dows and rearview and door mirrors - heating (p. 98).

Related information Car washing (p. 364)

Rustproofing The car received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the exposed members, cavities, closed sections and side doors.

Inspection and maintenance Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is important to keep the car clean. The car's rustproofing needs to be checked regularly and touched-up if necessary in order for it to be maintained.

Under normal conditions the rustproofing does not require treatment for approximately 12 years. After this period, it should be trea- ted at three-year intervals. Volvo recom- mends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance if the car needs fur- ther treatment.

Related information Paint damage (p. 368)

10 Maintenance and service

10

}} 367

Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product.

Vacuuming is important prior to using clean- ing agents.

Carpets and cargo area Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.

Each inlay mat is secured with pins.

Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lift the mat straight up.

Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin.

WARNING

Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid get- ting caught adjacent to and under the ped- als.

A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats should be cleaned with agents recom- mended by your Volvo dealer!

Stains on fabric upholstery and roof upholstery A special fabric cleaning agent, available from authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

IMPORTANT

Certain items of coloured clothing (for example, jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery.

Never use strong solvents. Such prod- ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.

Stains on leather upholstery Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to pre- serve its original appearance.

Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau- tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and processed so that it retains its natural characteristics. It is given a protective coa- ting, but regular cleaning is required in order to maintain both characteristics and appear- ance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product for the cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance

with the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating. After a period of use the natural appearance of the leather will never- theless emerge, depending more or less on the surface texture of the leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather and shows that it is a natural product.

To achieve best results Volvo recommends cleaning and the application of protective cream once to four times per year (or more if necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is available from your Volvo dealer.

IMPORTANT

Certain items of coloured clothing (for example, jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery.

Never use strong solvents. Such prod- ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.

Washing instructions for leather upholstery 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the damp-

ened sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.

2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular movements.

3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the stain. Do not rub.

|| 10 Maintenance and service

10

368

4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and allow the leather to dry completely.

Protective treatment of leather upholstery 1. Pour a small amount of the protective

cream on the felted cloth and massage in a thin layer of cream with gentle circular movements on the leather.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes before use.

The leather has now been given improved protection against stains and improved UV protection.

Washing instructions for the leather steering wheel Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-

moistened sponge and neutral soap.

Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plastic.

Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care agents are recommended for best results.

If the steering wheel has stains:

Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and blood)

Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5% ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)

Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)

1. Same procedure as for group 1.

2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.

Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)

1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.

2. Same procedure as for group 1.

Stains on interior plastic parts, metal parts and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly moistened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces.

Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning.

Seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A spe- cial textile cleaning agent is available from your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

Related information Car washing (p. 364)

Paint damage Paint is an important part of the car's rust- proofing and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paint- work damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers.

Touching up minor paintwork damage To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paint- work should be rectified immediately.

Materials

10 Maintenance and service

10

369

primer14 - a special adhesive primer in a spray can is available for e.g. plastic- coated bumpers

basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks15

masking tape

fine sand paper14.

Colour code

Code for the car's colour

It is important that the correct colour is used. For product label location, see Type designa- tions (p. 438).

Repair minor paintwork damage such as stone chips and scratches

G 0 2 1 8 3 2

Before work is begun, the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint.

If the damage is down to the metal, use of a primer is appropriate. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used to give better results - spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly.

2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly and left to dry.

3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried.

4. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to pro- tect the undamaged paintwork.

NOTE

If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with basecoat and clearcoat as soon as the surface has been cleaned.

Related information Rustproofing (p. 366)

14 If required. 15 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.

AUDIO AND MEDIA

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 371

Audio and media The audio and media system consists of radio (p. 379), media player (p. 390), TV (p. 421)* as well as the option to communicate with mobile phone (p. 403) *. Information is pre- sented on a 5 or 7-inch* screen in the upper section of the centre console. Functions can be controlled via buttons in the steering wheel, in the centre console below the screen or via a remote control (p. 425) *.

If the audio and media system is active when the engine is switched off then it is automati- cally activated the next time the key is inserted into key position I (p. 71) or higher, and it continues with the same source (e.g. radio) as before the engine was switched off (the driver's door must be closed on cars with Keyless systems*).

The audio and media system can be used for 15 minutes at a time without the remote con- trol key being in the ignition switch by press- ing the On/Off button.

When the car is being started the audio and media system is switched off temporarily and continues when the engine has started.

NOTE

Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch if the audio and media sys- tem is being used when the engine is switched off. This is to avoid discharging the battery unnecessarily.

Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic1

Made under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic and the dou- ble-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Audyssey MultEQ1

The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used in the development and tuning of the sound to ensure a world-class sound experience.

Related information Audio and media - overview (p. 372)

Audio and media - operating the system (p. 372)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Audio and media - menu overview (p. 428)

Audio and media - audio settings (p. 376)

Picture settings (p. 394)

Favourites (p. 376)

1 Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media

11

372 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Audio and media - overview Overview of the audio and media system's associated parts.

AUX2 and USB3 inputs for external audio sources (e.g. iPod)

Steering wheel keypad (with*/without thumbwheel).

display screen. The display screen is available in two sizes: 5 and 7-inch. The manual shows a 7-inch display screen.

Control panel in centre console

Related information Audio and media (p. 371)

Audio and media - operating the system (p. 372)

Audio and media - operating the system The audio and media system is controlled from the centre console and partly from the steering wheel buttons. The information is presented on the screen in the upper section of the centre console.

2 Applicable to Performance only 3 Not applicable to Performance

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 373

Scroll/fast forward/search - A short press scrolls among tracks, preset radio sta- tions4 or chapters5. A long press fast for- wards through disc tracks or searches for the next available radio station.

SOUND - press for access to audio set- tings (bass, treble, etc.). For more informa- tion, see general audio settings (p. 377).

VOL - raise or lower volume.

ON/OFF/MUTE - short press starts the system and long press (until the screen is off) switches off. Note that the whole of the Sensus system (including navigation * and phone functions*) starts/switches off at the same time. Briefly press to mute the sound (MUTE) or restore the sound if it had been switched off.

Disc insert and eject slot.

Disc eject.

Main sources - press to select the main source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA). Last active source is shown (e.g. FM1). A new source view is selected if the main source button is pressed while in RADIO or MEDIA. If you are in TEL* or NAV* and press the main source

button then a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options.

OK/MENU - press the thumbwheel in the steering wheel or the button in the centre console to accept a menu selection. If OK/ MENU is pressed while in the normal view, a menu for the selected source opens (e.g. RADIO or MEDIA). Arrow to the right of the screen is shown when there are underlying menus.

TUNE - turn the thumbwheel in the steer- ing wheel or the knob in the centre console to scroll among tracks/folders, radio and TV* stations, phone contacts* or to navigate among choices on the display screen.

EXIT - short press leads upwards in the menu system, interrupts current function, interrupts/rejects phone calls or erases entered characters. Long press leads to nor- mal view, or if you are in normal view to the highest menu level (main source view), from where you can reach the same main source buttons located in the centre console (7).

INFO - If more information than can be shown on the screen is available, press the INFO button to see the remaining informa- tion.

Preset buttons, input of numbers and let- ters.

FAV shortcut to a favourite setting. The button can be programmed for a commonly used function in AM, FM, etc. For more infor- mation, see favourites (p. 376)).

MUTE6 - press to switch off the radio/ media audio or restore the audio if it has been switched off.

Voice recognition7 - press to activate voice recognition (for mobile phone and navi- gation system connected via Bluetooth*).

Related information Audio and media - menu navigation (p.

374)

Audio and media (p. 371)

4 Does not apply to DAB. 5 Only applies to DVD discs. 6 Cars without navigation. 7 Cars with navigation*.

11 Audio and media

11

374

Audio and media - menu navigation The audio and media system is controlled from the centre console and partly from the

steering wheel buttons. The information is presented on the screen in the upper section of the centre console.

The example shows navigation to different functions when a disc is played back. (1) Main source button, (2) Normal view, (3) Shortcut/source menu, (4) Quick menu, (5) Source menu

11 Audio and media

11

375

Select main source by pressing a main source button (1) (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL). To navigate through the source menus, use the controls TUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT or the main source button (1).

To view available functions, see Audio and media - menu overview (p. 428).

NOTE

If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad with a thumbwheel*, these can be used instead of the controls in the centre console (TUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT), Audio and media - operating the system (p. 372).

Menus and views in the display screen The appearance depends on the source, equipment in the car, settings, etc.

Main source button - press to switch the main source or to show the Shortcut/Source menu in the active source.

Normal view - normal mode for the source.

Shortcut/Source menu - shows com- monly used menu options in the main sources, e.g. TEL and MEDIA (accessed by pressing the active source's main source but- ton (1)).

Quick menu - fast mode when TUNE is turned, e.g. for changing disc tracks, radio station, etc.

Source menu - for menu navigation (accessed by pressing OK/MENU).

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Audio and media - menu overview (p. 428)

11 Audio and media

11

376 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Favourites Save frequently used functions as favourites. Possible functions that can be saved are within radio, media, reversing camera and menu source MY CAR where many of the car's functions are handled, e.g. setting the clock, door mirrors and locks. The function is then accessed easily by pressing the FAV button.

The FAV button can be used to store func- tions that are used frequently so that the function can be started simply by pressing FAV. You can select a favourite (e.g. Equalizer) for each function as follows:

In RADIO mode:

AM

FM1/FM2

DAB1*/DAB2*

In MEDIA mode:

DISC

USB*

iPod*

Bluetooth*

AUX

TV*

It is also possible to select and store a favourite for MY CAR, CAM* and NAV*. Favourites can also be selected and stored under MY CAR. For more information on the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).

Related information Save as favourite (p. 419)

Audio and media - audio settings The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimal sound reproduction, but can be adapted to your needs.

Setting for optimal sound reproduction The audio system is pre-calibrated for opti- mum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing.

This calibration takes into account loud- speakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position etc. for each com- bination of car model and audio system.

There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the position of the volume control, radio reception and vehicle speed.

The controls explained in these operating instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and Equalizer, are only intended for the user to be able to adapt the sound reproduction according to personal taste.

Related information Audio and media - general audio settings

(p. 377)

Audio and media - advanced audio set- tings (p. 377)

Setting the audio profile (p. 378)

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 377

Audio and media - general audio settings General audio settings for the audio and media system.

Press SOUND to access the audio settings menu (Bass, Treble, etc.). Scroll forward with SOUND or OK/MENU to your selection (e.g. Treble).

Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save the setting with OK/MENU.

Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to access other options:

Surround8 - Can be set to the On/Off position. When On is selected, the sys- tem selects the setting for optimal sound reproduction. Normally DPLII and then appear in the display screen. If the recording is made with Dolby Digital tech- nology then playback will take place with this setting, then appears in the display screen. When Off is selected, 3- channel stereo is available.

Bass - Bass level.

Treble - Treble level.

Fader Balance between the front and rear speakers.

Balance Balance between the left and right-hand speakers.

Subwoofer*8 - Bass speaker level.

DPL II centre level3 channel centre level8 - Volume for centre speaker.

DPL II surround level8, 9 Level for sur- round.

Related information Audio and media - menu navigation (p.

374)

Audio and media - audio settings (p. 376)

Audio and media - advanced audio set- tings (p. 377)

Audio and media - advanced audio settings Adapt the audio settings for radio and media according to your wishes.

The following functions can be adapted:

Setting the equaliser (p. 378)

Setting the audio profile (p. 378)

Setting the audio volume and automatic volume control (p. 378)

Setting the audio volume for external audio source (p. 398)

Related information Audio and media - audio settings (p. 376)

Audio and media - general audio settings (p. 377)

8 Only Premium Sound Multimedia. 9 Only when Surround is activated.

11 Audio and media

11

378

Setting the equaliser Set the equaliser10 and adjust the volume separately for different radio frequencies or TV.

1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio settings and select Equalizer.

2. Select wavelength by turning TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU.

3. Adjust the audio settings by turning TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. Con- tinue in the same way with other wave- lengths you want to change.

4. When you have finished with audio set- tings, press EXIT to confirm and return to normal view.

Related information Audio and media - advanced audio set-

tings (p. 377)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Setting the audio profile Set the audio profile and optimise your audio experience in accordance with your needs.

The sound experience can be optimised for the driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat. If there are passengers in both the front and rear seats then the option recommended is; both front seats. The options can be selected under Audio settings Sound stage.

Related information Audio and media - audio settings (p. 376)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Setting the audio volume and automatic volume control Set the audio compensation for excessive noise in the passenger compartment.

The audio system compensates for disrupting noises in the passenger compartment by increasing the volume in relation to the speed of the car. The compensation level can be set to low, medium, high or off. Select the level under Audio settings Volume compensation.

Related information Audio and media - advanced audio set-

tings (p. 377)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

10 Not applicable to Performance

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 379

Radio It is possible to listen to the AM and FM radio frequencies and, also in certain cases, digital radio (DAB) (p. 388)*.

Controls for radio functions.

For operating the radio, see Operating the system (p. 372) and Menu navigation (p. 374).

AM/FM radio Radio tuning (p. 379)

Radio stations as presets (p. 381)

Scan radio frequencies (p. 387)

RDS functions (p. 382)

Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 384)

Radio text (p. 386)

Digital radio* (DAB) Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 388)

Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn) (p. 388)

Navigation in channel group list (Ensem- ble) (p. 389)

Radio stations as presets (p. 381)

Scan radio frequencies (p. 387)

Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 384)

Radio text (p. 386)

DAB to DAB link (p. 389)

Digital radio* (DAB) - frequencies (p. 389)

Digital radio* (DAB) - subchannel (p. 390)

Digital radio* (DAB) - resetting (p. 390)

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Audio and media - menu overview (p. 428)

Radio tuning The radio automatically compiles a radio sta- tion list11 of the strongest FM stations whose signals it is currently receiving. It is possible to activate automatic or manual radio tuning.

NOTE

The reception is dependent both on how good the signal strength and signal quality are. The transmission may be disturbed by various factors such as tall buildings or the transmitter being far away. Coverage level can also vary depending on where in the country you are located.

Related information Automatic radio tuning (p. 380)

Manual radio tuning (p. 381)

Radio station list (p. 380)

11 Audio and media

11

380 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Automatic radio tuning Searches for the next/previous available sta- tion.

1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE until the desired wavelength (AM, FM1 etc.) is shown, press OK/MENU.

2. Hold in / in the centre console (or in the steering wheel keypad*). The radio searches for the next/previous avail- able station.

Related information Radio tuning (p. 379)

Radio station list The radio automatically compiles a radio sta- tion list12 of the strongest FM stations whose signals it is currently receiving. This enables you to find a station when you drive into an area where you do not know the radio sta- tions and their frequencies.

To go to the list and select a station:

1. Select the desired wavelength (FM1 or FM2).

2. Turn TUNE one step in either direction. This displays the list of all stations in the area. The currently tuned station is indi- cated with enlarged text in the list.

3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to select a station from the list.

4. Confirm your choice by pressing OK/ MENU.

NOTE

The list only shows the frequencies of stations that are currently being received, not a complete list of all radio frequencies on the selected wavelength.

If the signal from the currently received station is weak, this may prevent the radio from updating the station list. If this occurs, press the INFO button (while the station list is shown in the display screen) in order to change to manual tuning and set a frequency. If the station list is no longer shown, turn TUNE one step in either direction to show the list again, and press INFO to switch.

The list disappears from the display screen after a few seconds.

If the station list is no longer shown, turn TUNE one step in either direction and press the INFO button in the centre console to change to manual tuning (or to return from manual tuning to the function for "Station list").

Related information Radio tuning (p. 379)

11 Does not apply to Performance. 12 Does not apply to Performance.

11 Audio and media

11

381

Manual radio tuning The radio automatically compiles a radio sta- tion list13, but it is possible to perform radio tuning manually.

The preset from the factory is that the radio shows the station list of the strongest stations in the area when you turn TUNE (see the sec- tion Radio station list (p. 380)). When the radio station list is shown, press the INFO button in the centre console to change to manual tuning. This allows you to select a fre- quency from the list of all available radio fre- quencies in the selected wavelength. In other words, if turn TUNE one step in a manual search the frequency is changed from e.g. 93.3 to 93.4 MHz, etc.

To manually select a station:

1. Press the RADIO button, turn TUNE until the required frequency band (AM, FM1 etc.) is displayed, press OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to select a frequency.

NOTE

The preset from the factory is that the radio automatically searches for the sta- tions in the area where you are driving (see section "Radio station list").

But if you have changed over to manual tuning (by pressing the INFO button in the centre console when the station list was shown), then the radio remains set in the function for manual tuning the next time you switch on the radio. To change back to the function for "Radio station list", turn TUNE one step (to show the complete list of stations) and press the button INFO.

Note that if you press INFO when the sta- tion list is not shown then INFO is acti- vated. For more information on this func- tion, see Audio and media - operating the system (p. 372).

Related information Radio tuning (p. 379)

Radio stations as presets Frequently used radio stations are optimally saved as presets in order to facilitate simple activation.

Preset buttons.

AM/FM radio 10 presets can be stored per wavelength (AM, FM1 etc.).

The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons.

1. Tune into a station, see Radio tuning (p. 379).

13 Does not apply to Performance.

|| 11 Audio and media

11

382

2. Hold in one of the preset buttons for a few seconds, the sound disappears dur- ing this time and returns when the station is stored. The preset button can now be used.

A list of pre-selected channels can be shown in the display screen14. The function is acti- vated/deactivated in FM/AM mode under FM menu Show presets or AM menu Show presets.

Digital radio (DAB) 10 station presets can be stored per wave- length. DAB has 2 memories for presets: DAB1 and DAB2. Storage of presets is per- formed by means of a long press on the desired preset button, for more information see AM/FM radio above. The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons.

A preset contains one channel but no sub- channels. If a subchannel is being played and a preset is saved then only the main channel is registered. This is because subchannels are temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve the preset, the channel which contained the subchannel will be played. The preset is not dependent on the channel list.

A list of pre-selected channels can be shown in the display screen14. The function is acti-

vated/deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu Show presets.

NOTE

The audio system's DAB system does not support all functions in the DAB standard.

Related information Radio tuning (p. 379)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

RDS functions With RDS the radio can automatically change to the strongest transmitter. RDS provides the facility to receive e.g. traffic information (TP) and to search for certain programme types (PTY).

RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmit- ters into a network. An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions:

Automatically switches to a stronger transmitter if reception in the area is poor.

Searches for programme type, such as traffic information or news.

Receives text information on current radio programme.

NOTE

Some radio stations do not use RDS or only selected parts of its functionality.

If a required programme type is located the radio can switch stations interrupting the audio source currently in use. For example, if the CD player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting transmission is played back at a preset volume, see Volume control for inter- rupting radio programme types (PTY) (p. 386). The radio returns to the previous audio

14 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media

11

383

source and volume when the set programme type is no longer broadcast.

The programme functions alarm (ALARM!), traffic information (TP), news (NEWS), and programme types (PTY) interrupt one another in order of priority, where alarm has the high- est priority and programme types has the lowest. For additional settings of program- ming interruptions (EON Distant and EON Local), see Enhanced Other Networks (EON) (p. 384). Press EXIT to return to the interrup- ted audio source, press the OK/MENU to clear the message.

Related information Alarms in the event of accidents and dis-

asters (p. 383)

Traffic information (TP) (p. 383)

Enhanced Other Networks (EON) (p. 384)

Traffic information (TP) (p. 383)

News broadcasts (p. 384)

Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 384)

Radio text (p. 386)

Automatic radio frequency update (AF) (p. 386)

Regional radio programmes (REG) (p. 387)

Resetting RDS functions (p. 387)

Alarms in the event of accidents and disasters This function is used to warn of serious acci- dents and catastrophes. The message ALARM! appears on the display screen when an alarm message is transmitted.

The alarm cannot be temporarily interrupted or deactivated.

Related information RDS functions (p. 382)

Traffic information (TP) This function allows traffic information that is broadcast within a set radio station's RDS network to break through.

The symbol TP shows that the function is activated. If the preset station can send traffic information then this is shown by TP glowing brightly in the display screen, otherwise TP will be grey.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM menu TP.

TP from selected station/all stations The radio can only interrupt for traffic infor- mation from the selected station or all sta- tions within the RDS network.

Go in FM mode to FM menu Advanced settings Set TP favourite to change.

Related information RDS functions (p. 382)

11 Audio and media

11

384

Enhanced Other Networks (EON) EON is useful in urban areas with many regional radio stations. It allows the distance between the car and the radio station trans- mitter to determine when programme func- tions should interrupt the current audio source.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode by selecting one of the options under FM menu Advanced settings EON:

Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close.

Distant15 interrupts if the station trans- mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.

Related information RDS functions (p. 382)

News broadcasts This function allows news broadcasts within a set radio station's RDS network to break through.

The symbol NEWS shows that the function is active.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM menu News settings News.

News from selected station/all stations The radio can only interrupt for news from the selected station or all stations in the RDS net- work.

Go in FM mode to FM menu News settings Set news favourite to change.

Related information RDS functions (p. 382)

Radio programme types (PTY) The PTY function can be used to select one or more radio programme types, such as Pop Music and Serious Classical Music. After selecting a programme type, navigation only takes place within the channels that are broadcasting that type.

PTY can be selected for FM and DAB radio. The PTY symbol is shown in the display screen when the function is active. This func- tion allows programme types broadcast within a set station's RDS network to break through.

PTY for FM radio 1. Activate in FM mode by first selecting the

programme types under FM menu Advanced settings PTY settings Select PTY.

2. Then the PTY function must be activated under FM menu Advanced settings

PTY settings Receive traffic bulletins from other networks.

Deactivation of the PTY function is performed in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings PTY settings Receive traffic bulletins from other networks. Selected programme types (PTY) are not reset.

15 Factory settings.

11 Audio and media

11

385

Resetting and removing PTY are performed under FM menu Advanced settings PTY settings Select PTY Clear all.

PTY for DAB radio Programme type is selected in DAB mode under DAB menu PTY filtering. Exit this mode as follows:

Press EXIT. > An indicator is shown in the display

screen when PTY is activated.

In some cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode, see DAB to DAB link (p. 389).

Related information Searching radio programme types (PTY)

(p. 385)

Show radio programme types (PTY) (p. 385)

Volume control for interrupting radio pro- gramme types (PTY) (p. 386)

RDS functions (p. 382)

Searching radio programme types (PTY) This function searches the whole frequency band for the selected radio programme type.

1. In FM mode select one or more PTY under FM menu Advanced settings

PTY settings Select PTY.

2. Go to FM menu Advanced settings PTY settings Seek PTY.

To finish searching, press EXIT.

To continue searching for another broad- cast of the selected programme types, press on or .

Related information Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 384)

Show radio programme types (PTY) (p. 385)

RDS functions (p. 382)

Show radio programme types (PTY) Some radio stations broadcast information about programme type and programme cate- gory. The current station's radio programme type, e.g. Pop Music and Serious Classical Music, can be shown in the display screen. PTY can be selected for FM and DAB radio.

Show radio programme type for FM radio Activate/deactivate in FM mode under

FM menu Advanced settings PTY settings Show PTY text.

Show radio programme type for DAB radio Activate/deactivate in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings Show PTY text.

Related information Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 384)

Searching radio programme types (PTY) (p. 385)

RDS functions (p. 382)

11 Audio and media

11

386

Volume control for interrupting radio programme types (PTY)

The interrupting programme types, e.g. NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume selected for each respective programme type. If the volume level is adjusted during the programme interruption, the new level is saved until the next programme interruption.

Related information Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 384)

Radio text Certain RDS stations transmit information on programme content, artists etc. This informa- tion is shown in the display screen16. Radio text can be shown for FM and DAB radio.

Radio text for FM radio Activate/deactivate in FM mode under

FM menu Show radio text.

Radio text for DAB radio Activate/deactivate in DAB mode under DAB menu Show radio text.

NOTE

Only one of the functions "Show radio text" and "Show presets" can be acti- vated at a time. If one of them is activated when the other is already activated, then the previously activated function is deacti- vated automatically. Both functions can be deactivated.

Related information RDS functions (p. 382)

Radio stations as presets (p. 381)

Automatic radio frequency update (AF) The function selects the strongest transmitter for the set radio station.

In order to find a strong transmitter the func- tion may, in exceptional cases, need to search the entire FM wavelength.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings Alternative frequency.

Related information RDS functions (p. 382)

16 Only cars with 7-inch screen

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 387

Regional radio programmes (REG) This function causes the radio to continue with a regional radio transmitter even if its sig- nal strength is low.

The symbol REG shows that the function is active.

Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings REG.

Related information RDS functions (p. 382)

Scan radio frequencies The function automatically searches for avail- able radio channels and takes into account any programme type filtering (PTY).

When a station is found, it is played for approx. 10 seconds before scanning is resumed. When a station is playing back it is saved as a preset in the usual way, see Radio stations as presets (p. 381).

To start scanning go in FM/AM/DAB* mode to FM menu Scan, AM menu

Scan or DAB menu Scan.

NOTE

Scanning stops if a station is saved.

Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY mode. In which case only channels of the pre-selected programme type are played.

Related information Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 384)

Radio stations as presets (p. 381)

Resetting RDS functions All radio settings can be reset to the original factory settings.

The reset is carried out in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings Reset all FM settings.

Related information RDS functions (p. 382)

11 Audio and media

11

388 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Digital radio* (DAB) DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital broadcasting system for radio. The car sup- ports DAB, DAB+ and DMB.

NOTE

Coverage for DAB is not available in all locations. If there is no coverage then the message No reception is shown in the display screen.

Service and Ensemble Service - Channel, radio channel (only

audio services are supported by the sys- tem).

Ensemble - A collection of radio chan- nels on the same frequency.

Related information Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn)

(p. 388)

Navigation in channel group list (Ensem- ble) (p. 389)

Radio (p. 379)

Radio stations as presets (p. 381)

Scan radio frequencies (p. 387)

Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 384)

Radio text (p. 386)

DAB to DAB link (p. 389)

Digital radio* (DAB) - frequencies (p. 389)

Digital radio* (DAB) - subchannel (p. 390)

Digital radio* (DAB) - resetting (p. 390) Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn) Storage of channel groups (Ensemble learn) for digital radio (DAB).

When the vehicle is moved to a new broad- casting area, programming of existing chan- nel groups in the area may be necessary.

Programming of channel groups creates an updated list of all available channel groups. The list is not updated automatically.

Programming is carried out in the menu sys- tem in DAB mode under DAB menu Ensemble learn. Programming can also take place as follows:

1. Turn TUNE one step in either direction. > Ensemble learn is shown in the list of

available channel groups.

2. Press OK/MENU. > New programming is started.

Programming can be cancelled with EXIT.

Related information Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 388)

Navigation in channel group list (Ensem- ble) (p. 389)

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 389

Navigation in channel group list (Ensemble) Navigation in the channel group list (Ensem- ble) for digital radio (DAB).

To navigate in and access the channel group list turn TUNE. The name of the Ensemble is shown in the upper part of the display screen. When switching to the new Ensemble the name changes to the new one.

Service - Shows channels irrespective of the channel group to which they are allo- cated. The list can also be filtered using the selection of programme type (PTY filtering), see Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 384).

Related information Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn)

(p. 388)

Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 388)

Radio programme types (PTY) (p. 384)

DAB to DAB link DAB to DAB linking means that the DAB radio can go from one channel with poor or no reception to the same channel in another channel group with better reception.

There may be a certain delay when changing channel group. There may be a period of silence between the current channel no longer being available to the new channel becoming available.

The function can be activated/deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings DAB linking.

Related information Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 388)

Digital radio* (DAB) - frequencies DAB can be transmitted on two wave- lengths17.

Band III - covers most areas.

LBand - available only in a few areas.

By selecting for example Band III on its own, channel programming takes place more quickly than if both Band III and LBand have been selected. It is not certain that all channel groups will be found. Wavelength selection does not affect the stored memories.

Wavelengths can be deactivated/activated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings DAB band.

Related information Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 388)

17 Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths.

11 Audio and media

11

390 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Digital radio* (DAB) - subchannel Secondary components are usually named subchannels. These are temporary and can contain e.g. translations of the main pro- gramme into other languages.

If one or more subchannels are broadcast then the symbol is shown to the left of the channel name in the display screen. A sub- channel is indicated by the - symbol appear- ing to the left of the channel name in the dis- play screen.

Press to access the subchannels.

Subchannels can only be accessed on the selected main channel and not on any other channel without selecting it.

Display of subchannels can be deactivated/ activated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings Sub channels

Related information Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 388)

Digital radio* (DAB) - resetting All DAB settings can be reset to the original factory settings.

The reset is carried out in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings

Reset all DAB settings.

Related information Digital radio* (DAB) (p. 388)

Media player The media player can playback audio and video from CD/DVD* (p. 391) discs and exter- nally connected audio sources via AUX/USB* (p. 395) input, or wirelessly stream (p. 398) audio files from external devices using Bluetooth. Certain media players can show TV (p. 421)* and have the option to communi- cate with a mobile phone (p. 403)* via Bluetooth.

Controls for the media player.

For operating the media player, see Audio and media - operating the system (p. 372) and Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374).

Related information Audio and media (p. 371)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone (p. 413)

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 391

Remote control* (p. 425)

Media player - compatible file formats (p. 394)

CD/DVD* The media player can playback pre-recorded and burned CD/DVD18 discs.

The media player supports and can play the following main types of discs and files:

Pre-recorded CD discs (CD Audio).

Burned CD discs with audio and/or video files18.

Pre-recorded DVD video discs18.

Burned DVD discs18 with audio and/or video files.

For more information about the supported formats, see Media player - compatible file formats (p. 394).

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* disc (p. 419)

Playback and navigation of DVD video discs (p. 392)

Fast forward/reverse It is possible to fast forward/rewind audio and video files.19

Hold the button for / depressed in order to fast forward/rewind audio or video files forward/backward.

Audio files are fast forwarded/rewound at one speed, while video files can be fast forwar- ded/rewound at several speeds. Repeatedly press the buttons / to increase the fast forward/rewind speed for video files. Release the button to return to viewing at normal speed.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* disc (p. 419)

Playback and navigation of external audio source (p. 396)

18 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 19 Only applies to CD/DVD* discs, USB and iPod.

11 Audio and media

11

392 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Random selection of disc track or audio file This function plays the tracks/audio files in random order20.

To listen to the tracks/audio files in random order for the selected source:

1. Press OK/MENU

2. Turn TUNE to Random

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate the function.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* disc (p. 419)

Playback and navigation of external audio source (p. 396)

Media Bluetooth* (p. 398)

Playback and navigation of DVD video discs When playing back a DVD video disc21 a disc menu may appear on the display screen. The disc menu gives access to additional func- tions and settings, such as selecting subtitles, language and scene selection.

For basic playback and navigation, see Oper- ating the system, page (p. 372). See below for a more detailed description.

NOTE

A video film is only shown when the car is stationary. When the car is moving at a speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is shown and No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen, although the audio is heard during this time. The picture is shown again as soon as the car's speed falls below about 6 km/h.

Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu

Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu is performed using the number keys in the cen- tre console as illustrated above.

Changing chapter or title Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and navigate through them (if the film is being played back then it is paused). Press OK/ MENU to select the chapter, this also leads back to the original position (if the film was being played back then it is restarted). Press EXIT to access the title list.

Titles are selected in the title list by turning TUNE and the selection is confirmed with OK/MENU, this also leads back to the chap- ter list. Press OK/MENU to activate the

20 Does not apply to DVD video discs. For externally connected audio sources via the AUX/USB input this only applies to USB and iPod. Not supported by all mobile phones. 21 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 393

selection and return to the start position. Use EXIT to cancel the selection and this leads back to the original position (without any selection being made).

The chapter can also be changed by pressing on / on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* disc (p. 419)

Camera angle for playback of DVD video discs (p. 393)

Playback and navigation of burned discs with audio/video files (p. 420)

Fast forward/reverse (p. 391)

Scan disc track or audio file (p. 421)

Random selection of disc track or audio file (p. 392)

Media player - compatible file formats (p. 394)

Camera angle for playback of DVD video discs If the DVD video disc supports it, the function can be used to choose from which camera position a particular scene should be shown22.

Go in disc mode to Disc menu Advanced settings Angle.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Playback and navigation of DVD video discs (p. 392)

DivX Video On Demand The media player can be registered in order to play DivX VOD23 type files from burned discs or USB.

The code for registration can be found in the menu system MY CAR Settings Information DivX VOD code. For gen- eral information on menus, see under MY CAR, see MY CAR - operation (p. 104).

For more information visit www.divx.com/ vod.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Playback and navigation of DVD video discs (p. 392)

Playback and navigation of burned discs with audio/video files (p. 420)

Playback and navigation of external audio source (p. 396)

22 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 23 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media

11

394 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Picture settings You can adjust the display settings (when the car is stationary) for brightness and contrast24.

1. Press OK/MENU and select Image settings, confirm with OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to the adjustment option and confirm with OK/MENU.

3. Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU.

To return to the settings list, press the OK/ MENU or EXIT.

The picture settings can be reset to factory settings with the Reset option.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Audio and media (p. 371)

Media player - compatible file formats The media player can play back a variety of file types and is compatible with the formats in the following tables.

Compatible file formats for CD/DVD* discs

NOTE

Dual format, double-sided discs (DVD Plus, CD-DVD format) are thicker than reg- ular CD discs and therefore playback can- not be guaranteed and malfunction may arise.

If a CD contains a mixture of MP3 and CDDA tracks, all MP3s will be ignored.

Audio formatA CD audio, mp3, wma

Audio formatB CD audio, mp3, wma, aac, m4a

Video formatC CD video, DVD video, divx, avi, asf

A Applies to Performance. B Does not apply to Performance. C Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre-

mium Sound Multimedia.

Compatible file formats via USB connection Audio and video files in the following table are supported by the system for playback via the USB connection.

Audio format mp3, wma, aac, m4a

Video formatA divx, avi, asf

A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre- mium Sound Multimedia.

Related information Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* disc

(p. 419)

Playback and navigation of DVD video discs (p. 392)

Playback and navigation of burned discs with audio/video files (p. 420)

Playback and navigation of external audio source (p. 396)

24 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 395

External audio source via AUX/USB* input An external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system.

An audio source connected to the USB input can be operated25 using the car's audio con- trols. A device connected via the AUX input cannot be controlled via the car.

There is a recess in the right-hand rear edge of the tunnel console where cables can be routed so that the hatch can be closed with- out cables being pinched.

An iPod or MP3 player with rechargeable batteries is recharged (when the ignition is on or the engine is running) if the device is plug- ged into the USB connection.

USB memory To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick, only store music files on it. It takes a lot longer for the system to load storage media that contains anything other than compatible music files.

NOTE

The system supports mobile media com- pliant with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file sys- tem and can handle 1000 folders with a maximum of 254 subfolders/files in every folder. The top level, which can handle up to 1000 subfolders/files, is an exception to this.

NOTE

When using a longer model USB memory stick the use of a USB adapter cable is recommended. This is to avoid mechanical wear to the USB input and the connected USB memory stick.

USB hub It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USB connection and thereby connect multi- ple USB devices simultaneously. Selection of USB device is made in USB mode under USB menu Select USB device.

MP3 player Many MP3 players have their own file sys- tems that are not supported by the audio sys- tem. For use in the system, an MP3 player must be set in USB Removable device/ Mass Storage Device mode.

iPod

An iPod is charged and supplied with power by the USB connection* via the player's con- nection cable.

NOTE

The system only supports the playback of audio files from iPod.

NOTE

When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod play- er's own menu structure.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Connecting an external audio source via AUX/USB* input (p. 396)

Playback and navigation of external audio source (p. 396)

25 Only applies to the media source connected via the USB connection.

11 Audio and media

11

396 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Connecting an external audio source via AUX/USB* input An external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system via any of the connections in the cen- tre console.

Connection points for external audio sources.

To connect the audio source:

1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE to the required sound source USB, iPod or AUX, press OK/MENU. > If USB is selected then Connect USB

is shown in the display screen.

2. Connect your audio source to one of the connections in the centre console's stor- age compartment (see previous illustra- tion).

The text Reading USB is shown in the dis- play screen when the system is loading the storage media's file structure. Depending on the file structure and number of files there may be some delay before loading is finished.

NOTE

The system supports most iPod models produced in 2005 or later.

NOTE

To prevent damage to the USB connec- tion, this is shut off if the USB connection is short-circuited or if a connected USB unit is taking too much power (this may happen if the unit connected does not meet the USB standard). The USB con- nection is reactivated automatically the next time the ignition is turned on, unless the fault persists.

Related information External audio source via AUX/USB* input

(p. 395)

Playback and navigation of external audio source (p. 396)

Playback and navigation of external audio source Playback and navigation of external audio source26

For basic playback and navigation, see Audio and media - operating the system (p. 372). See below for a more detailed description.

Audio files have the symbol , video files27 have the symbol and folders have the symbol .

When playback of a file is complete the play- back of the other files (of the same type) in

26 Only applies to USB and iPod. 27 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 397

that particular folder continues. Change28 of folder takes place automatically when all the files in the current folder have been played back. The system automatically detects and changes setting when a device containing only audio files or only video files is con- nected to the USB port and then it plays back these files. However, the system does not change setting if a device containing a mix- ture of audio and video files is connected to the USB port, but instead the player contin- ues to play back the previous file type.

Search function26

The keypad on the control panel in the centre console can be used to find a filename in the current folder.

The search function is accessed either by turning TUNE (to access the folder structure) or by pressing one of the letter keys. As a let- ter or character in a search string is entered you get closer to your search target.

Start playback of a file by pressing OK/ MENU.

Repeat folder29

This function makes it possible to play files in a folder over and over again. When the last

file has been played out, playback of the first file starts again.

1. Press OK/MENU

2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate the function.

Pause When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE is pressed, the media player is paused. When the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed again, the media player starts. It is also possi- ble to pause via the menu system30, press OK/MENU, select Play/Pause.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Connecting an external audio source via AUX/USB* input (p. 396)

External audio source via AUX/USB* input (p. 395)

Fast forward/reverse (p. 391)

Scan disc track or audio file (p. 421)

Random selection of disc track or audio file (p. 392)

Media player - compatible file formats (p. 394)

DivX Video On Demand (p. 393)

28 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place. 26 Only applies to USB and iPod. 29 Only applies to USB. 30 Does not apply to iPod

11 Audio and media

11

398 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Setting the audio volume for external audio source Set the volume for external audio player. If the volume is too high or too low then the quality of the sound may deteriorate.

If an external audio source (e.g. an MP3 player or iPod) is connected to the AUX input then the audio source that is connected can have a different volume than the audio system's internal volume (e.g. radio). Correct this by adjusting the volume of the input:

1. Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE to AUX and wait a few seconds or press OK/MENU.

2. Press OK/MENU and then turn TUNE to AUX input volume. Confirm with OK/ MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume for the AUX input.

NOTE

If the external audio source's volume is too high or too low, the quality of the sound may deteriorate. The audio quality may also be impaired if the player is charged while the infotainment system is in AUX mode. In which case, avoid charging the player via the 12 V socket.

Related information Audio and media - advanced audio set-

tings (p. 377)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Media Bluetooth* The car's media player (p. 390) is equipped with Bluetooth31 and can wirelessly play streaming audio files from external devices with Bluetooth, such as mobile phones and PDAs.

Media Bluetooth functions, controls overview.

The device must first be registered and con- nected to the car (p. 400).

Navigation and control of the audio can be carried out via the centre console buttons or via the steering wheel keypad*. In some external devices it is also possible to change tracks from the device.

To play back the audio the car's media player must first be set in Bluetooth mode.

31 Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 399

When a mobile phone is connected to the car, it is also possible to remotely control a selection of the mobile phone's functions, see Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403). Switch between the main sources TEL and MEDIA to operate each one's functions.

NOTE

The Bluetooth media player must support the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP). The player should use AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise some functions may not work.

Not all mobile phones and external media players available in the market are fully compatible with the Bluetooth function in the car's media player. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones and external media players.

NOTE

The car's media player can only play the audio files via the Bluetooth function.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Connecting and disconnecting a Bluetooth* device (p. 399)

Scan disc track or audio file (p. 421)

Random selection of disc track or audio file (p. 392)

Connecting and disconnecting a Bluetooth* device The car is equipped with Bluetooth32 and can wirelessly communicate with other Bluetooth devices after registration and con- nection (p. 400).

A maximum of ten Bluetooth devices can be registered. Registration is performed once per device. After registration the device no longer needs to be activated as visible/ searchable.

When the Bluetooth function is active and the last device connected is in range it is con- nected automatically to the car. When the car searches for the last device connected its name is shown in the display screen. To con- nect to another device, press EXIT and select change device (p. 402).

When the Bluetooth device is out of range of the car it is automatically disconnected. It is also possible to manually disconnect (p. 402) a device. If you want to deregister a Bluetooth device from the car, select Removing a Bluetooth* device (p. 403). The car will then not locate the device automati- cally.

It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices connected simultaneously. One phone and one media device, which it is possible to switch between (p. 402). It is also possible to

|| 11 Audio and media

11

400 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

call with the phone and simultaneously stream audio files.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Media Bluetooth* (p. 398)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Registering a Bluetooth* device It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices connected simultaneously. One phone and one media device, which it is possible to switch between. It is also possible to call with the phone and simultaneously stream audio files.

A maximum of ten Bluetooth devices can be registered. Registration is performed once per device. After registration the device no longer needs to be activated as visible/ searchable.

NOTE

If the phone's operating system is updated then it is possible that the registration of the phone is interrupted. In which case, disconnect the phone, see Removing a Bluetooth* device (p. 403) and then reconnect it, see Registering a Bluetooth* device (p. 400).

Connecting an external device takes place in different ways depending on whether or not the device has been connected previously. The connection options below presume that this is the first time the device is being con- nected (registered) and that no other device is connected. The connection options show the connection of a phone. Connecting a media device (p. 398) is performed in the same way

although it starts from the main source MEDIA.

There are two possible ways of connecting devices, either search for the external device from the car, or search for the car from the external device. If one option does not work then try with the other.

If you are not already in the normal view for the phone, press TEL in the centre console.

Example of normal view for phone.

Alternative 1 - search for the external device via the car's menu system 1. Make the external device searchable/visi-

ble via Bluetooth, see the external devi- ce's manual or www.volvocars.com.

32 Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 401

2. Press OK/MENU and follow the instruc- tions on the display screen. > The external device is now connected

to the car and can be controlled from the car.

If connection failed, press EXIT twice and connect the device as described under Alter- native 2.

Alternative 2 - Search for the car with the Bluetooth function of the external device. 1. Make the car searchable/visible via

Bluetooth. Turn TUNE to Phone settings, confirm with OK/MENU, select Discoverable and confirm with OK/ MENU.

2. Select My Volvo Car on the screen of the external device and follow the instruc- tions.

3. Enter a PIN code in the external device and then select to connect.

4. Press OK/MENU and enter the same PIN code via the car keypad in the centre console.

Once the external device is connected, its Bluetooth name appears on the car's display screen and the unit can be controlled from the car.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Connecting and disconnecting a Bluetooth* device (p. 399)

Automatic connection of Bluetooth* device When a Bluetooth device is registered (p. 400) in the car the last external device con- nected is connected automatically when it is within range.

When the Bluetooth function is active and the last device connected is in range it is con- nected automatically. When the car searches for the last device connected its name is shown in the display screen. If the last con- nected device is not available then the sys- tem will try to connect an earlier device.

To connect to another device, press EXIT, select to connect a new device (p. 400) or change to another already registered device (p. 402).

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Connecting and disconnecting a Bluetooth* device (p. 399)

11 Audio and media

11

402 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Changing to another Bluetooth* device It is possible to change from a connected device to another one if there are several devices in the car. The device must first have been registered (p. 402)) to the car.

Changing media device 1. Check that the external device is search-

able/visible via Bluetooth, see the man- ual for the external device.

2. Press MEDIA, select Bluetooth and then Change device. > The car searches for previously con-

nected devices. The external devices detected are specified with their respective Bluetooth name in the dis- play screen.

3. Select the device to be connected. > Connection of the external device

takes place.

Changing phone 1. Check that the external device is search-

able/visible via Bluetooth, see the man- ual for the external device.

2. Press TEL and then select Change phone. > The car searches for previously con-

nected devices. The external devices detected are specified with their respective Bluetooth name in the dis- play screen.

3. Select the device to be connected. > Connection of the external device

takes place.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Connecting and disconnecting a Bluetooth* device (p. 399)

Disconnecting the Bluetooth* device When the Bluetooth device is out of range of the car it is automatically disconnected. It is also possible to disconnect a phone manually.

When the mobile phone has been discon- nected an ongoing call can be continued by using the mobile phone's built-in microphone and speaker.

The handsfree function is deactivated when the engine is switched off and the door is opened33.

If you want to deregister a Bluetooth device from the car, select Remove Bluetooth device (p. 403). The car will then not locate the device automatically.

Manual disconnection of phone The phone can be manually disconnected in phone mode under Phone menu Disconnect phone.

NOTE

Even when your mobile phone has been manually disconnected, some mobile phones may automatically couple up to the last handsfree unit connected, e.g. when a new call begins.

33 Only Keyless Drive.

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 403

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Connecting and disconnecting a Bluetooth* device (p. 399)

Media Bluetooth* (p. 398)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Removing a Bluetooth* device If you do not want a Bluetooth* device regis- tered to the car any longer then it is possible to remove (deregister) it from the car. The car will then not locate the device automatically.

Removing a media device Press MEDIA, select Bluetooth Remove Bluetooth device.

Removing a phone Press TEL, select Phone menu Remove Bluetooth device.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Connecting and disconnecting a Bluetooth* device (p. 399)

Media Bluetooth* (p. 398)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Bluetooth handsfree phone A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth

can be connected wirelessly to the car34.

The device must first be registered and con- nected to the car (p. 400).

The audio and media system works as handsfree, with the option to remote control a selection of the mobile phone's functions via the centre console buttons or via the steering wheel keypad*. The mobile phone can be operated by its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is connected.

When another Bluetooth device is con- nected to the car, it is also possible to use the media device, see Media Bluetooth* (p. 398). Switch between the main sources TEL and MEDIA to operate each one's functions.

NOTE

Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the handsfree function. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo dealer for information on compatible phones.

Activate A short press on TEL activates/searches last connected phone. If a phone is already con- nected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options

34 Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

|| 11 Audio and media

11

404 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

for the phone. The symbol indicates that a phone is connected.

To call 1. Make sure that the symbol appears

at the top of the display screen and that the handsfree function is in phone mode.

2. Dial either the desired number or the speed dial number (p. 411). Or in normal view turn TUNE to the right to access the phone book, and to the left for the call register for all calls. For information on the phone book, see Phone book (p. 406).

3. Press OK/MENU.

The call is interrupted with EXIT.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth* handsfree phone - overview (p. 404)

Connecting and disconnecting a Bluetooth* device (p. 399)

Making and receiving calls (p. 404)

Bluetooth handsfree phone - audio set- tings (p. 405)

Bluetooth version information (p. 406)

Bluetooth* handsfree phone - overview System overview for Bluetooth* handsfree phone.

System overview

Mobile phone

Microphone

Steering wheel keypad

Control panel in centre console

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Connecting and disconnecting a Bluetooth* device (p. 399)

Making and receiving calls Making and receiving calls and functions for making and receiving calls.

Incoming call Press OK/MENU to answer the call, even

if the audio system is in e.g. RADIO or MEDIA mode.

Refuse or end with EXIT.

Automatic answer The automatic answer function means that calls are accepted automatically.

Activate/deactivate in phone mode under Phone menu Call options Auto answer.

In call menu Press OK/MENU during an ongoing call to access the following functions:

Mute - audio system microphone is muted.

Mobile phone - the call is transferred from handsfree to the mobile phone. For some mobile phones the connection is interrupted. This is normal. The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect.

Dial number - option to call a third party using the number keys (current call set in standby).

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 405

Call lists The call lists are copied to the handsfree function at each new connection and are then updated during the connection. In normal view, turn to the left with TUNE to see the call register for All calls .

In phone mode it is possible to see all the call lists under Phone menu All calls:

All calls

Missed calls

Answered calls

Dialled calls

Call duration

NOTE

Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled numbers in reverse order.

Voice mailbox In normal view a speed dial number for the voice mailbox can be programmed in and then accessed later via a long press on 1.

Voice mailbox number is changed in phone mode under Phone menu Call options Voicemail number Change number. If there is no number stored then this menu can be reached with one long press on 1.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - dialling a contact (p. 418)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - dialling from the call register (p. 418)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - calling the voice mailbox (p. 418)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Bluetooth handsfree phone - audio set- tings (p. 405)

Phone book (p. 406)

Bluetooth handsfree phone - audio settings It is possible to adjust the call volume, audio system volume and ring signal volume, and change the ring tone.

Phone call volume The phone call volume can only be changed during a call. Use the steering wheel keypad* or turn the VOL control.

Audio system volume Providing there is no ongoing call taking place, the audio system volume is controlled as usual by turning VOL.

If an audio source is active during an incom- ing call then it can be muted automatically. Activate/deactivate in phone mode under Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume Mute radio/media.

Ring volume In phone mode go to Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume Ring volume and adjust by turning VOL. Press OK/MENU to hear the audio volume. Press EXIT to save.

Ring signals The handsfree function has integrated ring signals that can be selected in phone mode under Phone menu Phone settings

|| 11 Audio and media

11

406 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Sounds and volume Ring signals Ring signal 1 etc.

NOTE

For some mobile phones, the ringtone on the phone connected will not be switched off when one of the inbuilt signals for the handsfree system is used.

In order to select the connected phone's ring signal35, go in phone mode to Phone menu

Phone settings Sounds and volume Ring signals Mobile phone ring

signal.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Bluetooth version information Show the car's current Bluetooth version.

The car's current Bluetooth version can be seen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth software version in car.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Media Bluetooth* (p. 398)

Phone book There are two phone books. These are merged into one in the car and are displayed as a single phone book in the car.

The car downloads the mobile phone's phone book and only displays this phone book when the mobile phone from which this phone book was downloaded is con- nected.

The car also has a built-in phone book. This contains all the contacts stored in the car irrespective of which phone was connected when saving them. These con- tacts are visible for all users, regardless of the mobile phone that is connected to the car. If a contact is saved in the car then the symbol is shown in front of the contact in the phone book.

NOTE

Changes made from the car to a record in the mobile phone's telephone book will result in a new record in the car's tele- phone book, i.e. changes will not be saved to the phone. From the car, this will now look like you have double records, with dif- ferent icons. Note also that when a short- cut number is saved or a change to a con- tact is made, this will result in a new record in the car's phone book.

35 Not supported by all mobile phones.

11 Audio and media

11

407

All use of the phone book requires that the symbol appears at the top of the dis-

play screen and that the handsfree function is in phone mode.

The audio and media system stores a copy of each registered mobile phone's phone book. The phone book can be copied automatically to the audio and media system during each connection.

Activate/deactivate the function in phone mode under Phone menu Phone settings Download phone book.

If the phone book contains a ringing caller's contact information then this is shown in the display screen.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Phone book - quick search for contacts (p. 407)

Phone book - character table keypad in centre console (p. 408)

Phone book - searching for contacts (p. 409)

Phone book - new contact (p. 410)

Phone book - speed dial numbers (p. 411)

Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 412)

Phone book - memory status (p. 412)

Phone book - clearing (p. 412) Phone book - quick search for contacts In normal view turn TUNE to the right to show a list of contacts.

Turn TUNE to select and press OK/MENU to call.

Under the name of the contact is the phone number that is selected by default. If the sym- bol > appears to the right of the contact then there are several phone numbers stored for the contact. Press OK/MENU to show the numbers. Change and dial a number other than that selected by default by turning TUNE. Press OK/MENU to dial.

Search the list of contacts via the centre con- sole's keypad, enter the start of the contact's name, see Character table keypad in centre console (p. 408) for the function of the but- tons.

The list of contacts can also be accessed from normal view by pressing and holding the button on the centre console's keypad with the letter that the contact searched for starts with. For example, a long press on the button for 6 gives instant access to that part of the list where the contacts with the letter M are located.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

11 Audio and media

11

408

Phone book (p. 406)

Phone book - character table keypad in centre console (p. 408)

Phone book - searching for contacts (p. 409)

Phone book - new contact (p. 410)

Phone book - speed dial numbers (p. 411)

Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 412)

Phone book - memory status (p. 412)

Phone book - clearing (p. 412)

Phone book - character table keypad in centre console Character table of possible characters for use in the phone book.

Key Function

Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1

A B C 2

D E F 3

G H I 4

J K L 5

M N O 6

P Q R S 7

T U V 8

W X Y Z 9

Shift between upper and lower case letter.

Key Function

+ 0 p w

# *

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Phone book - quick search for contacts (p. 407)

Phone book (p. 406)

Phone book - searching for contacts (p. 409)

Phone book - new contact (p. 410)

Phone book - speed dial numbers (p. 411)

Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 412)

Phone book - memory status (p. 412)

Phone book - clearing (p. 412)

11 Audio and media

11

}} 409

Phone book - searching for contacts Searching for contacts in the phone book.

Search contacts using the text wheel.

Character list

Changing the input mode (see table below)

Phone book

To search for or edit a contact, go in phone mode to Phone menu Phone book Search.

NOTE

There is no text wheel for High Perform- ance, so TUNE cannot be used there to input characters: only the digit and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can be used for this.

1. Turn36 TUNE to the desired letter, press OK/MENU to confirm. The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can also be used.

2. Continue with the next letter and so on. The result of the search is shown in the phone book (3).

3. To change the input mode to numbers or special characters, or to go to the phone book, turn TUNE to one of the options (see explanation in the table below) in the list for changing the input mode (2), press OK/MENU.

123/ABC Change between letters and numbers with OK/MENU.

More Change to special characters with OK/MENU.

Leads to the phone book (3). Turn TUNE to select a contact, press OK/MENU to see the saved numbers and other information.

A short press on EXIT deletes an input char- acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered characters.

By pressing a number key in the centre con- sole when the text wheel is shown (see illus- tration above), a new character list (1) appears in the display screen. Continue repeatedly pressing the number key to the desired letter and then release. Continue with the next letter and so on. When a button is depressed the entry is confirmed when another button is depressed.

To enter a number, hold in the corresponding number key.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

36 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media

11

410

Phone book (p. 406)

Phone book - character table keypad in centre console (p. 408)

Phone book - quick search for contacts (p. 407)

Phone book - new contact (p. 410)

Phone book - speed dial numbers (p. 411)

Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 412)

Phone book - memory status (p. 412)

Phone book - clearing (p. 412)

Phone book - new contact Create new contact in the phone book.

Entering letters for New contact.

Changing the input mode (see table below)

Input field

New contacts can be added in phone mode under Phone menu Phone book New contact.

NOTE

There is no text wheel for High Perform- ance, so TUNE cannot be used there to input characters: only the digit and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can be used for this.

1. When the Name row is selected, press OK/MENU to reach the input mode (illus- tration above).

2. Turn37 TUNE to the desired letter, press OK/MENU to confirm. The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can also be used.

3. Continue with the next letter and so on. The name entered is shown in the input field (2) in the display screen.

4. To change the input mode to numbers, special characters, change between uppercase/lowercase letters, etc., turn TUNE to one of the options (see explana- tion in the table below) in the list (1) and then press OK/MENU.

When the name has been fully entered, select OK in the list on the display screen (1) and press OK/MENU. Now continue with the tele- phone number in the same way as above.

When the telephone number has been entered, press OK/MENU and select a tele- phone number type (Mobile phone, Home, Work or General). Press OK/MENU to con- firm.

When all details have been filled in, select Save contact in the menu to save the con- tact.

37 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media

11

411

123/ABC Change between letters and numbers with OK/MENU.

More Change to special characters with OK/MENU.

OK Save and go back to Add contact with OK/MENU.

Change between uppercase and lowercase letters with OK/ MENU.

Press OK/MENU, the cursor moves to the input field (2) at the top of the display screen. The cursor can now be moved, with TUNE, to the appropriate place to e.g. insert new letters or delete with EXIT. To be able to insert new letters first go back to the input mode, by pressing OK/MENU.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Phone book (p. 406)

Phone book - quick search for contacts (p. 407)

Phone book - character table keypad in centre console (p. 408)

Phone book - searching for contacts (p. 409)

Phone book - speed dial numbers (p. 411)

Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 412)

Phone book - memory status (p. 412)

Phone book - clearing (p. 412)

Phone book - speed dial numbers Store as speed dial number in order to easily dial a number or a contact.

Use phone mode to add speed dial numbers under Phone menu Phone book Speed dial.

Dialling with speed dial numbers can be per- formed in phone mode using the number keys on the keypad in the centre console, by pressing a number key and then pressing OK/MENU. If there is no contact stored on the speed dial number then an option is shown to save a contact to the selected speed dial number.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Phone book (p. 406)

Phone book - quick search for contacts (p. 407)

Phone book - character table keypad in centre console (p. 408)

Phone book - searching for contacts (p. 409)

Phone book - new contact (p. 410)

Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 412)

Phone book - memory status (p. 412)

Phone book - clearing (p. 412)

11 Audio and media

11

412

Phone book - receiving a vCard Receiving electronic business cards (vCard) to the car's phone book.

It is possible to receive a vCard to the car's phone book from other mobile phones (other than the one currently connected to the car). In order to allow this the car is set to visible mode for Bluetooth. The function is acti- vated in phone mode under Phone menu Phone book Receive vCard.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Phone book (p. 406)

Phone book - quick search for contacts (p. 407)

Phone book - character table keypad in centre console (p. 408)

Phone book - searching for contacts (p. 409)

Phone book - new contact (p. 410)

Phone book - speed dial numbers (p. 411)

Phone book - memory status (p. 412)

Phone book - clearing (p. 412)

Phone book - memory status See phone book memory status.

Memory status of the car's phone book and the connected mobile phone's phone book can be seen in phone mode under Phone menu Phone book Memory status.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Phone book (p. 406)

Phone book - quick search for contacts (p. 407)

Phone book - character table keypad in centre console (p. 408)

Phone book - searching for contacts (p. 409)

Phone book - new contact (p. 410)

Phone book - speed dial numbers (p. 411)

Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 412)

Phone book - clearing (p. 412)

Phone book - clearing Clear the car's built-in phone book (p. 406).

The car's phone book can be deleted, this is carried out in phone mode under Phone menu Phone book Clear phone book.

NOTE

Deleting the car's telephone book only deletes contacts in the car's telephone book. Contacts in the mobile phone's phone book are not deleted.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Phone book (p. 406)

Phone book - quick search for contacts (p. 407)

Phone book - character table keypad in centre console (p. 408)

Phone book - searching for contacts (p. 409)

Phone book - new contact (p. 410)

Phone book - speed dial numbers (p. 411)

Phone book - receiving a vCard (p. 412)

Phone book - memory status (p. 412)

11 Audio and media

11

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 413

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone Voice recognition38 allows the driver to voice- activate certain functions in a Bluetooth-con- nected mobile phone or in Volvo's navigation system.

NOTE

The information in this section describes the use of voice commands to control a mobile phone connected using Bluetooth. For detailed infor- mation on using a Bluetooth-con- nected mobile phone, see Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403).

The Volvo navigation system has a separate supplement which contains more information on voice recognition and voice commands to control the system.

Voice commands offer convenience and help the driver to avoid being distracted, and instead concentrate on driving and focus attention on the road and traffic conditions.

WARNING

The driver always holds overall responsibil- ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and complying with all applicable rules of the road.

The voice recognition system allows the driver to voice-activate certain functions of a Bluetooth-connected mobile phone and in Volvo's navigation system, while the driver can keep his/her hands on the wheel at the same time. The input data are in dialogue form with spoken commands from the user and verbal replies from the system. The voice recognition system uses the same micro- phone as the Bluetooth handsfree system (see Bluetooth* handsfree phone - overview (p. 404)) and the voice recognition system's replies come via the car's speakers.

Getting started with voice recognition

Steering wheel keypad.

Button for voice recognition

Before voice commands to a mobile phone can be used the mobile phone must be paired and connected via Bluetooth hands- free. If a telephone command is given and no mobile phone is paired, then the system will provide information about this. For informa- tion on pairing and connecting a mobile phone, see Registering a Bluetooth* device (p. 400).

Press the button for voice recognition (1) in order to activate the system and initiate a dialogue with voice commands. The system will then display commonly used commands in the display screen in the centre console.

38 Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo's navigation system.

|| 11 Audio and media

11

414 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keep the following things in mind when you use the voice recognition system:

For a command - speak after the tone, with normal voice at normal speed.

Do not speak while the system is replying (the system cannot understand com- mands during this time).

The car's doors and windows must be closed.

Avoid background noise in the passenger compartment.

NOTE

If the driver is unsure of which command to use, he (she) can say "Help" - the sys- tem then responds with a few different commands which can be used in the cur- rent situation.

Voice commands can be disabled by:

saying "Cancel"

not speaking

a long press on the steering wheel but- ton for Voice recognition

Press EXIT or another main source button (e.g. MEDIA).

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Bluetooth* handsfree phone - overview (p. 404)

Connecting and disconnecting a Bluetooth* device (p. 399)

Language options for voice recognition* control of a mobile phone (p. 414)

Help functions for voice recognition* con- trol of a mobile phone (p. 415)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - user setting and voice volume (p. 416)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - voice commands (p. 416)

Language options for voice recognition* control of a mobile phone Possible language options for voice recogni- tion* control of a mobile phone are selected in the menu system for MY CAR, see MY CAR - Voice settings (p. 112).

Language list.

Voice recognition is not possible for all lan- guages. Languages available for voice recog- nition are marked with an icon in the lan- guage list - . Changing the language is per- formed in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 104).

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 415

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone (p. 413)

MY CAR - Voice settings (p. 112)

Help functions for voice recognition* control of a mobile phone Help functions are available to help you become familiar with the system and the facility to teach the voice recognition system your voice and your accent.

Instructions: A function that helps you become familiar with the system and the procedure for giving commands.

Voice training: A function that enables the voice recognition system to learn to know your voice and your accent. The function provides an opportunity to voice train two user profiles.

The help functions can be accessed by pressing the MY CAR button on the control panel in the centre console and then turning TUNE to the desired menu option.

Instructions The instructions can be started in two ways:

NOTE

This instruction and voice training can only be started when the car is parked.

Press the button for voice recognition (p. 372) and say "Voice tutorial".

Activate the instructions in the menu sys- tem MY CAR under Settings Voice settings Voice tutorial. For a descrip-

tion of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).

The instructions are divided into 3 lessons, which take around 5 minutes in total to com- plete. The system starts with the first lesson. To skip a lesson and go to the next one, press the button for voice recognition and say "Next". Go back to the previous lesson by saying "Previous".

Exit the instructions by means of a long press on the button for voice recognition.

Voice training The system displays up to fifteen phrases for you to say. Voice training can be started in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Voice settings Voice training. Select between User 1 or User 2. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).

After voice training has been completed, remember to set your user profile under Voice user setting.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone (p. 413)

11 Audio and media

11

416 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - user setting and voice volume User profile and voice volume can be set in the MY CAR menu system.

User setting - Two user profiles can be set, the function is activated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Voice settings Voice user setting. Select between User 1 or User 2. For a descrip- tion of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).

Voice output volume - Can be changed in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Voice settings Voice output volume. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone (p. 413)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - voice commands It is possible to use voice recognition to con- trol the mobile phone with predefined voice commands.

The driver initiates a dialogue with voice com- mands by pressing the button for voice rec- ognition (p. 413).

Once a dialogue has been started, commonly used commands will be shown in the display screen. Greyed-out text or text within brack- ets is not included in the spoken command.

When the driver becomes accustomed to the system, he/she can speed up the command dialogue and skip the prompts from the sys- tem, by briefly pressing the button for voice recognition.

Commands can be given in several ways The command "Phone call contact" can be pronounced as e.g.:

"Phone > Call contact" - Say "Phone", wait for the system's reply, and then con- tinue by saying "Call contact."

or

"Phone call contact" - Say the whole command in one sequence.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone (p. 413)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - quick commands (p. 417)

Voice guidance* control of a mobile phone - dialling a number (p. 417)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - dialling from the call register (p. 418)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - dialling a contact (p. 418)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - calling the voice mailbox (p. 418)

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 417

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - quick commands Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone can be performed with a number of prede- fined quick commands.

Quick commands for the phone can be found in the menu system MY CAR under Settings

Voice settings Voice command list Phone commands and General commands. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 104).

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - voice commands (p. 416)

Voice guidance* control of a mobile phone - dialling a number How to describe a number to control a mobile phone using voice recognition.

The system understands the numbers 0 (zero) to 9 (nine). These numbers can be pro- nounced individually, in groups of several numbers at a time, or the whole number all at once. Numbers greater than 9 (nine) cannot be handled by the system, e.g. 10 (ten) or 11 (eleven) are not possible.

The following is an example of a dialogue with voice commands. The system's reply will vary depending on the situation.

The user starts the dialogue by saying:

Phone > call number

or

Phone call number

System reply

Number?

User action

Start saying the numbers (as individual units, i.e. six-eight-seven, etc.) in the phone num- ber. If you say several numbers and pause, the system will repeat them, and then say "Continue".

Continue to say the numbers. When finished, finish the command by saying "Call".

You can also change the number by say- ing the commands "Correct" (which dele- tes the last spoken group of numbers) or "Delete" (which deletes the whole spoken phone number).

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - voice commands (p. 416)

11 Audio and media

11

418 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - dialling from the call register Use voice recognition with the mobile phone to dial from the call register.

The following dialogue allows you to make a phone call from one of your mobile phone's call registers.

The user starts the dialogue by saying:

Phone > call from the call register

or

Phone call from the call register

Continue by responding to the system's prompts.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - voice commands (p. 416)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - dialling a contact Use voice recognition with the mobile phone to dial a contact.

The following dialogue allows you to call your pre-defined contacts in the mobile phone.

The user starts the dialogue by saying:

Phone > call contact

or

Phone call contact

Continue by responding to the system's prompts.

Consider the following when you call a con- tact:

If there are several contacts with similar names, they will be presented in the screen in the numbered rows and the system prompts you to select a row num- ber.

If there are more rows in the list than can be displayed simultaneously, saying "Down" allows you to scroll down in the list (and saying "Up" allows you to scroll up in the list).

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - voice commands (p. 416)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - calling the voice mailbox Use voice recognition with a mobile phone to call the voice mailbox.

The following dialogue allows you to call your voice mailbox to check if you have received any messages. The phone number for your voice mailbox must be registered in the Bluetooth function, see Making and receiv- ing calls (p. 404).

The user starts the dialogue by saying:

Phone > call voice mailbox

or

Phone call voice mailbox

Continue by responding to the system's prompts.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Voice recognition* control of a mobile phone - voice commands (p. 416)

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 419

Save as favourite Save frequently used functions as favourites. The function can then be started easily by pressing the FAVbutton.

To save a function as a favourite:

1. Select a main source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA).

2. Select a wavelength or source (AM, Disc, etc.).

3. Press and hold the FAV button until the "favourites menu" is shown.

4. Turn TUNE to select an option from the list and press OK/MENU to save. > When the main source (e.g. RADIO,

MEDIA) is active the stored function is available via a short press on FAV.

Related information Favourites (p. 376)

Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* disc For basic playback and navigation, see Audio and media - operating the system (p. 372). See below for a more detailed description.

Starting playback of a disc Press the MEDIA button, turn TUNE until Disc is displayed, press OK/MENU. If there is a disc in the media player then the disc starts playing back automatically, otherwise Insert disc is shown in the display screen. Then insert a disc, with text side up. The disc starts to play back automatically.

If a disc with audio/video files is inserted into the player then the disc's folder structure needs to be loaded. Depending on the quality of the disc and the quantity of information there may be a certain delay before playback starts.

Disc eject Press the eject button (p. 372) to eject the disc.

A disc remains in the ejected position for about 12 seconds, after which it is inserted back into the player for safety reasons.

Pause in playback (pause) When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE is pressed, the media player is paused. When

the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed again, the media player starts. It is also possi- ble to pause via the menu system39, press OK/MENU, select Play/Pause.

NOTE

A video film is only shown when the car is stationary. When the car is moving at a speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is shown and No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen, although the audio is heard during this time. The picture is shown again as soon as the car's speed falls below about 6 km/h.

NOTE

Some audio files that are copy-protected by record companies or privately copied audio files cannot be loaded by the player.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Playback and navigation of burned discs with audio/video files (p. 420)

Playback and navigation of DVD video discs (p. 392)

Fast forward/reverse (p. 391)

Scan disc track or audio file (p. 421)

39 Does not apply to CD Audio

11 Audio and media

11

420 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Random selection of disc track or audio file (p. 392)

Media player - compatible file formats (p. 394)

Playback and navigation of burned discs with audio/video files Playback and navigation of burned discs with audio/video files40.

NOTE

A video film is only shown when the car is stationary. When the car is moving at a speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is shown and No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen, although the audio is heard during this time. The picture is shown again as soon as the car's speed falls below about 6 km/h.

NOTE

Some audio files that are copy-protected by record companies or privately copied audio files cannot be loaded by the player.

Audio files have the symbol , video files40 have the symbol and folders have the symbol .

When playback of a file is complete the play- back of the other files (of the same type) in that particular folder continues. Change41 of folder takes place automatically when all the files in the current folder have been played back. The system automatically detects and

changes setting when a disc containing only audio files or only video files is loaded into the media player and then plays back these files. However, the system does not change setting if a disc containing a mixture of audio and video files is loaded into the media player, but instead the player continues to play back the previous file type.

Repeat folder This function makes it possible to play files in a folder over and over again. When the last file has been played out, playback of the first file starts again.

1. Press OK/MENU

2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder

3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate the function.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* disc (p. 419)

Playback and navigation of DVD video discs (p. 392)

Fast forward/reverse (p. 391)

Scan disc track or audio file (p. 421)

Random selection of disc track or audio file (p. 392)

40 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 41 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 421

Media player - compatible file formats (p. 394)

DivX Video On Demand (p. 393)

Scan disc track or audio file This function play backs the first ten seconds of each disc track/audio file42.

To scan selected source:

1. Press OK/MENU

2. Turn TUNE to Scan > The first 10 seconds of each disc track

or audio file are played.

3. Cancel the scan with EXIT, the disc track or audio file being played back will con- tinue playing.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Playback and navigation of CD/DVD* disc (p. 419)

Playback and navigation of external audio source (p. 396)

Media Bluetooth* (p. 398)

TV* The TV picture is only shown when the car is stationary. When the car is moving at a speed over approx. 6 km/h the picture disappears, although the audio is heard during this time. The picture reappears when the car has stop- ped.

TV functions, control overview.

NOTE

This system only supports TV broadcasts in the countries that broadcast in MPEG-2 or MPEG-4 format and follow the DVB-T standard. The system does not support analogue broadcasts.

42 Does not apply to DVD video discs. For externally connected audio sources via the AUX/USB input this only applies to USB and iPod. Not supported by all mobile phones.

|| 11 Audio and media

11

422 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

The TV picture is only shown when the car is stationary. When the car is moving at a speed over about 6 km/h the picture dis- appears, No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen, although the audio is heard during this time. The picture reappears when the car has stopped.

NOTE

The reception is dependent both on how good the signal strength and signal quality are. The transmission may be disturbed by various factors such as tall buildings or the TV transmitter being far away. Coverage level can also vary depending on where in the country you are located.

IMPORTANT

A TV licence is required for this product in some countries.

Watch TV Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until TV is

shown in the display, press OK/MENU. > A search starts and after a short while

the most recently used channel is shown.

Changing channel It is possible to change channel as follows:

Turn TUNE, a list of all available channels in the area is shown. If any of these chan- nels is already saved as a preset then its preset number is shown to the right of the channel name. Continue turning TUNE to reach the desired channel and press OK/ MENU.

By pressing the preset buttons (0-9).

Via a short press on the / but- tons the next available channel in the area is shown.

NOTE

If the car has been moved within the coun- try, for example, from one city to another, it is not certain that the presets are availa- ble at the new location as the frequency range may have changed. Then do another search and save a new preset list; see Save available TV channels as presets (p. 423).

NOTE

If no reception is available on the preset buttons, it may be because the car is at a location other than where the scan of TV channels was run, for example, if the car was driven from Germany to France. A new selection of country and a new search may then need to be carried out.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Searching TV* channels/Preset list (p. 423)

TV* - channel management (p. 423)

Information about the current TV* pro- gramme (p. 424)

Teletext* (p. 424)

Picture settings (p. 394)

Reception of TV* channel is lost. (p. 425)

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 423

Searching TV* channels/Preset list After a search of TV channels the available channels are saved in a preset list.

1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.

2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/ MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to Select country and press OK/MENU. > If one or more countries have previ-

ously been selected then they are shown in a list.

4. Turn TUNE to either Other countries or one of the previously selected countries. Press OK/MENU. > A list of all available countries is

shown.

5. Turn TUNE to the desired country (e.g. Sweden) and press OK/MENU. > An automatic scan for available TV

channels starts, this scan takes a little while. During this time the figure for each channel found and added as a preset is shown. When the scan is complete a message is shown and the picture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 presets) has now been created and is available. To change channel, see TV* (p. 421).

The scan and preset storage can be cancel- led with EXIT.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

TV* (p. 421)

TV* - channel management (p. 423)

TV* - channel management The preset list can be edited. You can change the order of the channels that are shown in the preset list. A TV channel can have more than one place in the preset list. The TV chan- nel positions can also vary in the preset list.

To change the order in the preset list, go in TV mode to TV menu Reorganise presets.

1. Turn TUNE to the channel you want to move in the list and confirm with OK/ MENU. > The selected channel is highlighted.

2. Turn TUNE to the new location in the list and confirm with OK/MENU. > The channels change places with each

other.

After the preset channels (max. 30) come all the other channels available in the area. It is possible to move a channel up to a place in the preset list.

Save the available TV channels as presets If the car has been moved within the country, for example, from one city to another, it is not certain that the presets are available at the new location as the frequency range may have changed. In which case, carry out another scan and save a new preset list.

1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.

|| 11 Audio and media

11

424 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/ MENU.

3. Turn TUNE to Autostore and press OK/ MENU. > An automatic scan for available TV

channels starts, this scan takes a little while. During this time the figure for each channel found and added as a preset is shown. When the scan is complete a message is shown and the picture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 presets) has now been created and is available. To change channel, see TV* (p. 421).

Scanning the TV channels This function automatically scans through the frequency range for all channels available in the area where you are. When a channel is found, it is shown for approx. 10 seconds before scanning is resumed. Scanning is stopped with EXIT, then the channel that you just watched continues to be shown. Scan- ning does not affect the preset list.

Activate scanning in TV mode under TV menu Scan.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

TV* (p. 421)

Searching TV* channels/Preset list (p. 423)

Information about the current TV* programme Press the INFO button (p. 372) in order to dis- play information about the current pro- gramme, the next programme and its start time.

If the INFO button is pressed once more then additional information on the current pro- gramme can sometimes be displayed, such as start and end times and a brief description of the current programme.

To return to the TV picture, wait several sec- onds or press EXIT.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

TV* (p. 421)

Teletext* It is possible to look at Teletext.

Proceed as follows:

1. Press the button on the remote control.

2. Enter the page number (3 digits) with the number keys (0-9) to select page. > The page is shown automatically.

Enter new page number, or press the remote control buttons / to go to the next page.

Return to TV screen with EXIT or by pressing the button on the remote control.

It is also possible to control the teletext with the coloured buttons on the remote control.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

TV* (p. 421)

Remote control* (p. 425)

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 425

Reception of TV* channel is lost. If the reception for the TV channel that is being shown disappears then the picture will freeze. When the reception returns the display starts again.

If the reception for the TV channel that is being shown disappears then the picture will freeze. Shortly after this a message appears informing that the reception has been lost for the current TV channel, and a new search for the channel continues. When the reception returns the display of the TV channel starts immediately. It is possible to change channel at any time when the message is shown.

If the message Reception lost, searching is shown then this is because the system has detected that there is no reception for all TV channels. One possible reason may be that a border has been crossed and that the system is set to the wrong country. In which case, change to the right country in accordance with Searching TV* channels/Preset list (p. (p. 423)).

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

TV* (p. 421)

Remote control* The remote control can be used for all func- tions in the audio and media system. The remote control's buttons have similar func- tions as the buttons on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad.

Corresponds to TUNE in the centre con- sole.

When using the remote control, first press the remote control's button to position F.

|| 11 Audio and media

11

426 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Then aim the remote control at the IR receiver, which is located to the right of the INFO button (p. 372) in the centre console.

WARNING

Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

NOTE

Do not expose the remote control to direct sunlight (e.g. on the instrument panel) - otherwise problems may arise with the batteries.

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Remote control* - functions (p. 426)

Remote control* - battery replacement (p. 427)

Remote control* - functions Possible functions to be controlled using the remote control*.

Key Function

F = Front display screen

Change to navigation*

Change to radio source (AM, FM1 etc.)

Change to media source (Disc, TV* etc.)

Change to Bluetooth hands- free*

Scroll/fast rewind, change track/ song.

Play/pause

Stop

Scroll/fast forward, change track/song

Menu

To previous, cancels function, deletes input characters

Key Function

Navigate up/down

Navigate right/left

Confirm selection or go to the menu system for the selected source

Volume, decrease

Volume, increase

0-9 Preset channels, number and letter input

Shortcuts for favourite setting

Information about the current programme, song, etc. Also used when there is more infor- mation available than can be shown in the display screen

Selection of language for sound- track

Subtitles, selection of language for text

Teletext*, On/Off

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 427

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Remote control* (p. 425)

Remote control* - battery replacement How to replace the batteries in the remote control for the audio and media system

NOTE

Battery life is normally 1-4 years and depends on how much the remote control is used.

The remote control is powered by four batter- ies of the AA/LR6 type.

Take along extra batteries for a long journey.

1. Push down the catch on the battery cover and slide the battery cover in the direc- tion of the infrared lens.

2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new batteries in accordance with the symbols in the battery compartment and fit them.

3. Refit the cover.

NOTE

Be sure to dispose of the exhausted bat- teries in an environmentally safe manner.

Related information Remote control* (p. 425)

11 Audio and media

11

428 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Audio and media - menu overview Overview of possible options and settings in the audio and media system.

RADIO Menu overview - AM (p. 428)

Menu overview - FM (p. 429)

Menu overview - Digital radio (DAB)* (p. 429)

MEDIA Menu overview - CD Audio (p. 431)

Main overview - CD/DVD Data (p. 430)

Menu overview - DVD Video (p. 431)

Menu overview - iPod (p. 432)

Menu overview - USB (p. 433)

Menu overview - Media Bluetooth (p. 433)

Menu overview - AUX (p. 434)

Menu overview - TV (p. 435)

TEL Menu overview - Bluetooth handsfree (p.

434)

Related information Audio and media - operating the system

(p. 372)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Menu overview - AM Overview of possible options and settings for AM radio.

Main menu AM See page

Show presets

See footnote A (p. 381)

Scan (p. 387)

Audio settings

See footnote B (p. 377)

Sound stage

See footnote C

(p. 378)

Equalizer

See footnote D

(p. 378)

Volume compensation (p. 378)

Reset all audio settings

(p. 377)

A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre- mium Sound Multimedia.

B The menu options for audio settings are the same for all audio sources.

C Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. D Does not apply to Performance.

Related information Audio and media - menu overview (p.

428)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 429

Menu overview - FM Overview of possible options and settings for FM radio.

Main menu FM1/FM2 See page

TP (p. 383)

Show radio text (p. 386)

Show presets

See footnote A (p. 381)

Scan (p. 387)

News settings (p. 384)

Advanced settings

REG (p. 387)

Alternative frequency (p. 386)

EON (p. 384)

Set TP favourite (p. 383)

PTY settings (p. 384)

Reset all FM settings (p. 387)

Audio settings (p. 377)

Sound stage

See footnote B

(p. 378)

Equalizer

See footnote C

(p. 378)

Volume compensation (p. 378)

Reset all audio settings

(p. 377)

A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre- mium Sound Multimedia.

B Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. C Does not apply to Performance.

Related information Audio and media - menu overview (p.

428)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Menu overview - Digital radio (DAB)* Overview of possible options and settings for DAB radio*.

Main menu DAB1*/DAB2* See page

Ensemble learn (p. 388)

PTY filtering (p. 384)

Turn off PTY filtering (p. 384)

Show radio text (p. 385)

Show presets

See footnote A (p. 381)

Scan (p. 387)

Advanced settings

DAB linking (p. 389)

DAB band (p. 389)

Sub channels (p. 390)

Show PTY text (p. 384)

|| 11 Audio and media

11

430

Reset all DAB settings (p. 390)

Audio settings (p. 377)

Sound stage

See footnote B

(p. 378)

Equalizer

See footnote C

(p. 378)

Volume compensation (p. 378)

Reset all audio settings

(p. 377)

A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre- mium Sound Multimedia.

B Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. C Does not apply to Performance.

Related information Audio and media - menu overview (p.

428)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Main overview - CD/DVD Data Overview of possible options and settings for CD/DVD43 Data.

Main menu CD/DVDA Data (Disc menu)

See page

Play

Pause

(p. 419)

Stop (p. 419)

Random (p. 392)

Repeat folder (p. 420)

Change subtitles (p. 419)

Change audio track (p. 419)

Scan (p. 421)

Audio settings (p. 377)

Sound stage

See footnote B

(p. 378)

Equalizer

See footnote C

(p. 378)

Volume compensation (p. 378)

Reset all audio settings

(p. 377)

A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre- mium Sound Multimedia.

B Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. C Does not apply to Performance.

Related information Audio and media - menu overview (p.

428)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

43 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 431

Menu overview - CD Audio Overview of possible options and settings for CD Audio.

Main menu CD Audio (Disc menu)

See page

Random (p. 392)

Scan (p. 421)

Audio settings (p. 377)

Sound stage

See footnote A

(p. 378)

Equalizer

See footnote B

(p. 378)

Volume compensation (p. 378)

Reset all audio settings

(p. 377)

A Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. B Does not apply to Performance.

Related information Audio and media - menu overview (p.

428)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Menu overview - DVD Video Overview of possible options and settings for DVD44 Video.

Main menu DVDA Video (Disc menu)

See page

DVD disc menu (p. 392)

Play/Pause/Continue (p. 392)

Stop (p. 392)

Subtitles (p. 392)

Audio tracks (p. 392)

Advanced settings

Angle (p. 393)

DivX VOD code (p. 393)

Audio settings (p. 377)

Sound stage (p. 378)

Equalizer (p. 378)

Volume compensation (p. 378)

Reset all audio settings

(p. 377)

A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre- mium Sound Multimedia.

Pop-up menuA*video and TV*

Press OK/MENU when a video file is being played back or TV* is being shown in order to access the pop-up menu.

See page

Image settings (p. 394)

Source menu

See footnote B (p. 374)

DVD disc menu

See footnote C (p. 392)

DVD disc TOP menuC (p. 392)

A Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV. B What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu

depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can be e.g. CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.

C Only applies to DVD video discs.

|| 11 Audio and media

11

432

Related information Audio and media - menu overview (p.

428)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Menu overview - iPod Overview of possible options and settings for iPod45.

Main menu iPodA See page

Random (p. 392)

Scan (p. 421)

Audio settings (p. 377)

Sound stage

See footnote B

(p. 378)

Equalizer

See footnote C

(p. 378)

Volume compensation (p. 378)

Reset all audio settings

(p. 377)

A Does not apply to Performance. B Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. C Does not apply to Performance.

Related information Audio and media - menu overview (p.

428)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

44 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 45 Does not apply to Performance.

11 Audio and media

11

433

Menu overview - USB Overview of possible options and settings for USB46.

Main menu USBA See page

Play

Pause

(p. 396)

Stop (p. 396)

Random (p. 392)

Repeat folder (p. 396)

Select USB device (p. 395)

Change subtitles (p. 396)

Change audio track (p. 396)

Scan (p. 421)

Audio settings (p. 377)

Sound stage

See footnote B

(p. 378)

Equalizer

See footnote C

(p. 378)

Volume compensation (p. 378)

Reset all audio settings

(p. 377)

A Does not apply to Performance. B Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. C Does not apply to Performance.

Related information Audio and media - menu overview (p.

428)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Menu overview - Media Bluetooth Overview of possible options and settings for Media Bluetooth47.

Main menu Media Blue- toothA

See page

Random (p. 392)

Change device (p. 402)

Remove Bluetooth device (p. 403)

Scan (p. 421)

Bluetooth software version in car

(p. 406)

Audio settings (p. 377)

Sound stage

See footnote B

(p. 378)

Equalizer

See footnote C

(p. 378)

46 Does not apply to Performance. 47 Does not apply to Performance.

|| 11 Audio and media

11

434

Volume compensation (p. 378)

Reset all audio settings

(p. 377)

A Does not apply to Performance. B Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. C Does not apply to Performance.

Related information Audio and media - menu overview (p.

428)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Menu overview - AUX Overview of possible options and settings for AUX.

Main menu AUX See page

AUX input volume (p. 398)

Audio settings (p. 377)

Sound stage

See footnote A

(p. 378)

Equalizer

See footnote B

(p. 378)

Volume compensation (p. 378)

Reset all audio settings

(p. 377)

A Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. B Does not apply to Performance.

Related information Audio and media - menu overview (p.

428)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Menu overview - Bluetooth handsfree Overview of possible options and settings for Bluetooth handsfree48.

Main menu Bluetooth

handsfreeA (Phone menu) See page

All calls (p. 404)

All calls (p. 404)

Missed calls (p. 404)

Answered calls (p. 404)

Dialled calls (p. 404)

Call duration (p. 404)

Phone book (p. 406)

Search (p. 409)

New contact (p. 410)

Speed dials (p. 411)

48 Does not apply to Performance.

11 Audio and media

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 435

Receive vCard (p. 412)

Memory status (p. 412)

Clear phone book (p. 412)

Change phone (p. 402)

Remove Bluetooth device (p. 403)

Phone settings

Discoverable (p. 400)

Sounds and volume (p. 405)

Download phone book (p. 406)

Bluetooth software version in car

(p. 406)

Call options

Auto answer (p. 404)

Voicemail number (p. 404)

Disconnect phone (p. 402)

A Does not apply to Performance.

Related information Audio and media - menu overview (p.

428)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

Menu overview - TV Overview of possible options and settings for TV*.

Main menu TV* See page

Select country (p. 423)

Reorganise presets (p. 423)

Autostore (p. 423)

Scan (p. 423)

Audio settings (p. 377)

Sound stage

See footnote A

(p. 378)

Equalizer

See footnote B

(p. 378)

Volume compensation (p. 378)

Reset all audio settings

(p. 377)

A Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. B Does not apply to Performance.

|| 11 Audio and media

11

436 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Pop-up menuA*video and TV*

Press OK/MENU when a video file is being played back or TV* is being shown in order to access the pop-up menu.

See page

Image settings (p. 394)

Source menu

See footnote B (p. 374)

DVD disc menu

See footnote C (p. 392)

DVD disc TOP menuC (p. 392)

A Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV. B What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu

depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can be e.g. CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.

C Only applies to DVD video discs.

Related information Audio and media - menu overview (p.

428)

Audio and media - menu navigation (p. 374)

SPECIF ICATIONS

12 Specifications

12

438

Type designations Type designation, vehicle identification num- ber, etc., i.e. information unique to the car, can be read on a label in the car.

Label location

12 Specifications

12

439

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facili- tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.

Type designation, vehicle identification number, maximum permissible weights, codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number. The label is visible when the right rear door is opened.

Label for A/C system.

Label for parking heater.

Engine code and engine serial number.

Label for engine oil.

Gearbox type designation and serial num- ber.

Manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle Identification Number)

Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car.

Related information Weights (p. 441)

Engine specifications (p. 445)

12 Specifications

12

440

Dimensions Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be read in the table.

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2646

B Length 4370

C Load length, floor, folded rear seat 1508

D Load length, floor 684

E Height 1458

F Load height 532

Dimensions mm

G Front track 1552A

1547B

H Rear track 1540A

1535B

I Load width, floor 960

J Width 1802

Dimensions mm

K Width including door mirrors 2041

L Width including folded-in door mirrors 1857

A Offset 50 mm. B Offset 52.5 mm.

12 Specifications

12

441

Weights Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a label in the car.

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (p. 442) (when a trailer is hitched) influence the load capacity and are not included in the kerb weight.

Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - Kerb weight.

NOTE

The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory.

Examples of accessories that reduce load- ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/ Summum equipment levels, as well as other accessories such as Towbar, Load carrier, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Carpets, Luggage cover, Power seats, etc.

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own partic- ular car.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

For information on label location, see Type des- ignations (p. 438).

Max. gross vehicle weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 75 kg.

Related information Towing capacity and towball load (p.

442)

12 Specifications

12

442

Towing capacity and towball load Towing capacity and towball load for driving with a trailer can be read in the tables.

Max. weight braked trailer

Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

T4 B4164T Manual, B6 1300 75

T4 B4164T Automatic, MPS6 1500 75

T4 B5204T8 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75

T4 AWD B5204T8 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75

T5 B5204T9 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75

T5 AWD B5204T9 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75

T5 B5254T12 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75

T5 AWD B5254T12 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75

T5 B5254T14 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75

T5 AWD B5254T14 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75

D2 D4162T Manual, B6 1300 75

D2 D4162T Automatic, MPS6 1300 75

D3 D5204T6 Manual, M66 1500 75

D3 D5204T6 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75

D4 D5204T4 Manual, M66 1500 75

D4 D5204T4 Automatic, TF-80SD 1500 75

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 438).

12 Specifications

12

}} 443

Max. weight unbraked trailer

Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

T4 B4164T Manual, B6 650 50

T4 B4164T Automatic, MPS6 700 50

T4 B5204T8 Automatic, TF-80SD 700 50

T4 AWD B5204T8 Automatic, TF-80SD 750 50

T5 B5204T9 Automatic, TF-80SD 700 50

T5 AWD B5204T9 Automatic, TF-80SD 750 50

T5 B5254T12 Automatic, TF-80SD 700 50

T5 AWD B5254T12 Automatic, TF-80SD 750 50

T5 B5254T14 Automatic, TF-80SD 700 50

T5 AWD B5254T14 Automatic, TF-80SD 750 50

D2 D4162T Manual, B6 650 50

D2 D4162T Automatic, MPS6 700 50

D3 D5204T6 Manual, M66 700 50

D3 D5204T6 Automatic, TF-80SD 750 50

D4 D5204T4 Manual, M66 700 50

D4 D5204T4 Automatic, TF-80SD 750 50

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 438).

|| 12 Specifications

12

444

Related information Weights (p. 441)

Driving with a trailer (p. 301)

Trailer Stability Assist - TSA (p. 307)

12 Specifications

12

445

Engine specifications Engine specifications (output etc.) for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

Engine Engine codeA

Output (kW/rpm)

Output (hp/rpm)

Torque (Nm/ rpm)

No. of cylinders

Bore (mm)

Stroke (mm)

Swept volume (litres)

Com- pression

ratio

T4 B4164T 132/5700 180/5700 240/16005000 4 79 81,4 1,596 10,0:1

T4 B5204T8 132/5000 180/5000 300/27004000 5 81,0 77 1,984 10.5:1

T5 B5204T9 157/6000 213/6000 300/27005000 5 81,0 77 1,984 10.5:1

T5 B5254T12 187/5400 254/5400 360/18004200 5 83 92,3 2,497 9.5:1

T5 B5254T14 183/5400 249/5400 360/18004200 5 83 92,3 2,497 9.5:1

D2 D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88,3 1,560 16,0:1

D3 D5204T6 110/3500 150/3500 350/1500-2750 5 81,0 77 1,984 16,5:1

D4 D5204T4 130/3500 177/3500 400/1750-2750 5 81,0 77 1,984 16,5:1

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 438).

Related information Coolant - grade and volume (p. 449)

Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 447)

12 Specifications

12

446

Engine oil - adverse driving conditions Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions.

Check the oil level (p. 337), more frequently for long journeys:

towing a caravan or trailer

in mountainous regions

at high speeds

in temperatures colder than -30 C or hotter than +40 C

The above also apply to shorter driving dis- tances at low temperatures.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine.

Volvo recommends:

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Related information Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 447)

Engine oil - general (p. 336)

12 Specifications

12

}} 447

Engine oil - grade and volume Recommended engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Volvo recommends:

Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)

T4 B4164T

Certified and factory-filled oil: Oil grade WSS-M2C925-A

options for service:

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 5W30

approx. 4.1

D2 D4162T

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 5W30

When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.

approx. 3.8

D3 D5204T6 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W30

approx. 5.9

D4 D5204T4 approx. 5.9

|| 12 Specifications

12

448

Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)

T4 B5204T8 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W30

approx 5.5

T5 B5204T9 approx 5.5

T5 B5254T12 approx 5.5

T5 B5254T14 approx 5.5

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 438).

Related information Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.

446)

Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 337)

12 Specifications

12

449

Coolant - grade and volume Approved coolant volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the pack- aging.

EngineA Volume

(litres)

T4 B4164T 7,0

D2 D4162T 10,0

D3 D5204T6 8,0

D4 D5204T4

T4 B5204T8

8,0 T5 B5204T9

T5 B5254T12

T5 B5254T14

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 438).

Related information Coolant - level (p. 340)

1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.

12 Specifications

12

450

Transmission fluid - grade and volume The prescribed transmission fluid and volume for each respective gearbox alternative can be read in the table.

Manual gearbox

Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

B6 1,6 BOT 350M3

M66 1,9

Automatic gearbox

Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

TF-80SD 7,0 AW1

MPS6 7.3 BOT 341

NOTE

Under normal driving conditions, the gear- box oil does not need to be changed dur- ing its service life. However, it may be nec- essary under adverse driving conditions.

Related information Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.

446)

Type designations (p. 438)

12 Specifications

12

451

Brake fluid - grade and volume The medium in a hydraulic brake system is called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer force from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in turn act on a mechanical brake.

Prescribed grade: DOT 4

Volume: 0.6 litres

Related information Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 341)

Washer fluid - quality and volume Washer fluid is used, together with wind- screen and rear window wipers (p. 93) to keep the car's windows and headlamps clean and ensure visibility when driving.

Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recom- mended by Volvo - with frost protection dur- ing cold weather and below freezing point.

Volume:

Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres.

Cars without headlamp washing: 3.2 litres.

Related information Washer fluid - filling (p. 351)

Wiper blades (p. 349)

12 Specifications

12

452

Fuel tank - volume Fuel tank volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Engine Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

4-cylinder petrol

5-cylinder petrol (FWD)

approx 62 Petrol: Fuel - petrol (p. 298)

5-cylinder petrol (AWD) approx. 57

4-cylinder diesel approx 52 Diesel: Fuel - diesel (p. 298)

5-cylinder diesel approx 60

Related information Filling up with fuel (p. 296)

Engine specifications (p. 445)

12 Specifications

12

453

Air conditioning, fluid - volume and grade The prescribed grade and volume of fluids in the air conditioning system can be read in the table.

Fluid Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Compressor oil 0,11 PAG oil

Coolant 0,65 kg R134a

WARNING

The air conditioning system contains pres- surised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Related information Climate control system - fault tracing and

repair (p. 341)

12 Specifications

12

454

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams per km.

T4 (B4164T) 164 7,0 109 4,7 129 5,5

T4 (B4164T) 184 7.9 120 5.1 143 6.1

T4 AWD (B5204T8) 259 11.1 146 6.3 187 8,0

T5 (B5204T9) 243 10,4 135 5.8 174 7,5

T5 AWD (B5204T9) 259 11.1 146 6.3 187 8,0

T5 (B5254T12) 259 11.1 138 5.9 182 7.8

T5 AWD (B5254T12) 270 11,6 150 6.4 194 8.3

D2 (D4162T) 110 4,2 93 3,5 99 3,8

12 Specifications

12

}} 455

D2 (D4162T) 118 4,5 103 3.9 108 4.1

D3 (D5204T6) 140 5,3 103 3.9 117 4,4

D3 (D5204T6) 178 6,8 114 4,3 137 5,2

D4 (D5204T4) 140 5,3 103 3.9 117 4,4

D4 (D5204T4) 178 6,8 114 4,3 137 5,2

Explanation

gram/km

litre/100 km

Urban driving

Extra-urban driving

Combined driving

Fuel consumption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU cycles2, that apply to cars with kerb weight in the

basic version and without extra equipment. The car's weight may increase depending on equipment. This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and carbon dioxide emissions. See information about Weights (p. 441).

2 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - Cars with manual transmission are started in 2nd gear. The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in accordance with legal requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.

|| 12 Specifications

12

456

There are several reasons for increased fuel consumption compared with the table's val- ues. Examples of this are:

The driver's driving style.

If the customer has specified wheels larger than those fitted as standard on the model's basic version, then resistance increases.

High speed results in increased wind resistance.

Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car.

Even a combination of the above-mentioned examples can result in significantly improved consumption. For further information, please refer to the regulations referred to2.

Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles2 which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based.

Consumption is higher and power output lower for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.

Related information Economical driving (p. 300)

Fuel - petrol (p. 298)

Fuel - diesel (p. 298)

2 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - Cars with manual transmission are started in 2nd gear. The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in accordance with legal requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.

12 Specifications

12

457

Tyres - approved tyre pressures Approved tyre pressures for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Engine Tyre size Speed

(km/h)

Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA

Front

(kPa)B Rear

(kPa)

Front

(kPa)

Rear

(kPa)

Front/rear

(kPa)

All

205/60 R16

225/50 R17

225/45 R18

225/40 R19

0 - 160 240 230 260 260 260

160 + 260 240 280 280

Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420

A Economical driving. B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.

NOTE

All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 316)

Tyres - air pressure (p. 322)

Type designations (p. 438)

12 Specifications

12

458

Electrical system The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.

The car has a voltage-regulated AC alterna- tor.

The size, type and performance of the starter battery depend on the car's equipment and function.

IMPORTANT

If the battery is replaced, take care to replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity, reserve capacity and type as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

Related information Starter battery - specification (p. 459)

Starter battery - replacement (p. 353)

Starter battery (p. 351)

12 Specifications

12

459

Starter battery - specification The starter battery is used to drive the starter motor and other electrical equipment in the car.

Engine Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,

CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)

Reserve capacity

(minutes)

Petrol 12 520800 100160

Diesel 12 700800 135160

Petrol/Diesel, manual gearbox with Start/Stop function 12 720A 130

Petrol/Diesel, automatic gearbox with Start/Stop function 12 800B 140

A Battery type EFB (Enhanced Flooded Battery) must be used in cars with manual gearbox and the Start/Stop function. B Battery type AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) must be used in cars with automatic gearbox and the Start/Stop function.

IMPORTANT

If the battery is replaced, take care to replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity, reserve capacity and type as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

NOTE

The battery's container size should be consistent with the original battery's dimensions.

The battery's height is different depending on size.

Related information Starter battery - replacement (p. 353)

Starter battery (p. 351)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 353)

12 Specifications

12

460

Type approval - remote control key system Type approval for the remote control key sys- tem can be read in the table.

Lock system, standard

Country/Area

EU, China

Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)

Country/Area

EU

Korea

Country/Area

China

Hong Kong

Related information Remote control key with key blade (p.

159)

Type approval - radar system Type approval for the radar system can be read in the table.

12 Specifications

12

461

Coun- try/ Area

Singa- pore

IDA: Infocomm Development Authority of Singapore.

Brazil

Europe Delphi Electronics &

Safety hereby declares that L2C0038TR and L2C0049TR are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. This dec- laration of conformity may, if necessary, be consulted with Delphi Electronics & Safety / One Corporate Center / Kokomo, Indiana 46904-9005 USA.

Related information Radar sensor (p. 209)

12 Specifications

12

462

Type approval - Bluetooth

Type approval for Bluetooth can be read in the table.

12 Specifications

12

}} 463

Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)

Country/ Area

Countries in the EU:

Exporting country: Japan

Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc.

Type of equipment: Bluetooth device

For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing

|| 12 Specifications

12

464

Country/ Area

Czech Republic:

Alpine Electronics, Inc. tmto prohlauje, e tento Bluetooth Module je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES.

Denmark: Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Bluetooth Module overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Germany: Hiermit erklrt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gert Bluetooth Module in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.

Estonia: Kesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme Bluetooth Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele.

UK Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this Bluetooth Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Spain: Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el Bluetooth Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Greece: Alpine Electronics, Inc. Bluetooth Module 1999/5/ .

France: Par la prsente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dclare que l'appareil Bluetooth Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Italy: Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo Bluetooth Module conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Latvia: Ar o Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklar, ka Bluetooth Module atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem.

Lithuania: iuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad is Bluetooth Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.

12 Specifications

12

}} 465

Country/ Area

Nether- lands:

Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel Bluetooth Module in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

Malta: Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth Module jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.

Hungary: Alulrott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Bluetooth Module megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak.

Poland: Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. owiadcza, e Bluetooth Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Portugal: Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este Bluetooth Module est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Slovenia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Bluetooth Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direk- tive 1999/5/ES.

Slovakia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. tmto vyhlasuje, e Bluetooth Module spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smer- nice 1999/5/ES.

Finland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa tten ett Bluetooth Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Sweden: Hrmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna Bluetooth Module str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Iceland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this Bluetooth Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.

Norway: Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklrer herved at utstyret Bluetooth Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

|| 12 Specifications

12

466

Country/ Area

China:

1.

2.4 - 2.4835 GHz

(EIRP) 10dBi 100 mW 20 dBm

10dBi 20 dBm / MHz(EIRP)

20 ppm

() (2.5 )

-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)

-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)

-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)

-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)

-30 dBm / 1 MHz ( 1 - 12.75 GHz)

2. ( )

3.

4.

5.

12 Specifications

12

}} 467

Country/ Area

Taiwan:

|| 12 Specifications

12

468

Country/ Area

South Korea:

Volvo Car Korea

: KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L3, KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L2 and KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L1

: Bluetooth Audio Navigation Radio

: IAM2.1

: March/2010

Alpine Electronics, Inc

Made in Japan

Volvo Car Korea

2 726-173 4

1588-1777

http://www.volvocars.com/kr

12 Specifications

12

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 469

Country/ Area

The United Arab Emi- rates:

South Africa:

Jamaica: Approved for use in Jamaica SMA EI: IAM2.1

Thailand: This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.

Oman

Related information Bluetooth handsfree phone (p. 403)

Media Bluetooth* (p. 398)

12 Specifications

12

470

Licenses

Sensus software

This software uses parts of sources from clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University of California. All or some portions are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of the nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

This software uses parts of sources from "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this

software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/ projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.

12 Specifications

12

}} 471

This software is based in parts on the work of the FreeType Team.

This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved

Combined Instrument Panel Software Open Source Software Notice

This product uses certain free / open source and other software originating from third parties, that is subject to the GNU General Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/ GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project License (FreeType License) and other different and/or additional copyright licenses, disclaimers and notices. The links how to access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3, LGPLv3, and the other open source software licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and notices are provided to you below. Please refer to the exact terms of the relevant License, regarding your rights under said licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers to provide the source code of said free/open source software to you for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling, upon written request. Please contact your nearest Volvo Dealer.

This offer is valid for a period of at least three (3) years from the date of the distribution of

this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers spare parts or customer support.

Portions of this product uses software copyrighted v2.4.3/2010 The FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

This product includes software under following licenses:

GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old- licenses/gpl-2.0.html

Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista 2.6.31 kernel and kernel from L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)

uBoot (based on v2009.08)

busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)

GCC runtime library exception: http:// www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html

libgcc_s.so.1

LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/ lgpl.html

Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1

The FreeType Project License: http:// www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT

libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)

Linux software

This product contains software licensed under GNU General Public License (GPL) or

GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.

You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code of the GPL/LGPL software.

You may download Source Code from the following website at no charge: http:// www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ download/TVM_8351_013

The website provides the Source Code "As Is" and without warranty of any kind.

By downloading Source Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associated with downloading and using the Source Code and complying with the user agreements that accompany each Source Code.

Please note that we cannot respond to any inquiries regarding the source code.

DivX

DivX Certified to play DivX video. DivX, DivX Certified and associated logos are

|| 12 Specifications

12

472 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to http://vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274.

Related information Volvo Sensus (p. 70)

Symbols in the display There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car. The symbols are divided into warning, indicator and information sym- bols. Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found.

- Red warning symbol, illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown in the combined instrument panel at the same time.

- Information symbol, illuminates in combination with text in the combined instru- ment panel, when a deviation in any of the car's systems has occurred. The yellow sym- bol information can also illuminate in combi- nation with other symbols.

Warning symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification See

Low oil pressure (p. 66)

Parking brake applied, digital instrument

(p. 66), (p. 292)

Symbol Specification See

Parking brake applied, analogue instrument

(p. 66)

Airbags SRS (p. 28), (p. 66)

Seatbelt reminder (p. 24), (p. 66)

Alternator not charging

(p. 66)

Fault in brake sys- tem

(p. 66), (p. 289)

Warning, safety mode

(p. 28), (p. 38), (p. 66)

Control symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification See

ABL fault* (p. 65), (p. 84)

Emissions sys- tem

(p. 65)

ABS fault (p. 65), (p. 289)

Rear fog lamp on (p. 65), (p. 85)

12 Specifications

12

}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 473

Symbol Specification See

Stability system, DSTC, Trailer stability assist*

(p. 65), (p. 187), (p. 307)

Stability system, sport mode

(p. 65), (p. 187)

Engine preheater (diesel)

(p. 65)

Low level in fuel tank

(p. 65), (p. 142)

Information, read display text

(p. 65)

Main beam On (p. 65), (p. 82)

Left-hand direc- tion indicators

(p. 65)

Right-hand direction indica- tors

(p. 65)

Start/Stop*, engine auto- stopped

(p. 65), (p. 280)

Information symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification See

Main beam with auto dimming - AHB*

(p. 83)

Camera sensor* (p. 83)

Adaptive cruise control*

(p. 212)

Adaptive cruise control*

(p. 203), (p. 212)

Adaptive cruise control*, Distance Warning* (Distance Alert)

(p. 212), (p. 214)

Adaptive cruise control*

(p. 202)

Adaptive cruise control*

(p. 203)

Cruise control* (p. 194)

Speed limiter (p. 191)

Radar sensor* (p. 212), (p. 216), (p. 233)

Symbol Specification See

Start/Stop* (p. 286)

Start/Stop* (p. 286)

Start/Stop* (p. 286)

Start/Stop* (p. 286)

Camera sensor*, Laser sensor*

(p. 222), (p. 233), (p. 237), (p. 243)

Distance warning* (Distance Alert), City SafetyTM, Col- lision warning sys- tem*, Auto-brake*

(p. 216), (p. 222), (p. 233)

Engine block heater and pas- senger compart- ment heater*

(p. 142)

|| 12 Specifications

12

474 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Specification See

Activated timer* (p. 142)

Activated timer* (p. 142)

ABL system* (p. 84)

Low battery (p. 142)

Park Assist Pilot - PAP*

(p. 253)

Rain sensor* (p. 93)

Lane Keeping Aid* (p. 241)

Driver Alert Sys- tem*, Lane Keep- ing Aid*

(p. 237), (p. 243)

Driver Alert Sys- tem*, Time for a break

(p. 236), (p. 237)

Symbol Specification See

Gear indicator, manual gearbox

(p. 272)

Automatic gear positions

(p. 273)

Registered speed information*

(p. 188)

Measuring the oil level

(p. 337)

Information symbols in the roof console display

Symbol Specification See

Seatbelt reminder (p. 27)

Airbag, passenger seat, activated

(p. 31)

Airbag, passenger seat, deactivated

(p. 31)

Related information Combined instrument panel - meaning of

indicator symbols (p. 65)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 66)

Messages - handling (p. 104)

12 Specifications

12

475

13 Alphabetical Index

13

476

A

ACC Adaptive cruise control................. 199

Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 84

Active high beam....................................... 83

Active Park Assist.................................... 253 function............................................... 253 Limitations.......................................... 256 operation............................................. 254 Symbols and messages..................... 257

Active Xenon headlamps........................... 84

Active Yaw Control.................................. 185

Adapting driving characteristics.............. 262

Adaptive Cruise Control........................... 199 change cruise control functionality..... 208 deactivate........................................... 206 fault tracing......................................... 211 function............................................... 200 managing speed................................. 203 overtaking........................................... 205 overview.............................................. 202 radar sensor........................................ 209 setting the time interval...................... 204 standby mode..................................... 204 temporary deactivation....................... 204

Additional heater electric........................................ 143, 144 fuel-driven........................................... 143

Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 77

Airbag activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 31 driver's side.................................... 30, 37 passenger side......................... 30, 31, 37

AIRBAG ..................................................... 30

Airbag system............................................ 29 warning symbol.................................... 28

Air cleaning material............................................... 129 passenger compartment.... 127, 128, 129

Air conditioning........................................ 135

Air conditioning, fluid volume and grade............................... 453

Air conditioning system repair................................................... 341

Air distribution.......................................... 129 Recirculation....................................... 137 table.................................................... 138

Air quality system IAQS........................... 128

Alarm........................................ 181, 182, 183 alarm indicator.................................... 182 alarm signals....................................... 183 automatic activation........................... 182 automatic re-arming........................... 182 checking the alarm............................. 164 reduced alarm level............................ 183 remote control key not working.......... 183

Alarm for accidents and disasters........... 383

Alcolock................................................... 264

Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 128

All Wheel Drive, (AWD)............................. 288

All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 288

Approach lighting.............................. 89, 162

Audio settings............................................... 376 surround..................................... 371, 377

Audio and media introduction......................................... 371 manage the system............................ 372 menu overview.................................... 428 menus................................................. 374 overview.............................................. 372

Audio profile............................................. 378

audio system functions............................................. 376 overview.............................................. 372

Audio system........................................... 371

Audio volume........................................... 372 external audio source......................... 398 phone.................................................. 405 phone/media player............................ 405 ring signal, phone............................... 405 speed/noise compensation................ 378

Automatic car washes............................. 364

13 Alphabetical Index

13

477

Automatic gearbox.......................... 273, 276 manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 274 towing and recovery........................... 308 trailer................................................... 302

Automatic relocking................................. 174

AUX input......................................... 372, 395

AWD, All Wheel Drive............................... 288

B

Backrest..................................................... 73 front seat, lowering............................... 73

Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 76

Bag holder .............................................. 154 folding................................................. 154

Battery..................................... 294, 351, 459 jump starting....................................... 270 maintenance....................................... 351 overload.............................................. 294 remote control.................................... 427 remote control key/PCC..................... 167 specification....................................... 459 symbols on the battery....................... 352 warning symbols................................. 352

BLIS................................................. 257, 258

Bluetooth

handsfree............................................ 403 media.................................................. 398 microphone off................................... 404 streaming audio.................................. 398 transfer call to mobile......................... 404

Bonnet, opening...................................... 335

Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 341

Brake fluid grade and volume............................... 451

Brake light.................................................. 86

Brakes.............................................. 289, 291 Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 291 brake light............................................. 86 brake system.............................. 289, 291 Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 291 emergency brake lights........................ 86 filling brake fluid.................................. 341 handbrake........................................... 292 symbols in the combined instrument panel................................................... 290

Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 343

C

Calls incoming............................................. 403 operation............................................. 403

Camera sensor................................ 219, 231

Car care................................................... 364

Car care, leather upholstery.................... 367

Cargo area cargo net............................................. 155 lighting.................................................. 88 loading................................................ 152 mounting points.................................. 153 parcel shelf......................................... 157

Car upholstery......................................... 367

Car washing............................................. 364

Catalytic converter Recovery............................................. 309

CD............................................................ 391

Changing wheels..................................... 318

Checking the engine oil level................... 336

Children child safety locks.................................. 42 child seat and airbag............................ 48 child seats and side airbags................. 34 location in car....................................... 48 safety.............................................. 34, 42

13 Alphabetical Index

13

478

Child safety locks............................ 179, 180

Child seats................................................. 42 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats... 48 recommended...................................... 44 size classes for child seats with ISO- FIX fixture system................................. 49 types..................................................... 50 upper mounting points for child seats.. 52

City Safety............................................ 217

Cleaning automatic car wash............................ 364 car washing........................................ 364 rims..................................................... 365 seatbelts............................................. 368 upholstery........................................... 367

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 128

Climate control actual temperature............................. 126 auto-regulation................................... 134 general................................................ 126 personal preferences.......................... 129 sensors............................................... 127 temperature control............................ 135

Clock, adjustment...................................... 69

CO2 emissions......................................... 454

Collision..................................................... 38

Collision warning............................. 223, 224

Collision warning system function............................................... 224 general limitations............................... 229 operation............................................. 228 Pedestrian detection........................... 227 Radar sensor.............................. 209, 217

Collision Warning System with Auto Brake....................................................... 223

Colour code, paint................................... 369

Combined instrument panel................ 60, 61

Compass................................................. 100 calibration........................................... 101

Condensation in headlamps.................... 364

Controls centre console.................................... 372

Controls, lights........................................... 78

Control symbols................................... 61, 63

Coolant volume and grade............................... 449

Coolant, checking and filling................... 340

Cooling system........................................ 293 overheating......................................... 293

Corner Traction Control........................... 185

Crash, see Collision................................... 38

Cruise control.......................................... 194 deactivate........................................... 199 managing speed................................. 195

resume set speed............................... 198 temporary deactivation....................... 197

CTA.......................................................... 260

Cyclist detection...................................... 225

CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 128

D

DAB Radio....................................... 379, 388

Daytime running lights............................... 81

Deadlock.................................................. 178 deactivation........................................ 178 temporary deactivation....................... 178

Defroster.................................................. 136

Detachable towbar storage................................................ 303

Diesel....................................................... 298 run out of fuel..................................... 298

Diesel particle filter.................................. 299

Digital radio (DAB).................................... 388

Dimensions.............................................. 440

Dipstick, electronic.................................. 338

Direction indicator..................................... 87

Direction indicators.................................... 87

direction of rotation................................. 312

13 Alphabetical Index

13

479

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 278

Display lighting.......................................... 80

Distance Warning.................................... 214 Limitations.......................................... 215 Symbols and messages..................... 216

Door mirrors............................................... 97

Driver Alert Control.................................. 235 operation............................................. 236

Driver Alert System.................................. 235

Driving...................................................... 295 cooling system.................................... 293 with a tailer......................................... 301 with the tailgate open......................... 294

Driving in water........................................ 293

Driving with a trailer towball load........................................ 442 towing capacity.................................. 442

DVD.......................................................... 391

E

ECC, electronic climate control............... 131

EcoGuide................................................... 64

Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual........... 22

Economical driving.................................. 300

ECO pressure.................................. 322, 457

Electrical socket...................................... 151 cargo area........................................... 155

Electrical system...................................... 458

Electronic climate control - ECC............. 131

Electronic temperature control - ETC...... 132

Emergency equipment first aid kit........................................... 324 warning triangle.................................. 323

Emergency puncture repair............. 324, 325 action.................................................. 326 inflating the tyres................................ 329 rechecking.......................................... 328 stowing components.......................... 330

Emergency puncture repair kit location............................................... 325 overview.............................................. 326 sealing fluid......................................... 330

Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 454

Engine deactivate........................................... 270 overheating......................................... 301 start..................................................... 268 Start/Stop........................................... 279

Engine and passenger compartment heater direct start/immediate stop................ 141 messages........................................... 142 timer.................................................... 141

Engine block heater................................. 140

Engine braking, automatic....................... 288

Engine compartment coolant................................................ 340 oil........................................................ 336 overview.............................................. 335

Engine drag control................................. 185

Engine oil......................................... 336, 446 adverse driving conditions.................. 446 filter..................................................... 336 grade and volume............................... 447

Engine specifications............................... 445

Equalizer.................................................. 378

Error messages Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 212 Driver Alert Control............................. 237 LKA..................................................... 243 see Messages and symbols............... 212

Error messages in BLIS........................... 262

ETC, electronic temperature control........ 132

External dimensions................................ 440

F

Fan ECC.................................................... 134 ETC..................................................... 134

Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 220

13 Alphabetical Index

13

480

First aid.................................................... 324

First aid kit............................................... 324

Fluids, capacities..... 449, 450, 451, 452, 453

Fluids and oils.................. 449, 450, 451, 453

Fog lamp rear........................................................ 85

Foot brake....................................... 289, 291

Front seat head restraint........................................ 73

FSC, ecolabelling....................................... 22

Fuel.................................................. 297, 298 fuel consumption................................ 454 fuel economy...................................... 322 fuel filter.............................................. 299

Fuel-driven heater direct start/immediate stop................ 141 timer.................................................... 141

Fuelling............................................ 178, 299 filling................................................... 296 filling with reserve fuel can................. 299 fuel filler flap....................................... 296 fuel filler flap, locking.......................... 178 fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 296

Fuel tank volume................................................ 452

Fuse box.................................................. 355

Fuses....................................................... 355 changing............................................. 355 engine compartment.......................... 356 General............................................... 355 under front right seat.......................... 362 under glovebox................................... 359

G

Gearbox........................................... 271, 272 automatic.................................... 273, 276 manual................................................ 272

Gear selector inhibitor............................. 278

Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- gagement................................................. 278

Gear shift indicator.................................. 272

Geartronic................................................ 274

Glass laminated/reinforced............................. 22

Glass roof, roller blind.............................. 100

Glovebox................................................. 149 cooling................................................ 150 locking................................................ 176

Gross vehicle weight............................... 441

GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 272

H

Handbrake............................................... 292

Hazard warning flashers............................ 86

HDC......................................................... 288

Headlamp control...................................... 78

Headlamp levelling.................................... 80

Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 90

Headlamp pattern adjustment................... 90 Active Bending Lights .......................... 90 Halogen headlamp............................... 90

Headlamps............................................... 343

head restraint centre seat, rear.................................... 76 front seat............................................... 73 lowering................................................ 76

Heating rearview and door mirrors.................... 98 rear window.......................................... 98 seats................................................... 133

Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 18

High engine temperature......................... 301

High-pressure headlamp washing............. 94

Hill Descent Control................................. 288

Hill Start Assist........................................ 279

Home safe light duration........................... 89

13 Alphabetical Index

13

481

Horn........................................................... 78

I

IAQS - Interior Air Quality System........... 128

Image settings......................................... 394

Immobiliser.............................................. 161

Indicator symbols...................................... 65

Inflatable curtain.................................. 34, 37

Information button, PCC.......................... 164

Information display.............................. 60, 61

Infotainment system source buttons.................................... 372 voice control....................................... 413

Infotainment system (Audio and media).. 371

Inlaid mats............................................... 150

Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 80

Instrument overview left-hand drive car................................ 54 right-hand drive car.............................. 57

Instruments and controls..................... 54, 57

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) Air cleaning......................................... 128

Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 87

Interior rearview mirror............................... 99 automatic dimming............................... 99

Intermittent wiping..................................... 93

iPod, connection................................... 396

J

Jack......................................................... 315

Jacket holder........................................... 148

Journey statistics..................................... 124

Jump starting........................................... 270

K

Kerb weight.............................................. 441

Key........................................... 159, 160, 172

Key blade......................................... 165, 166

Keyless drive 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 269

Keyless - locking..................................... 170

Keyless start (keyless drive) 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 269

Keyless - unlocking................................. 171

Keypad in the steering wheel............ 78, 372

Key positions............................................. 71

L

Labels...................................................... 438

Laminated glass......................................... 22

Lamps, see Lighting................................ 342

Lane keeping assistant operation............................................. 241

Lane keeping assistant - LKA.................. 239

Laser sensor............................................ 220

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 367

Light indications, PCC............................. 164

Lighting.................................................... 342 Active Xenon headlamps...................... 84 approach lighting.......................... 89, 162 automatic lighting, passenger com- partment............................................... 88 bulbs, specifications........................... 348 controls................................................. 87 daytime running lights.......................... 81 display lighting...................................... 80 headlamp levelling................................ 80 home safe lighting................................ 89 instrument lighting................................ 80 in the passenger compartment............. 87 main/dipped beam............................... 82 position/parking lamps......................... 80 rear fog lamp........................................ 85 tunnel detection.................................... 82

13 Alphabetical Index

13

482

Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 343 daytime running lights........................ 346 dipped beam (cars with halogen head- lamps)................................................. 344 direction indicators, front.................... 345 main beam (cars with active xenon headlamps)......................................... 345 main beam (cars with halogen head- lamps)................................................. 344 position/parking lamps....................... 345 rear bulb holder: direction indicators, brake lamps and reversing lamps...... 346 rear fog lamps..................................... 347 vanity mirror........................................ 348

LKA - Lane keeping assistant.................. 239

Loading cargo area................................... 152, 154 General....................................... 152, 153 long load............................................. 153 mounting points.................................. 153 roof load............................................. 153

Lock locking................................................ 173 manual locking.................................... 174 unlocking.................................... 173, 175

Lockable wheel bolts............................... 314

Lock confirmation ................................... 160

Lock indicator.......................................... 161

Locking/unlocking inside.................................................. 175 tailgate................................................ 176

M

Main/dipped beam, see Lighting............... 82

Main beam, automatic activation.............. 83

maintenance Rustproofing....................................... 366

Making calls............................................. 403

Manual gearbox....................................... 272 GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 272 Towing and recovery.......................... 308 trailer................................................... 302

Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 274

Max. roof load.......................................... 441

Media, Bluetooth.................................... 398

Media player.................................... 379, 390 compatible file formats....................... 394

Memory function in seat............................ 74

Menu navigation audio and media.......... 374

Menus Combined instrument panel............... 101 menu overview, analogue................... 102 menu overview, digital........................ 102

Messages................................................ 104 Information display............................. 103

Messages and symbols Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 212 Collision Warning with Auto Brake.......................................... 222, 233 Driver Alert Control............................. 237 Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater........................... 142 LKA..................................................... 243

Messages in BLIS.................................... 262

Meters fuel gauge....................................... 60, 61 speedometer................................... 60, 61 tachometer..................................... 60, 61

Microphone.............................................. 404

misting attending to the windows................... 126

Misting condensation in headlamps............... 364

Mobile phone connect............................................... 400 handsfree............................................ 403 register phone..................................... 400 voice control....................................... 413

Mood lighting............................................. 88

MY CAR 104, 105, 106, 108, 109, 111, 112, 113, 114

13 Alphabetical Index

13

483

N

News broadcasts..................................... 384

O

Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 446, 447

Oil level low.............................................. 336

Output...................................................... 445

outside temperature gauge....................... 68

Overheating............................................. 301

Owner's manual, ecolabelling.................... 22

P

PACOS....................................................... 31

Paintwork colour code......................................... 369 damage and touch-up........................ 368

Panel lighting............................................. 80

Panic function.......................................... 162

PAP - Active Park Assist.......................... 253

Parcel shelf.............................................. 157

Park Assist............................................... 245 backward............................................ 247

fault indicator...................................... 248 function............................................... 245 parking assistance sensors................ 248

Park assist camera.................................. 249 settings............................................... 252

Parking brake........................................... 292

Passenger compartment filter................. 127

Passenger compartment heater.............. 140

Passenger compartment lighting automatic.............................................. 88

PCC Personal Car Communicator functions............................................. 162 range........................................... 165, 169

Pedestrian airbag....................................... 40 folding up.............................................. 42 moving the car...................................... 41

Pedestrian detection................................ 223

Petrol grade............................................. 298

Phone connect............................................... 400 handsfree............................................ 403 incoming call....................................... 403 making calls........................................ 403 phone book......................................... 406 phone book, shortcut......................... 406 receiving a call.................................... 404 register phone..................................... 400 voice control....................................... 413

Pocket park assist - PAP......................... 253

Polishing.................................................. 365

Position/parking lamps.............................. 80

Power guide............................................... 64

Power seat................................................. 74

Powershift gearbox.......................... 276, 308

Power windows......................................... 95

Q

Queue Assist............................................ 206

Queue Assistant....................................... 206

R

Radar sensor........................................... 200 Limitations.......................................... 209

Radio....................................................... 379 DAB............................................ 379, 388

Radio programme types (PTY)................ 384

Rain sensor................................................ 93

RDS.......................................................... 382

Rear bulbs location............................................... 346

13 Alphabetical Index

13

484

Rear seat Heating............................................... 133

Rearview and door mirrors compass............................................. 100 door...................................................... 97 electrically retractable........................... 98 heating.................................................. 98 interior................................................... 99

Rear window, defrosting............................ 98

Recommendations during driving............ 295

Recommended child seats table...................................................... 44

Recovery.................................................. 310

Refrigerant............................................... 341

Regeneration........................................... 299

Relay/fuse box, see Fuses....................... 355

Remote control........................................ 425 battery replacement............................ 427

Remote control immobiliser..................... 162

Remote control key......................... 159, 160 battery replacement............................ 167 detachable key blade................. 165, 166 functions............................................. 162 loss..................................................... 159 range........................................... 163, 169

Remote control key system, type appro- val............................................................ 460

Resetting, trip meter........................ 117, 121

Resetting the door mirrors......................... 98

Resetting the power windows................... 96

Retractable power door mirrors................. 98

Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 272

Road sign information............................. 188 Limitations.......................................... 190 operation............................................. 188

Roller blind for glass roof......................... 100

Roof load, max. weight............................ 441

Rustproofing............................................ 366

S

Safety lock children................................................. 42

Safety mode.............................................. 38 moving the car...................................... 40 start attempt......................................... 39

Sealing fluid............................................. 330

Seat, see Seats.......................................... 73

Seatbelt...................................................... 24 loosen................................................... 26 pregnancy............................................. 26 putting on............................................. 25 rear seat................................................ 27

seatbelt reminder.................................. 27 seatbelt tensioner................................. 27

Seatbelt reminder...................................... 27

Seatbelt tensioner................................ 27, 37

Seats.......................................................... 73 head restraints, rear.............................. 76 heating................................................ 133 Heating............................................... 133 lowering the front backrest................... 73 lowering the rear backrest.................... 76 power.................................................... 74

Securing loads (Loading)......................... 153

Sensus....................................................... 70

Service position....................................... 349

Service programme................................. 332

Set time interval....................................... 214

Side airbag SIPS.................................. 33, 37

Signal input, external....................... 372, 395

SIPS airbag................................................ 33

Skidding................................................... 295

slippery driving conditions....................... 295

Soot filter................................................. 299

SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 299

spare wheel..................................... 317, 318 installation........................................... 320 taking out............................................ 318

13 Alphabetical Index

13

485

Speed limiter............................................ 191 alarm for speed exceeded.................. 194 deactivation........................................ 194 getting started............................ 191, 192 temporary deactivation....................... 193

Speed ratings, tyres................................. 317

Spin control............................................. 185

Stability and traction control system 185, 187

operation............................................. 186

Stability system....................................... 185

Stains....................................................... 367

Start/Stop................................................ 279 Function and operation...................... 280 the engine does not stop.................... 281

Steering force, speed related.................. 262

Steering force level, see Steering force... 262

Steering lock............................................ 270

Steering wheel........................................... 77 keypad.......................................... 78, 372 steering wheel adjustment.................... 77

Stone chips and scratches...................... 368

Storage spaces driver's side........................................ 148 glovebox............................................. 149 Jacket holder...................................... 148 tunnel console.................................... 148

Storage spaces in the passenger com- partment.................................................. 146

surround.......................................... 371, 377

Switching off the engine.......................... 270

Symbols indicator symbols..................... 61, 63, 65 warning symbols............................. 61, 63

Symbols and messages Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 212 Collision Warning with Auto Brake.......................................... 222, 233 Driver Alert Control............................. 237 LKA..................................................... 243

System tripping.................................................. 37

T

Tailgate Locking/unlocking.............................. 176

Temperature actual temperature............................. 126

Temperature control................................ 135

Total airing function......................... 126, 176

Towbar detachable, attachment...................... 304 detachable, removal........................... 306

Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 303

Towbar - detachable attachment/removal.................... 304, 306

Towing..................................................... 308 towing eye.......................................... 309

Towing bracket........................................ 303 specifications...................................... 304

Towing capacity and towball load........... 442

Towing eye.............................................. 309

Traction control........................................ 185

Traffic information (TP) ........................... 383

Trailer....................................................... 301 cable................................................... 301 driving with a trailer............................ 301 snaking............................................... 307

Trailer stability assist............................... 185

Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 307

Transmission............................................ 272

Transmission oil volume and grade............................... 450

Transponder.............................................. 18

Tread depth............................................. 315

Tread wear indicators.............................. 314

Trip computer.................. 114, 119, 123, 124 analogue instrument panel................. 115

Trip meter.................................................. 68

13 Alphabetical Index

13

486

Trip meter, resetting........................ 117, 121

Troubleshooting Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 211

TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 185, 307

Tunnel console........................................ 148 12 V socket......................................... 151 armrest................................................ 149 cigarette lighter and ashtray............... 149

Tunnel detection........................................ 82

TV............................................................. 421

Type approval Bluetooth.......................................... 462 radar system....................................... 460 remote control key system................. 460

Type designations................................... 438

Tyre dimension........................................ 316

Tyre load index........................................ 316

Tyre pressure label.................................. 322

Tyres direction of rotation............................ 312 maintenance....................................... 312 pressure...................................... 322, 457 puncture repair................................... 324 specifications...................................... 457 tread depth......................................... 315 tread wear indicators.......................... 314 winter tyres......................................... 315

U

Unlocking from the inside.................................... 175 from the outside................................. 173

Unlocking with the key blade................... 171

USB, connection...................................... 396

USB input................................................ 395

V

Vanity mirror...................................... 88, 150

Ventilation................................................ 129

Vibration damper..................................... 303

Voice control, mobile phone.................... 413

Volvo Sensus............................................. 70

W

Warning lamp Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 200 collision warning system.................... 228 stability and traction control system.. 185

Warning lamps Airbags SRS....................................... 66 alternator not charging......................... 66

Fault in brake system........................... 66 Low oil pressure................................... 66 Parking brake applied........................... 66 seatbelt reminder............................ 27, 66 Warning................................................ 66

Warning sound collision warning system.................... 228

Warning symbols........................... 61, 63, 66

Warning triangle....................................... 323

Washer fluid volume................................................ 451

Washer fluid, filling................................... 351

Washers rear window.......................................... 94 washer fluid, filling.............................. 351 windscreen........................................... 94

Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 366

Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 366

Waxing..................................................... 365

Weights kerb weight......................................... 441

Wheel bolts.............................................. 314 lockable.............................................. 314

Wheel rim, dimensions............................ 316

Wheel rims cleaning.............................................. 365

13 Alphabetical Index

13

487

Wheels removal............................................... 319 snow chains........................................ 315 spare wheel........................................ 317

Wheels and tyres..................................... 317

Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 35

WHIPS child seat/booster cushion................... 36 seating position.................................... 36 whiplash protection........................ 35, 37

Windows, rearview and door mirrors. 22, 366

Windscreen heating................................................ 136

Windscreen, heating.................................. 98

Windscreen washing.................................. 94

Windscreen wiper...................................... 93 rain sensor............................................ 93

Winter driving........................................... 295

Winter tyres.............................................. 315

Wiper blades............................................ 349 changing............................................. 349 Cleaning.............................................. 350 replacing, rear window....................... 350 Service position.................................. 349

Wipers and washing.................................. 93

13 Alphabetical Index

13

4

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the V40 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo V40 Cross Country 2014 Owners Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo V40 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo V40. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Volvo V40 Cross Country 2014 Owners Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Volvo V40 Cross Country 2014 Owners Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Volvo V40 Cross Country 2014 Owners Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Volvo V40 Cross Country 2014 Owners Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo V40 Cross Country 2014 Owners Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.